CADET’S HAND BOOK (ARMY)

Preface
1. National Cadet Corps (NCC), came into existence, on 15 July 1948 under an Act of Parliament.
Over the years, NCC has spread its activities and values, across the length and breadth of the country; in
schools and colleges, in almost all the districts of India. It has attracted millions of young boys and girls, to
the very ethos espoused by its motto, “unity and discipline” and molded them into disciplined and
responsible citizens of the country. NCC has attained an enviable brand value for itself, in the Young India’s
mind space.

2. National Cadet Corps (NCC), aims at character building and leadership, in all walks of life and
promotes the spirit of patriotism and National Integration amongst the youth of the country. Towards this
end, it runs a multifaceted training; varied in content, style and processes, with added emphasis on practical
training, outdoor training and training as a community.

3. With the dawn of Third Millennia, there have been rapid strides in technology, information, social
and economic fields, bringing in a paradigm shift in learning field too; NCC being no exception. A need was
felt to change with times. NCC has introduced its New Training Philosophy, catering to all the new changes
and developments, taking place in the Indian Society. It has streamlined and completely overhauled its
training philosophy, objectives, syllabus, methodology etc, thus making it in sync with times. Subjects like
National Integration, Personality Development and Life Skills, Social Service and Community Development
activities etc, have been given prominent thrust.

4. The new syllabus, has been crystallised after obtaining a detailed feedback, from all the
Directorates and the same having been brainstormed at HQ DG NCC. The syllabus has been implemented
with effect from 01 May 2019.

5. For the ease of Trainees, a summary has been given at the end of each chapter. The syllabus has
been revised, to make it cadet friendly, by removing the commonalities in subjects, of the school/college
syllabus and making it more relevant. It is hoped, that this will facilitate, better assimilation and increased
interest among the cadets.

6. The book has been the outcome, of sincere devotion and relentless effort of the Study Team
ordered by HQ DG NCC. Our sincere gratitude and compliments to them. Any suggestions are welcome
for its improvement in the future editions

7. Contents of this hard work, must form the basis of Institutional Training, with explicit commitment.

(Rajeev Chopra)
Lieutenant General
Director General
National Cadet Corps
Acknowledgement

ADVISORY PANEL

Lieutenant General Rajeev Chopra, AVSM, DG NCC

Major General Sanjay Gupta, VSM, ADG (B) HQ DG NCC

STUDY TEAM

Brigadier SP Sinha, Group Commander, Ghaziabad (UP)

Colonel GS Dhillon , SM UP Dte
Colonel Rahul Srivastava, SM TN&P Dte
Captain (IN ) RK Saini, PHHP&C Dte
Group Captain Neeraj Amba, UP Dte
Lieutenant Colonel Narain Dass, UP Dte
Major R S Shekhawat, OTA, Kamptee

CONSULTATIVE SUPPORT TEAM

Brigadier Ajay Kumar Mahajan, Brig Trg, HQ, DG NCC

Colonel Manish Sinha, Trg Dte, HQ DG NCC
Col Vijay Kumar Trg Dte, HQ DG NCC

SECRETARIAL SUPPORT

Mr Jai Prakash, Senior Assistant

Mr Manoj Bisht, Senior Assistant
SD/SW COMMON SUBJECTS

BLOCK SYLLABUS

Periods
S.No Subject First Second Third Total
Year Year Year Periods
1 NCC General 6 0 0 6

2 National Integration and Awareness 4 3 0 7

3 Drill 21 14 10 45

4 Weapon Training 13 6 6 25

5 Personality Development 5 11 12 28

6 Leadership 3 4 5 12

7 Disaster Management 7 3 4 13

Social Service and Community

8 10 19 18 47
Development

9 Health and Hygiene 5 4 1 10

10 Adventure 1 0 0 1

Environmental Awareness and

11 0 0 3 3
Conservation

12 Obstacle Training 3 3 3 9

13 General Awareness 0 0 4 4

Total 78 67 66 210
SD/SW COMMON SUBJECTS : INDEX

Page Number
S.No Subject
From To

1 NCC General 1 17
18 33
2 National Integration and Awareness

3 Drill 34 65

4 Weapon Training 66 76
77 107
5 Personality Development

6 Leadership 108 127

7 Disaster Management 128 146

Social Service and Community 147 188

8
Development
9 Health and Hygiene 189 205

10 Adventure 206 210

211 215
Environmental Awareness and
11
Conservation

12 Obstacle Training 216 220

13 General Awareness 221 225

INDEX

Page
Ser
Chapter Lesson Year Periods Number
No
From To

NCC General
1. NCC-I Aims, Objectives and Org of NCC I 1 1 4

2. NCC-II Incentives
I 2 5 9
3. NCC-III Duties of NCC Cadets
I 1 10 12
4. NCC-IV NCC Camps: Types and Conduct
I 2 13 17

National Integration and Awareness

I 2 18 20
5. NI-I National Integration: Importance and Necessity

6.. NI-II Factors affecting National Integration I 1 21 24

7. NI-III Unity in Diversity I 1 25 28

8. NI-IV Threats to National Security II 3 29 33

Foot Drill 34 35
I 1
9. FD-I Drill ki Aam Hidayaten aur Words of Command
10. FD-II Savdhan, Vishram, Aram se aur Mudna I 2 36 37
11. FD-III Kadwar Sizing, Teen Line Banana, Khuli Line aur Nikat
I 2 38 39
Line Mein March
12. FD-IV Khade Khade Salute Karna Parade Par, Visarjan aur Line
I 1 40 40
Tod
13. FD-V Tej Chal- Tham aur Dhire Chal-Tham I 3
41 42
II 3
14. FD-VI Dahine, Baen, Aage aur Piche Kadam lena I 1 43 44
15. FD-VII Tej Chal se Mudna I 2 45 46
16.. FD-VIII Tej Chal se Salute Karna II 3 47 48
17. FD-IX Tej kadam Taal aur tham I 1 49 49
18. FD-X Tej KadamTaal se Kadam Badalna I 2 50 50
19. FD-XI Teenon Teen se Ek File aur Ek File se Teenon Teen
II 3 51 51
banana
Rifle Drill
20. RD-I Rifle ke Saath Savdhan, Vishram aur Aaram se I 2 52 52
21. RD-II Rifle ke Saath Parade Par aur Saj I 1 53 53
22. RD-III Rifle ke Saath Visarjan aur Line Tod I 1 54 54
23. RD-IV Bhumi Shastra aur Uthao Shastra I 1 55 55
24. RD-V Bagal Shastra aur Baju Shastra I 1 56 57
25. RD-VI Salami Shastra II 3
58 59
III 3
26. RD-VII Squad Drill III 3 60 60
Ceremonial Drill II 1
61 62
27. CD-I Guard Mounting III 2
28. CD-II Guard of Honour II 1
63 65
III 2

Weapon Training
I 3 66 68
29. WT-I Introduction to .22 Rifle
30. WT-II Handling of .22 Rifle I 3 69 70

31. WT-III Range procedure and Theory of group I 1 71 74

I 6
32. WT-IV Short range firing II 6 75 76
III 6
Personal Developement
Personality Development Capsule
Factors
33. PD-I Self-Awareness I 2 77 83
Empathy
Critical and Creative Thinking
Decision Making and Problem Solving
34. PD-II Communication Skills II 3 84 87
Group Discussions
Coping with Stress and Emotions
I 1
Change your Mindset
35. PD-III II 6 88 97
Time Management
III 6
Social Skills
Team Work
36. PD-IV Career Counselling, SSB Procedure and Interview Skills III 3 98 104
I 2
37. PD-V Public Speaking II 2 105 107
III 3
Leadership
Leadership Capsule
Traits
38. L-I Indicators I 3 108 115
Motivation
Moral Values
Honour Code
Case Studies
Shivaji, APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana
Pratap, Ratan Tata, Kiran Majumdar, Jhansi Ki Rani, N II 4
39. L-II 116 127
Narayan Murthy, Prakash Padukone, Tipu Sultan, III 5
Rabindra Nath Tagore
8

Disaster Management
Disaster Management Capsule
Organisation
40. DM-I Types of Disasters I 3 128 136
Essential Services
Assistance
Civil Defence Organisation
Initiative Trg, Organising Skills,
Dos and Don’ts
2
I
2 137 141
Natural Disasters II
2
41. DM-II III
1 142 143
I
1
Man Made Disasters II
1
III

42. DM-III Fire Services and Fire Fighting I 1 144 146

Social Service and Community Development

Social Service Capsule

43. SS-I Basics of Social Service I 3 147 153
Rural Development Programmes
NGO’s
Contribution of Youth
I 3
44. SS-II Swachh Bharat Abhiyan II 3 154 155
III 3
Social Service and Community Development
Activities
Social Evils
Beti Padhao Beti Bachao
Drug Abuse
I 1
Msn Indradhanush (Vaccination)
45. SS-III II 12 156 171
Digital Awareness
III 12
Waste Management
Women Health and Sanitation
Tree Plantation
Traffic Awareness
Pollution
I
1
46. SS-IV Protection of Children & Women Safety II 172 175
1
III
1

47. SS-V Road/Rail Travel Safety II 1 176 178

9

I 1
48. SS-VI New Initiatives
II 1 179 184
III 1
I 1
49. SS-VII Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness II 1 185 188
III 1

Health and Hygiene

50. HH-I Hygiene and Sanitation (Personal and Camp) I 1 189 192

I 3
First Aid in Common Medical Emergencies and
51. HH-II 193 201
Treatment of Wounds
II 3

I 1

52. HH-III Introduction to Yoga II 1 202 205

III 1

Adventure
53. AD-I Adventure I 1 206 210

Environmental Awareness and Conservation

Environmental Awareness and Conservation

54. EA-I III 3 211 215

Obstacle Training I 3

55. OT-I Obstacle Training II 3 216 220

III 3

General Awareness
56. GA-I General Awareness III 4 221 225
58

CHAPTER AD - VI

SALAMI SHASTRA

Salami Shastra

1. Zarurat. Rifle ke saath salami shastr, unche darje ka salute hai. Badi parades mein ya
guard of honour mein VIP ko izzat dene ke liye aur quarter guard mein khara sentry, Major se upar wale
Officer ko izzat dene ke liye Salami Shastra ki karyawahi karta hai.

2. Bayan se Namuna.

(a) Jab savdhan position se word of command milta hai, ginti se “Salami Shastra ek” toh is
word of command par dahine haath se rifle ko sidha upar uchhalen aur baen haath se forehand
guard aur dahine haath se small of the butt ko pakden aur shout karen ‘ek’.Is position mein dekhne
ki baten, baen haath fore hand guard par chaaron angulian bahar se aur angutha andar se pakra
hua, charon angulian bahar se angutha andar se zameen ki taraf point karte hue, rifle badan ke
dahini taraf 90 degree par. Baki position pahle ki tarah.

(b) Jab word of command milta hai “squad do” toh is word of command par dono haathon ki
madad se rifle ko badan ke samne aur bich mein layen, saath hi baen haath ko chhor kar rifle ke
baen bagal mein lagaen aur shout karen ‘do’. Is position mein dekhne ki baten, rifle badan ke
samne aur beech main 90 degree par khari magazine aage, kohni se kalai tak rifle se mili hui, baen
haath ki chaaron angulian aur angutha mila hua aur cocking handle kalme wali anguli aur anguthe
ke bich, baki position savdhan.

(c) Jab word of command milta hai “squad teen” toh is word of command par dahine haath se
rifle ko niche khinchen aur sidha karen, baen haath se rifle ko samne se pakaren, dahina paon
sidha saath hi chalti halat se, rifle ko samne se pakaren, dahina paon sidha saath hi chalti halat
mein baen paon ki piche lagaen, shout karen ‘teen’. Is position mein dekhne ki baten, rifle baen
haath se forehand guard se pakre hue, angutha baen taraf khara, dahina haath butt par, charon
angulian aur angutha zameen ki taraf point karta hua, barrel nak se 6 inch dur, dahina paon baen
paon ke piche chalti halat mein laga hua. Baaki position savdhan.

Ek Pe Posn Do Pe Posn Teen Pe Posn

59

Salami Shastra Se Baju Shastra

3. Zarurat. Salami Shastra se rifle ko niche lane ke liye Baju Shastra ki karyawahi ki jaati hai.

4. Bayan se Namuna.

(a) Jab Salami Shastra se word of command milta hai, ginti se “Baju Shastra ek’ toh is word
of command par dahine haath ko baen haath ke upar pakden aur dahine paon ko uthakar baen paon ke
saath savdhan position mein lagaen aur shouting karen ‘ek’.Is position mein dekhne ki baten, rifle usi
position mein, dahine haath se baen haath ke upar hand guard pakra hua. Baaki position savdhan.

(b) Jab word of command “squad do” toh is word of command par dahine haath se rifle ko
dahine le jaen aur baen haath ko chhor kar flash hider se U shape mein pakaren, rifle zamin se 1 inch upar,
dubara rifle ke hand guard se savdhan position ki tarah pakden, shout karen ‘do’. Is position mein dekhne
ki baten, baen haath se flash hider U shape mein pakra hua, dhaine haath ki chaaron angulian bahar se
angutha andar se, savdhaan position ki tarah pakra hua, rifle zamin se ek inch upar butt toe ke barabar.

(c) Jab word of command “squad teen” toh is word of command par baen haath ko teji se
savdhan position mein layen aur dahine haath se rifle ko zamin par savdhan position mein layen, shout
karen ‘teen’. Is position mein dekhne ki baten, position savdhan.

Abhyas. Ustad ke word of command pe squad isi kayawahi ka abhyas kare.

Ek Pe Posn Do Pe Posn Teen Pe Posn

60

CHAPTER AD - VII

SQUAD DRILL

Uddesh

1. Squad Drill ka abhyas karana hai.

Tartib

2. Ustad squad ko kadwar sizing karke sabak ko do bhagon me chalayega:-

(a) Bhag I - Word of Command pe Rifle ke saath khade khade squad drill ka abhyas
karana hai.

(b) Bhag II - Word of Command pe Rifle ke saath Tej Chal se squad drill ka abhyas
karana hai.
61

CHAPTER CD - I

GUARD MOUNTING

Guard Mounting Ka Tarika

1. Zarurat. Guard Mounting aam taur pe Quarter Guard ya kisi bhi authorized adhikari
(General Officer) ke awaas pe ya visit ke dauran ki jaati hai.

2. Bayan va Tarika.

(a) Guard mounting ke liye 2+6 jawanon ki zarurat

hoti hai. Is mein 6 jawan aur guard commander aur
guard ka 2IC hota hai. Guard mount hone ke liye
hamesha, do ranks mein ‘fall in’ hoti hai, jis mein guard
commander sabse dahine hota hai aur, guard 2IC agli
rank ke sabse baen hota hai.

(b) Guard Mounting NCO guard ke saamne 12

kadam pe hota hai. Woh guard ko “fall in” karega aur
inspect karega. Iska tarika is prakar se hai:-

(i) Jab word of command milta hai

“Guard-Parade Par” toh puri guard savdhan
karegi, guard mounting ke sthan pe march karegi, tham karke saamne mud karegi aur
‘khuli line’ karegi aur vishram karegi.

(ii) Jab word of command milta hai ‘Guard Savdhan’ toh guard savdhan hogi.

(iii) Jab word of command milta hai “Guard Dahine Saj” toh guard commander dahine
mud karega, 5 kadam march karega, tham aur piche mud karega. Phir pehle agli line ko
saj karega, phir, pichli line ko saj karega aur word of command dega “samne dekh” aur
phir apni position pe waapis aa jaega.

(iv) Jab word of command milta hai “Guard Bagal Shastra” toh guard bagal shastra ki
karywahi keregi.

(v) Iske baad guard mounting NCO, Orderly Officer (Nirikshin Adhikari) ko repoprt
dega “Guard nirikshan ke liye haazir hai’ (Orderly Officer ka sthan guard mounting NCO
se 6 kadam piche hota hai). Report dekar guard NCO, guard ke dahine, guard commander
se 6 kadam ke fasle par march karke, saamne mud karke khada hojaega.

(c) Orderly Officer. Orderly officer ab guard ko is tarike se nirikshan karega aur mount
karega:-

(i) Word of command dega “Guard-Baju-Shastra. Guard baju shastra karegi aur
savdhan mein khadi hogi. Orderly Officer ek-ek karke guard ka nirikshan karega – pehle
agli line phir pichli line. Nirikshan ke baad Orderly Officer waapis apne sthan pe aa jata
hai.

(ii) Word of command dega “Guard Nirikshan ke liye Janch Shastra” toh guard
‘Nirikshan ke lie Janch Shastra’ ki karyawahi karegi. Orderly Officer ab ek-ek karke
haathiyar ka nirikshan karta hai, aur guard commander se shuru karta hai. Guard
commander apne nirikshan ke baad “fall out” karta hai, aur Orderly Officer ke saath baaki
guard ka nirikshan karwata hai. Nirikshan ke baad, Orderly Officer waapis apne sthan pe
jata hai aur guard cmmander apne sthan pe.

(iii) Word of command dega “Guard-Bolt Chalao” toh guard sikhe hue tarike se bolt ko
dhire se aage chodti hai aur band karti hai.
62

(iv) Word of command dega “Guard-Baju Shastra” toh guard Baju Shastra ki karywahi
karegi.
(v) Word of command dega “Number - Samne Ki line - stick orderly-stick orderly Line
Tod” to niyukt kiya hua stick orderly line tod ki karywahi karega aur guard mounting NCO
ke dahine jaakar khada ho jaega.

(vi) Word of command dega “Guard-Bagal Shastra” toh guard Bagal Shastra ki
karywahi kerega.

(vii) Word of command dega “Guard - Apne Duty ke Liye Dahine Se-TejChal” to guard
march off karti hai, orderly officer ko ‘dahine dekh’ ki karyewahi karti hai aur phir purani
guard se takeover ki karyewahi karti hai.

(d) Guard Room ki Karyawahi. Sentry jab nayi guard ko aate hue dekhta hai toh woh
purani guard ko “Turn Out” karta hai. Nayi guard jab apne diye hue sthan pe khadi ho jaati hai toh
purana guard commander, apni guard ko nayi guard ke saamne, 15 kadam pe “fall in” karta hai.
Ab, purani guard, nayi guard ko “salami shastra” deti hai aur nai guard bhi purani guard ko “salami
shastra” karti hai. Is ke bad, dono guard ek-ek karke, “baju shastra” karke “aram se” karte hain.
Iske baad, nayi guard ka sentry, purane guard ke sentry ko ‘relief’ karta hai, jo purana guard 2IC
karwata hai. Ab purani guard visarjan karti hai aur nayi guard unko “salami shastra” deti hai aur
purani guard, nai guard ke samne se gujarti hui, “dahine dekh” karti hai.

(e) Sentries ki Badli. Guard commander naye sentry ko sentry post tak march karte
hue le jaega. Bagair kisi word of command ke, naya sentry, purane sentry ke baen position lega
aur saamne mudega. Ab guard commander, dono sentry ke saamne 3 kadam pe khada hoga aur
sentry ko uski duties ke bare mein bataega. Iske baad gaurd commander word of command dega
“SentryBadli” toh purana sentry do kadam aage chalega aur naya sentry do kadam dahine lega.
Ab naya sentry apni post lega aur guard commander purane sentry ko word of command
dega“Purana sentry – Tej Chal” aur usko guard room mein lejae ga. Ab naya sentry bagal shastra
karega aur apne sthan pe jaake khada ho jaega.

3. Abhyas. Ustad ke word of command pe squad isi kayawahi ka abhyas kare.

63

CHAPTER CD - II

GUARD OF HONOUR

Guard Of Honour Ka Tarika

1. Zarurat. NCC cadets dwara Guard of Honour nimnlikhit adhikarion ko pradaan ki jaati hai
jab woh kisi NCC camp ka visit karte hain ya phir aise mauke hon jahaan pe uchh adhikari invite kiye gaye
hon:-

(a) Rashtrapati, Up-Rashtrapati aur Pradhan Mantri.

(b) Governors and Lt Governors.

(c) Raksha Mantri aur Raksha Rajya Mantri.

(d) States ke Mukhya Mantri.

(e) Sena / Nau Sena / Vayu Sena Pramukh.

(f) The Defence Secretary.

(g) Command ka General Officer Commanding-in-Chief (Army Wing Ke liye)

(h) Nau Sena Command ke Flag Officer Commanding-in-chief (Naval Wing units only).

(j) Vayu Sena ke Air Officer Commanding-in-Chief (Air Wing Units only).

(k) Sena/Nau Sena/Vayu Sena ke Up Parmukh.

(l) The Dignitaries addressing the convocation of a University.

(m) University ke Chancellor.

(n) University ke Pro-Chancellor / Vice Chancellor as Chief guest.

(o) Director General NCC.

2. Bayan va Tarika.

(a) Guard do ranks mein form up karegi, agli line aur pichli line mein 4 kadam ka faasla hoga.
Guard Officer aur Colour JCO, agli line se 2 kadam aage aur centre mein honge. Guard
commander agli line se 8 kadam aage hoga, cadet se cadet ka faasla 24 inch hoga.

(b) Band, guard ke agli line ki seedh mein uske dahine 7 kadam pe hoga.

(c) Do stick orderly dias ke dahine aur baen khade honge, dias ke agle kinare se 2 kadam
dahine aur baen.

(d) Conducting adhikari, VIP ko receive karke, dias ke dahine aur 3 kadm piche khadahoga.

3. Guard ki Nafri. Guard of Honour ki nafri is prakar se hogi:-

(a) For President. 150 rank and file, 3 divisions mein.

(b) For Vice President and Prime Minister. 100 rank and file, 2 division mein.

4. Salutes.

(a) Rashtriya Salute. Kewal Rashtrapati ya Governors ko apne rajya mein..

64

(b) General Salute. Major General aur uske upar ke rank ke adhikari.

(c) Salami Shastra. To all VIPs.

5. Inspection / Nirikshan. Iske liye tartib is prakar se hogi:-

(a) VIP ke aane ke samay, guard savdhan mein hogi.

(b) VIP ke dias pe pahuchne par, guard, VIP ke aude ke mutabik, Rashtriya / General Salute
ya Salami Shastra karegi aur fir Baju Shastra karegi.

(c) Guard commander, aage badh kar VIP ko report dega “Unit Samman Guard - Aap ke
Nirikshan ke liye haazir hai- Sriman (Srimati Ji)”. Salute kar ke guard commander VIP ka wait
karega.

(d) VIP dias se utar ke guard ki taraf bade ga. Guard commander VIP ko escort karega aur
uske baen rahe ga. Band ke pahale jawan ki line mein aate hi, guard commander VIP ke dahine
aur unki line mein ho jaye ga.

(e) Pilot - sirf President ke liye hi aage chalenge.

(f) Nirikshan ke dauran, sabhi ranks VIP ke taraf nazar milaen ge. Band nazar saamne rakhe
VIP ke saath saath, sabhi ke sir bhi harkat karenge. Nirikshan khatam hote hi band band hojaega,
aur isi pe sabhi ranks aage dekhne lagenge. Sirf agli line ka hi nirikshan hoga.

(g) Nirikshan ke baad, VIP ko waapis dias pe guard commander escort kare ga. Guard
commander VIP ko salute karke apne sthan pe wapis aa jaega. VIP ke jaane ke baad guard ko
‘vishram’ diya jaega.

6. Abhyas. Ustad ke word of command pe squad isi karyawahi ka abhyas kare.

SUMMARY
Foot Drill

1. Drill hume Discipline shikhati hai aur humare bearing, smartness, appearance aur turnout mein
sudhar lati hai. Saath hi self-confidence ko badane mein madad karti hai. Drill hume order manna sikhati
hai.

2. Word of command ki loudness is baat pe nirbhar karta hai ki word of Command kitne logon ko diya
jar aha hai ya unki duri kitni hai. Word of Command clarity (Safai), Pitch and Timing par nirbhar karta hai.
Ek acha command sabhi ko achi tarah se samaj aana chahiye.

3. Savdhan, Vishram, Aram se ya Khade khade mudhna drill ke sabse mehtavpuran movements
hain.

4. Khuli line - VIP ko nirikshan karana ho toh Khuli line karyawahi ki Jaati hai.

5. Nikat Line – Jab nirikshan ho jata hai toh march karne se pehle ‘Nikat Line’ ki karyawahi ki jaati
hai.

6. Khade Khade Salute – Humare samne se koi bhi salute lene wale adhikari gujren toh unhen izzat
dene ke liye khade-khade salute ki karyawahi ki jaati hai.

7. Discipline ko kayam rakhte hue ek jagah se dusri jagah jane ke liye ‘Tej Chal kiya jata hain. Dhire
Chal parade ke nirikshan ke liye VIP ke aage jo pilot chalte hai who dhire chal se chalte hain.
65

8. Jaise ki ‘Ginti se Salute-dahine salute ek’, ‘Squad Do’ (Squad two), ‘Squad Chhe’ (Squad six),
‘Squad Saat’ (Squad seven), yeh bahut hi mahatvapurn movements hai aur sabhi cadets ko iski jankari
honi chahiye.

Arms Drill

9. Rifle ke Saath Savdhan - savdhan khali haath ki tarah, rifle ki position heel butt par dahine haath
ki taraf point karta hua. Kalai rifle ke pichhe cover kiya hua.

10. Rifle ke Saath Vishraam aur Aaram Se – Baen paon ki position jaise khali haath mein seekh chuke
hain. Dahine haath se rifle pura aage dhakela hua, Dahini kohni ka kham nikala hua. Bayan baju savdhan
position mein.

11. Word of command milta hai “aaram se”, to sikhe hue tarike se karyawahi karen. Is position me
dekhne ki baten, jaise khali haath mein seekh chuke hain.

12. Rifle ke saath Visarjan - Jab savdhan position se word of command milta hai “squad / platoon
visarjan” toh dahine mud karen, bagal shastra karen, salute karen aur, teen kadam aage lekar tham karen
aur, sidhe aage nikal jayen.

13. Bhumi Shastra - Jab rifle ko savdhan position se zamin pe rakhna ho to ‘Bhumi Shastra’ ki
karyawahi ki jati hai.

14. Uthao Shastra - Jab rifle ko savdhan position se zamin se uthana ho toh ‘Uthao Shastra’ ki
karyawahi ki jati hai.

15. Bagal Shastra:-

(a) Rifle ke saath ek jagah se dusri jagah jana ho toh bagal shastra se march karke jaate
hain.
(b) Badi parades mein regiment / unit contingent, bagal shastra se march past karte hain.
(c) Quarter guard mein khada sentry Nb/Sub se Captain tak ko, bagal shastra se salute
karta hai.

16. Bagal Shastra se rifle ko niche lane ke liye Baju Shastra ki karyawahi ki jati hai. Parade samapti
hone ke bad bhi Bagal Shastra se Baju Shastra ki karyawahi karte hain.

17. Rifle ke saath salami shastra - unche darje ka salute hai. Badi parades mein ya guard of honour
mein VIP ko izzat dene ke liye aur quarter guard mein khara sentry, Major se upar wale Officer ko izzat
dene ke liye Salami Shastra ki karyawahi karta hai.

18. Baju Shastra - Salami Shastra se rifle ko niche lane ke liye Baju Shastra ki karyawahi ki jaati hai.

Ceremonial Drill

19. Guard mounting aam taur pe Quarter Guard ya kisi bhi authorized adhikari (General Officer) ke
awaas pe ya visit ke dauran ki jaati hai.

20. Guard ki Nafri. Guard of Honour ki nafri is prakar se hogi:-

(a) For President. 150 rank and file, 3 divisions mein.

(b) For Vice President and Prime Minister. 100 rank and file, 2 division mein.

21. Salutes.

(a) Rashtriya Salute. Kewal Rashtrapati ya Governors ko apne rajya mein.

(b) General Salute. Major General aur uske upar ke rank ke adhikari.
(c) Salami Shastra. To all VIPs
75

CHAPTER WT - IV

SHORT RANGE FIRING

Introduction

1. Jis tarah bimar ke lakshan ko dekh kar bimari ka pata chalta hain, usi tarah, target par goliyon ki
maar ya group ka vishleshan karne se, hone wali galtiya ka pata chalta hain. Group me goliyon ki maar aur
unke failav ko dekh kar firer ki kabliayat ka asani se pata lagaya ja sakta hai.

Short Range Firing (Point 22 Rifle)

Practice Target Range in Rounds Instructions Scoring

Type Yards
Deliberate 1’ x 1’ 25 10 (a) Position lying supported Bull & Inner – 03 points
Magpie – 02 points
(b) One practice of 5 rounds Outer – 01 points
HPs – 15 points

Note:- Out of 12 rounds authorized per cadets, 2 rounds will be pooled for zeroing and re-classification of
failures.

Aiming and Alteration of Sight

2. Zarurat. Firing ke dauran agar yeh pata chalta hai ki, durust aim aur firing ke babzood goli
POA se upar ya niche lagti hai to, back sight ko adjust karke setting karna zaruri hai.

3. Elevation. Back sight ko jo adjustment karni hai who niche diye table ki madad se ki ja sakti
hai jis men, 100 yds pe jo change karte hain, us se MPI kitni badalti hai.

Range Target Rise or Drop of MPI on Target

200 Yards 6 inches
300 Yards 12 inches
400 Yards 18 inches
500 Yards 24 inches

4. Sight men 50 yards ki alteration se, upar diye hue effect adhe ho jate hain, aur agar sight men 200
yards ki alteration ki jati hai to, upar diya hua effect double ho jatahai.

Sankshep

5. Range pe durust firing karna sabhi ka kartavya hai. Is liye agar goli target pe nahi lagti hai to turant
sight men alteration karke goli target pe marna zaruri hain.
76

SUMMARY

1. Range mein firing karne se ek cadet weapon training ke kala mein maharat hasil karne mein
madat karta hain aur saath hi hathiyar ko self protection mein istemal karna seekh ta hain.

2. Rifle .22 No MK-II, MK IV and Deluxe BA kialag-alag visheshtaen hain jaise ki; wazan, lambai,
magazine ki capacity, velocity, range, calibre, ammunition and rate of fire.

3. Rifle ko kholte aur jodhte waqt dhayn rakhna chahiye ki rifle ke hisse purje mix na ho jaye. Saath
hi Sight setting ka bhi dhyan rakhna chahiye.

4. Rifle ki efficiency uske saaf safai aur dekh bhal par nirbhar karti hai aur saath firer ki skill par bhi
nirbhar karti hai.

5. Ladai ke samay mein ek soldier ko jald se jald rifle ko load karna aur accurate fire karna aana
chahiye. Lying position firing ke liye sabse achi position hoti hain. Firing ke teen basic usul hai, Majboot
pakad, Sahi aiming aur durust trigger operation.

6. Firing ko safe aur sahi tariqe se karane ke liyes ahi range procedure follow karna bahut zaruri
hain. Firing ki taiyari bahut hi detail mein karni chahiye aur teen bhago mein baant na chahiye; before
firing, during firing and after firing. Sabhi orders aur instructions ko follow karke hi firing ko suru karna
chahiye.

7. Short range firing 25 yardse figure 1’x1’ target par karayi jaati hain.

8. Sight alteration ya zeroing bullets ko Point of Aim mein lane ke liye karai jaati hain. Sight
alteration back sight ko adjust karke kiya jaata hain.
88

CHAPTER PD - III

GROUP DISCUSSIONS

COPING WITH STRESS AND EMOTIONS

Introduction

1. Stress is a very common phenomenon and is universal in nature. It is our body’s reaction to
people and events and to our own thoughts. Some level of stress is normal, such as before a test, stage
performance or an athletic event. Coping with stress means recognizing the source of stress in our lives,
recognizing how this affects us physically and emotionally, and acting in ways that help us control our levels
of stress, by changing our environment or life style and learning how to relax.

Understanding Stress and its Impact

2. Stress is unique and personal to each of us. What is relaxing to one person may be stressful to
another. But too much stress can have physical and psychological effects that interfere with the health and
well-being of an individual. Overtime repeated stress can lower self-esteem, decrease academic
performance and create a cycle of self-blame and self-doubt.

3. The key to reducing stress is to find strategies that help you as an individual. The best way to cope
with unhealthy stress is to recognize when your stress levels are building. While we often think of stress as
the result of external events, the events themselves are not necessarily stressful. It is the way we react to
an event that causes stress.

Stress Management Techniques

4. There are many ways to manage negative stress. Everyone needs to find ways that work best for
them.

(a) Take Deep Breath. Stress often causes us to breathe quickly and this almost always
causes more stress. Try to take deep slow breaths. Breathe in through your nose and count as
you breathe out through mouth. Inhale enough so your lower abdomen rises and falls.

(b) Talk It Out. When you feel stressed, try to express your feelings. Bottling of feelings
can increase stress. Share your feelings. Perhaps a friend, family members, teacher can help
you see your problem in a new way. Talking with someone else can help clear your mind of
confusion so that you can focus on problem solving. Even if it is slightly embarrassing, asking for
help after a problem occurs may avoid serious problems later. Writing down thoughts and feeling
can help clarify the situation and give a new perspective.

(c) Take A Break. Recognize when you are most stressed and allow yourself some
reasonable break. When things seem especially difficult, take a walk or otherwise change your
scenery.

(d) Create A Quiet Place in Your Mind. You cannot always run away, but you can dream.
Imagining a quiet place can take you out of a stressful situation. When you have the chance, take
a moment to close your eyes and imagine a place where you feel relaxed and comfortable. Notice
all the details of your chosen place, including pleasant sounds, smells and temperature.

(e) Pay Attention to Physical Comfort. Be as physically comfortable as the situation will
allow. Wear comfortable clothing. If it`s too hot, go somewhere where it`s not. If chair is
uncomfortable, move. Do not wait until your discomfort turns into a real problem.

(f) Move. Physical activity can help reduce and prevent stress. When you feel nervous,
angry or upset, release the pressure through exercise or physical activity. Try to find something
you enjoy and make regular time for it. Running, stretching, walking or dancing can be done
anywhere. Working in the garden, cleaning or playing with your younger children can relieve
stress, make you relax and energize you.
89

(g) Take Care of your Body. Healthy eating and adequate sleep fuels your mind as
well as your body. Avoid eating too much caffeine and sugar. Well-nourished bodies are better
able to cope with stress.

(h) Laugh. Maintain your sense of humour, including the ability to laugh at yourself. Share
jokes and funny stories with your friends. Laughter is good for you.

(j) Manage your Time. Plan ahead and make a realistic schedule for yourself and include
time for stress reduction as a regular part of your schedule. Trying to take care of everything at
once can seem overwhelming and may keep you from accomplishing anything. Instead, make a
list of what you have to do, then do one at a time, checking them off as you finish. Do the most
important ones first. If a particularly unpleasant task faces you, do it early in the day and get over
with it; the rest of your day will be less stressful.

(k) Know your Limits. When in a stressful situation, ask yourself is this my problem? If
it isn`t, leave it alone. If it is, can I resolve it now? Once the problem is settled, leave it alone.
Do not agonize over the decision, and try to accept situation you cannot change. There are many
circumstances in life beyond your control. If problem is beyond your control and cannot be
changed at the moment, learn to accept as it is, for now, until such time when you can change
things.

(l) Do you have to be Right Always? Do you get upset when things don`t go your way?
Consider cooperation or compromise rather than confrontation. It may reduce the strain and help
everyone feel more comfortable.

(m) Have a Good Cry. It is normal for people of all ages to cry. A good cry during
stressful times can be a healthy way to bring relief to your stress, and may prevent a headache or
other physical consequences of stress. However, crying daily can be sign of depression.

(n) Look for the Good Things around You. It is easy to see only the negative side when you
are stressed. Your thoughts can become like a pair of very dark glasses, allowing you to see very
little light or joy in your life. Decide to notice five good things around you. These can be positive
or enjoyable moments or interactions. These may seem like small events but as these good things
add they can often provide a big lift to energy and spirits and help you begin to see things in a new,
more balanced way.

(o) Talk Less, Listen More. Listening banishes stress, makes you more popular, more
knowledgeable, more sensitive.

CHANGE YOUR MINDSET

What is Mind Set

5. Most people keep a running account of what’s happening to them, what it means, and what they
should do. In other words, our minds are constantly monitoring and interpreting. That’s just how we stay
on track. But sometimes the interpretation process goes awry. Some people put more extreme
interpretations on things that happen—and then react with exaggerated feelings of anxiety, depression,
anger or superiority. Your mindset is the sum of your knowledge, including beliefs and thoughts about the
world and yourself in it. It is your filter for information you get in and put out. It determines how you
receive and react to information.

6. In a growth mindset, people believe that their most basic abilities can be developed through
dedication and hard work. Brains and talent are just the starting point. This view creates a love of learning
and a resilience that is essential for great accomplishment. Virtually all great people have had these
qualities. Teaching a growth mindset creates motivation and productivity in the worlds of business,
education, and sports. It enhances relationships.
90

How to Change Your Mindset

7. Get the Best Information Only. Try to find the very best information in your field. Then
focus on learning this information only. In any worthwhile field there is more information available as
needed, especially in the internet. You have to narrow down the information input to the most effective.
One of the critical personal skills today is not to find information, but to select the best information and avoid
the rest.

8. Role Model the Best People. Look for the best people in your field and try to model what they
did right. Adopt their kind of thinking and mindset. Follow them. Of course, keep and only add what you
think is right for you. That way you can actually improve and personalize their mindset to fit perfectly for
you. It’s never copying, it’s taking what works for you by getting inspiration and quality input.

9. Examine Your Current Beliefs. Examine your mindset by looking at your current belief-
system. Are these beliefs supporting you or are there self-limiting beliefs? You have to identify those
possible blocks and turn them around, because whether you know about limiting beliefs or not, they are
working in your subconscious mind. To uncover your beliefs ask yourself the right questions about where
you want to go and what is standing in your way right now. The key then is to turn those beliefs around
by declaring supportive statements on the same belief. To internalize these new supportive beliefs you
can make use of affirmations.

10. Shape Your Mindset with Vision and Goals. A proactive approach to build your mindset is to
clearly see where you want to go. Seeing a vision, images describing your end result clearly in your mind’s
eye, will create a strong pull towards this end result. Then go on and break your vision into goals. It will
shape your mindset to conform to your vision. Learn and adapt from your own experience and always try
to look deeper for the real reasons why you get the results you are getting.

11. Find Your Voice. One of the most beautiful things is when you find your very own way,
something what you could call finding your voice. To help you find this, answer these four questions.

(a) What are you good at? That’s your mind.

(b) What do you love doing? That’s your heart.

(c) What need can you serve? That’s the body.

(d) And finally, what is life asking of you? What gives your life meaning and purpose? What
do you feel like you should be doing? In short, what is your conscience directing you to do? That
is your spirit.

12. Protect Your Mindset. One thing you have to do is to protect your mindset against the nay
sayers and people who want to drag you down. You also have to protect it against bad information and
against overload. Keeping your confidence is a big thing. So please stay on the right path, look to improve
yourself and to help others along the way. You can’t go wrong with that.

13. Let Go of Comparisons. Where you are at this very moment is all that matters. Try to stay
focused on your own situation, needs and dreams without worrying about what other people are doing. A
lot can be said for the gratitude movement – focusing on your own successes and what you have in your
life is the path to true joy. When you switch that focus to what others may have or be doing you take a
detour that will not end well. The reality of other people’s situations is not transparent so your desires and
jealousies are not even based on the full picture. The family with two luxury cars and a large house may
be deeply in debt. The woman who seems to have it all may be lonely while her husband works 90-hour
weeks so they can have those material possessions. What are your values and goals? Those are the
key questions you can use to direct your path.

14. Put an End to Perfectionism. Perfectionism is often the biggest roadblock we face. Too
many people feel that if they can’t deliver 100% with everything right and “just so”, then they should
abandon the idea completely. Learn to take one step at a time, build on things (skills, tasks, writing) and
accept that it will never be perfect. It is important to look at growth over time and accept that putting
91

something imperfect out there in the universe is better than staying safe and never attempting anything
new.

15. Look at the Evidence. When you hear yourself saying you can’t do something or are not
good enough force your own hand and demand the evidence to back up the negative thoughts. Most of
what you are thinking can be counter argued and disproved when you look at what you have done in the
past, the feedback you received, etc. You may tell yourself you are not as good a blogger as someone
else who is in the limelight, no one comments or cares about what you write. When you challenge that
thought and look for evidence you see you do receive some comments and positive feedback. You may
feel alone and like you are “never” included in social events, but when questioning this you admit you have
been to a party last month and had coffee with a friend last week. You may not be as busy as you wish,
but you are actually included and can make the decision to organise a social event yourself.

16. Redefine What Failure Means. Fear of failing holds many of us back, especially high
achievers who may be afraid to deviate from their comfort zones. If you go through life afraid to fail you
often end up living a life where you never try anything new. When you re-define “fail” to mean “lessons
learned” you can start to see how every step you take brings you closer to your dreams. When an idea or
project fails to take off it offers you an opportunity to learn. What could you do differently? What did not
work and why? Is there a better path for you to travel down?

17. Stop Worrying about What “People” Think. You will never please everyone so basing your
decisions on what other people will think of what you do or say is an exercise in frustration. This is true
whether it is business where you cannot have everyone as your target market or your personal life where
your friends and family have their own ideas separate to your own. Most people are not even thinking
about you and your actions on a day to day basis so why hand over power to them and let their potential
reactions influence your actual actions.

TIME MANAGEMENT

Essentials of Time Management

18. Time management is a set of skills, tools, and systems that work together to help you get more
value out of your time and use it to accomplish what you want. Successful people use time management
to achieve outstanding results, both personally and professionally. The key to time management is to
realize that you cannot possibly do everything that there is to do; instead, you have to prioritise what you
are going to do with the limited time that you have at your disposal. Look in a mirror and you will see your
biggest time waster. Until you come to grips with that reality, your personal time problems will remain.

19. Time management helps you to: -

(a) Reduce or eliminate wasted time and effort so you’ll have more productive time each day.

(b) Improve your productivity so you can accomplish more with less effort.

(c) Focus your time and energy on what is most important and make time for the things you
want and value. Thus, help you find greater balance and fulfilment.

(d) Improve your performance while reducing stress.

(e) Set and achieve your long-term goals.

PRINCIPLES OF TIME MANAGEMENT

20. There are some basic principles of time management. These are given in the subsequent
paragraphs.

21. Develop a Personal Sense of Time. Make sure you know where your time goes. Don’t
depend on memory, it’s treacherous. Put time under the microscope. You cannot manage time that is
past. But you can examine how you managed it in an objective and realistic way.
92

22. Identify Long-Term Goals. The foundation of good time management is to first, find out what
matters deeply to you – what it is you really want to achieve in life. Spend time on considering what are
your own personal values? What really matters to you at this stage of your life? Remember, they must be
your values no-one else’s. In this, concentrate on four key areas of your life - Self and Well-being,
Community and Humanity, Home and Family and Business and Career.

23. Concentrate on High Return Activities. In any organisation there are a few basic
functions, which are central to its effective functioning. For a classroom teacher the high-return activity will
be enabling the children to learn well. For a principal it will be empowering staff to be effective teachers by
having a smoothly running school. Therefore, identify which activities are going to give you the highest
return and concentrate on them.

24. Weekly and Daily Planning. Traditional time management teaching talks of daily planning, so
why change? If we mainly focus on our daily scheduling, we’re looking at what’s under our nose and we
tend to become immersed in the urgent. Hence, from our monthly goals and objectives, plan a weekly
focus. Planning on a weekly basis helps us to take better control of our lives.

25. Make the Best Use of Your Best Time. The quality of your attention or concentration
varies at different times. You may notice that you habitually tend to be more mentally alert, at certain times
of the day. 20% of your time produces 80% of your high-quality output. The most important tasks in a day
only take about 20 percent of our time and will make 80 percent of the difference to the smooth running of
things. So, make sure that you manage well that critical 20% of your time. Learn to focus on the vital few
things which will make a long-term difference.

26. Make Use of Committed Time. You may sometimes complain that you lack time. But
you have all the time there is for you. At work there is time which you can choose to spend as, committed
time. If you are alert you may find portions of it, which are actually free time. Think of an example of
committed time in the last week, where you found unexpectedly that you had at least half an hour to spare.
What did you do with it? Could you have put that time to better use? What would you need to have had
with you in order to do so?

27. Manage Your Health.

(a) Even a few weeks off, being ill is going to involve you in a major waste of productive time.
Depending on the nature of your illness, you may be able to use it in some constructive way. To
give to your work and to others high quality time you must top up your energy levels.

(b) Do you get enough sleep? The norm is eight hours, slightly less as you grow older. You
can function on much less, but your creativity is 15% down. Do you apply common sense to diet?
The Golden rule is moderation in all things. Do you take exercise? Do you take holidays?
Remember that you can do a full year’s work in 11 months, but you cannot do it in 12 months. It is
a good idea to spend some time just meditating.

SOCIAL SKILLS

Types of Etiquette

28. Etiquette is a code of behaviour that delineates expectations for social behaviour according to
contemporary conventional norms within a society, social class, or group. Rules of etiquette encompass
most aspects of social interaction in any society. The various types of etiquettes are discussed below:-

29. Types of Etiquettes.

(a) Social Etiquette. Social etiquette is how to behave in the society.

(b) Bathroom Etiquette. Bathroom etiquette refers to the set of rules which an individual
need to follow while using public restrooms or office toilets. Make sure you leave the restroom
clean and tidy for the other person.
93

(c) Corporate Etiquette. Corporate Etiquette refers to how an individual should behave
while he is at work. Each one needs to maintain the decorum of the organisation. Don’t loiter
around unnecessary or peep into other’s cubicles.

(d) Wedding Etiquette. Wedding is a special event in every one’s life. Individuals should
ensure they behave sensibly at weddings. Never be late to weddings or drink uncontrollably.

(e) Meeting Etiquette. Meeting Etiquette refers to styles one need to adopt when he is
attending any meeting, seminar, presentation and so on. Listen to what the other person has to
say. Never enter meeting room without a notepad and pen. It is important to jot down important
points for future reference.

(f) Telephone Etiquette. It is essential to learn how one should interact with the other
person over the phone. Telephone etiquette refers to the way an individual should speak on the
phone. Never put the other person on long holds. Make sure you greet the other person. Take
care of your pitch and tone.

(g) Eating Etiquette. Individuals must follow certain decorum while eating in public.
Don’t make noise while eating. One should not leave the table unless and until everyone has
finished eating.

(h) Business Etiquette. Business etiquette includes ways to conduct a certain business.
Don’t ever cheat customers. It is simply unethical.

30. Need for Etiquette.

(a) Etiquette makes you a cultured individual who leaves his mark wherever he goes.

(b) Etiquette teaches you the way to talk, walk and most importantly behave in the society.

(c) Etiquette is essential for an everlasting first impression. The way you interact with your
superiors, parents, fellow workers, friends speak a lot about your personality and up- bringing.

(d) Etiquette enables the individuals to earn respect and appreciation in the society. No one
would feel like talking to a person who does not know how to speak or behave in the society.
Etiquette inculcates a feeling of trust and loyalty in the individuals. One becomes more responsible
and mature. Etiquette helps individuals to value relationships.

Manners

31. Some of the manners we’ve learned from our parents and teachers who try and implant us the
importance of being well-mannered. At some point, our manners are categorized as good or bad depending
on the society we live in and on the environment, we grew in.

32. Having good manners is not just about blending with the best; rather it is more about considering
the feelings of others and taking responsibility. Take for example when you eat in the restaurant or in
public places, try not to chew with one’s mouth open. The unpleasant sound and scene are repelling for
others. In public speaking, we must not interrupt when he/she is talking. It is considered highly ill-mannered
if you do not allow him/her to complete his/her sentence. These are just some of the things we should
avoid doing.

How to Improve Your Social Skills

33. They say, a human being is a social animal, but the question is, does everyone possess social
skills? Most of the people do not know the art of speaking. While some are just inept and incompetent,
there are others who lack confidence and yet others who do not have mannerism and etiquettes. Having
sound social skills is extremely important in the present times, given to the fact that interaction and
conversation forms the basis for everything we do. If you also face difficulty in interacting, remember, it is
not the end of the world. You can improve your social skills by just putting in a little effort. However, you
94

cannot be perfect overnight. It would take some time. Following are few tips on how to improve social
skills.

34. Improving Social Skills.

(a) Be Yourself. Only when you are your own self do you feel comfortable and it is when
you are in utmost comfort that you indulge in free conversation and interaction. Do not change your
inner self for anything in the world. Remember, humans have this innate quality of discovering
whether a person is real or fake. In case you pretend to be someone you are not; you would be
lonelier than ever before.

(b) Be Responsible. One of the vital components of social interaction is to know the art
of carrying yourself. It is very important for you to know what to do and how to behave in a social
gathering. A person behaving in an undesirable and unacceptable manner is usually avoided by
people. So, be responsible for your actions and act according to the situation.

(c) Be Open & Approachable. Imagine talking to a person who is an absolute introvert
or extrovert! Extremes of personality often turn off people. Ideally, you should have a fusion of both
the characters. While being too shy and withdrawn is enough to repel people immediately, being
too loud and outgoing would not do much good either. Just strike a delicate balance between both
the personalities and you would be the star of the social gathering.

(d) Be Attentive. The art of listening is a stepping stone for conversation and interaction.
Alas! Not many have it in them. If you would have attended a social gathering, you will know that
everyone wants to talk, but no one is ready to listen. So, the trick is to be an attentive listener and
people would definitely talk to you. Also, do not interrupt or chip in a piece of advice or suggestion
just when the other person is in the middle of a subject.

(e) Be Polite. Being humble and down-to-earth is an excellent way to break the ice. It
sheds off all the apprehensions and nervousness and gives a good impression. It would speak
miles about your manners, personality and confidence. Apart from being polite, it is also advisable
to be diplomatic. While being honest and forthright definitely pays, one should be tactful also.

(f) Be Aware. It is very important to be aware and observant of people’s behaviour

instance, watch if the person you are talking to is comfortable with the specific topic. If he looks
uncomfortable or is simply disinterested, just move on to the next topic. In case he/she is not
interested in talking to you completely, the best bet would be to move out of the scene.

(g) Be Cautious. It is advisable to keep your senses active. Do not shut your eyes, close
your ears and numb your senses at the time of interacting. Keep a keen eye on who are your
friends and who are your enemies. Do not confide everything to someone you have just met.

IMPORTANCE OF GROUP/TEAM WORK

Types and Characteristics of Groups

35. Definition of a Group. A group can be defined as any number of people who share goals,
often communicate with one another over a period of time, and are few enough, so that each individual
may communicate with all the others, person-to-person. Two or more people interacting to achieve a
common objective is also called a group.

36. Classification / Types of Groups. Groups can be following types:-

(a) Friendship Group. It evolves informally to meet its members’ personal security,
esteem and belonging needs.

(b) Task Group. It is created by the management to accomplish certain organisation goals.
Task group can further be classified as under:-
95

(i) Formal Groups. They are established by an organisation to facilitate the

achievement of the organisation goals.

(ii) Informal Group. It is one that develops out of the day-to-day activities,
interactions and sentiments of the members for the purpose of meeting their social needs.

(iii) Effective Group. An effective group is one which has the following
characteristics:-

(aa) Its members know why the group exists; they have shared goals.

(ab) Its members support agreed upon guidelines procedures for and making
decisions.

(ac) Its members communicate freely among themselves.

(ad) Its members have learned to receive help from one another and to give
help to one another.

(ae) Its members have learned to deal with conflict within the group.

(af) Its members have learned to diagnose individual and group processes
and improve their own and the group’s functioning.

37. Importance of a Group.

(a) In a group people come together to achieve some common objectives for which they work
in a structured fashion and utilise resources to reach pre-determined goals and targets.

(b) A group carries a lot of power in it. One work which seems impossible, can be done by a
group strength very easily. We have a number of examples of group work around us. India is itself
a great example of group work. India is probably the only country in the world where people belong
to different languages, having different cultures, modes of living, clothing, feeding habits and even
different Gods and deities. In spite of all these differences, they live together in harmony and even
believe to be the children of one mother called “Mother India”.

(c) We are one large nation with one central authority. In India we have unity in diversity and
we work together to make our country a developed country. It is because of the strength of the
nation as a group only that India could achieve freedom in 1947.

Types and Characteristics of a Team

38. Definition of a Team. When two or more people who are interdependent, who share
responsibility for outcomes, who see themselves and are seen by others as an intact social entity in a larger
social system are called as “Teams”. When teams are formed, its member must have (or quickly develop)
the right mix of complementary competencies to achieve the team’s goals.

39. Types of Teams.

(a) Functional Teams. They usually represent individuals who work together daily on a
cluster of ongoing and independent tasks. Functional teams often exist within functional
departments, marketing, production, finance, auditing, human resources and the like.

(b) Problem Solving Teams. They focus on specific issues in their areas of
responsibility, develop potential solutions and are often empowered to take actions within defined
limits.

(c) Cross - Functional Teams. They bring together the knowledge and skills of people from
various work areas to identity and solve mutual problems.
96

(d) Self - Managed Teams. They normally consist of employees who must work together
effectively daily to manufacture entire product (or major identifiable component) or service.

40. Importance of a Team.

(a) A team is a small number of employees with complementary competencies (abilities, skills
and knowledge) who are committed to common performance, goals and working relationship for
which they hold themselves mutually accountable.

(b) A key aim of teamwork is group synergy, namely the achievement of high quality as a
result of combined individual contributions. Synergy can help you solve complex problems because
you will be working with people who have a wide range of skills and perspective. Students working
in teams benefit particularly from brainstorming and bouncing ideas of each other, learning from
each other, discussing work in teams outside contact times and checking results.

(c) In a team we can establish an agreed set of team guidelines. We know team members,
their strengths, and preferred ways of working and preferred roles. We can discuss the task
problems to arrive at a shared understanding and summarise this shared understanding of any
project.

Conclusion

41. Working in groups and teams requires a lot of tolerance and time to come to conclusions and make
decisions. Cooperation and respect for group / team norms are important in group / team work. Some group
/ team members may be able to do tasks alone, but success for one group / team member does not mean
success for the entire group / team. Group / team members should accomplish a shared task or goal
together.
SUMMARY

1. While under stress we may experience the following feelings, thoughts, behaviours or physical
symptoms: -

(a) Feelings. Anxiety, irritability, fear, moodiness, embarrassment.

(b) Thoughts. Self-criticism, difficult in concentrating or making decisions, forgetfulness,
pre-occupation with the future, repetitive thoughts, fear of failure.
(c) Behaviour. Stuttering, difficulty in speaking, crying, acting impulsive, do not feel like
talking to anyone, nervous laughter, yelling at friends and family, grinding teeth, jaw clenching,
increased smoking, alcohol or drug use, increased or decreased appetite.
(d) Physical Symptoms. Tight muscles, cold or sweaty hand, headache, back or neck
problems, sleep disturbance, abdominal pain, more colds and infections, fatigue, rapid breathing,
pounding heart, trembling, dry mouth.

2. Stress Management Techniques.

(a) Take Deep Breath.

(b) Talk It Out.
(c) Take A Break.
(d) Create A Quiet Place in Your Mind.
(e) Pay Attention to Physical Comfort.
(f) Move.
(g) Take Care of your Body.
(h) Laugh
(j) Manage your Time.
(k) Know your Limits.
(l) Do you have to be Right Always?
(m) Have a Good Cry.
(n) Look for the Good Things around You.
(o) Talk Less, Listen More.
97

3. How to Change Your Mindset.

(a) Get the Best Information Only.

(b) Role Model the Best People.
(c) Examine Your Current Beliefs.
(d) Shape Your Mindset with Vision and Goals.
(e) Find Your Voice.
(f) Protect Your Mindset.
(g) Let Go of Comparisons.
(h) Put an End to Perfectionism.
(j) Look at the Evidence.
(k) Redefine What Failure Means.
(l) Stop Worrying about What “People” Think.

4. Time management helps you to: -

(a) Reduce or eliminate wasted time and effort so you’ll have more productive time each
day.
(b) Improve your productivity so you can accomplish more with less effort.
(c) Focus your time and energy on what is most important and make time for the things you
want and value. Thus, help you find greater balance and fulfilment.
(d) Improve your performance while reducing stress.
(e) Set and achieve your long-term goals.

5. There are some basic principles of time management which are as follows: -

(a) Develop a Personal Sense of Time.

(b) Identify Long-Term Goals.
(c) Concentrate on High Return Activities.
(d) Weekly and Daily Planning.
(e) Make the Best Use of Your Best Time.
(f) Make Use of Committed Time.
(g) Manage Your Health.

6. Need for Etiquette.

(a) Etiquette makes you a cultured individual who leaves his mark wherever he goes.
(b) Etiquette teaches you the way to talk, walk and most importantly behave in the society.
(c) Etiquette is essential for an everlasting first impression. The way you interact with your
superiors, parents, fellow workers, friends speak a lot about your personality and up- bringing.
(d) Etiquette enables the individuals to earn respect and appreciation in the society.

7. Having sound social skills is extremely important in the present times, given to the fact that interaction
and conversation forms the basis for everything we do. Following are few tips on how to improve social
skills.

(a) Be Yourself. (e) Be Polite.

(b) Be Responsible. (f) Be Aware
(c) Be Open & Approachable. (g) Be Cautious
(d) Be Attentive.

8. A group can be defined as any number of people who share goals, often communicate with one
another over a period of time, and are few enough, so that each individual may communicate with all the
others, person-to-person.

9. When two or more people who are interdependent, who share responsibility for outcomes, who
see themselves and are seen by others as an intact social entity in a larger social system are called as
“Teams”. When teams are formed, its member must have (or quickly develop) the right mix of
complementary competencies to achieve the team’s goals.
98

CHAPTER PD - IV

CAREER COUNSELLING, SSB PROCEDURE AND INTERVIEW SKILLS

CAREER COUNSELLING

Introduction

1. Career development is a lifelong process that actually starts when an individual is born. There
are a number of factors that influence career development, including one’s interest, abilities, values,
personality, background, and circumstances. Career Counselling is a process that will help you to know
and understand yourself and the world of work in order to make career, educational, and life decisions with
more and more diverse career options and professional opportunities emerging. Choosing a career is not
a serious affair until 12th grade. However, once you are done with 12th, it is necessary to choose a definite
career and decide a career goal. Choosing the right career option keeping one’s interest in mind is
necessary. In addition to this, selecting the right education institution is equally important.

Career Counselling

2. Career counselling is counselling or mentoring/coaching on issues related to an individual’s career.

Career counselling helps individuals make the right choice about their career paths, career development
and career change. Career Counselling is a process that will help you to know and understand yourself
and the world of work in order to make career, educational, and life decisions. Career development is
more than just deciding on a subject and what job you want to get when you graduate. Career counselling
or career guidance includes a wide variety of professional activities which help people deal with career-
related challenges.

Career Counsellor

3. The Career Counsellor holds a master’s degree and has expertise in career development theory,
counselling techniques, administration and interpretation of assessments and career information
resources. He gives information about education and work opportunities to children and youth. He gives
information about opportunities, as well as helping with competencies and help with CVs and application
forms. Career counsellors’ help individuals with the task of self-assessment and self-analysis. They then
match the aptitude, skills and interests of the individuals with various job types. They also help identify the
various job options available and provide clarity on different job roles. Overall, they help individuals make
informed career choices and help them define their career paths to maximize the success in their chosen
careers.

NEEDS FOR CAREER COUNSELLING

Who Needs Career Counselling?

4. Since career development is a lifelong process, Career Counselling can be appropriate for anyone,
including freshmen, sophomores, juniors, seniors, and even alumni. The earlier you get started making
intentional decisions about your future, the better prepared you will be! We recommend that all freshmen
should visit a Career Counsellor.

Benefits of Career Counselling

5. Approaching a career counsellor is essential when you are not sure about choosing a suitable
career option. Selecting a career option determines your course of life. While a good decision at the right
point of time can make your life pleasant, a wrong one can ruin it. Remember that these decisions are
irreversible. In case of dilemma, it is always better to take professional help. Career counselling is probably
the best option in this case. Benefits of career counselling are as follows:-

(a) Helps in Determining a Student’s True Potential. There are students who are
clear as to what they want to become. On the other hand, there are others who are either confused
or have no idea about their career preferences. Regular aptitude tests and counselling sessions
conducted by career counsellors can help students in finding out the right career options and the
99

fields that interest them. On the basis of these counselling results, students make the right choice
regarding what course they want to enrol into in order to accomplish their career goals.

(b) Clear Doubts. Despite having a clear idea of what they want to achieve in life, some
students do not know the career path they need to follow to have the requisite academic
qualification to join a particular course. Career counselling can help students clear these doubts by
giving them a clear-cut view of what they can expect from various educational courses. Some
students might also have preconceived beliefs about certain fields. Career counselling also helps
students overcome these by knowing the true facts.

(c) Support and Motivation. A career counsellor also provides essential support and
boosts the morale of a student by understanding the kind of requirements. Building the motivational
level of a student is necessary for long term success. This aids in improving overall performance
of a student. In addition to this, career counselling also teaches how to expand your network which
in turn enhances emotional support.

(d) Guidance to Students. Career counselling is the guidance given to a student on

the road he/she should take to achieve his/her goals. The advice and counselling provided is based
on three deciding factors — personality, aptitude and interest.

Options Available After 12th Standard

6. There are hundreds of career options available after your 12th depending on your backgrounds like
Science, Commerce and Arts. Not everyone wants to be a doctor, engineer or a dentist. Today, young
students are ready to explore various other career options. You could choose one of them according to
your inclination and background. But before choosing a career you should contemplate seriously on the
faculty of interest, your aptitude, educational qualifications, and ability to cope with the subject and above
all the financial commitments that is necessary during the course.

SSB PROCEDURE

7. The SSB Procedure has two stages of testing over a period of 05 days. The details are as
enumerated in succeeding paras.

8. Reporting Day. The day of reporting at the SSB board is followed by document check and
form filling. You are supposed to report at the place mentioned in the call letter, mostly you are asked to
report at MCO [Movement Control Office]. You will not find any difficulty in doing so because there are
many other candidates who report on the same day.

9. Stage-1 Testing.

(a) Screening. Screening process is to pick up some potential candidates from all those
who have reported for the particular entry.

(b) Verbal and Non-verbal Test. Nothing hard, to be true, doesn’t need any preparation
too. But it is always good to go well prepared; you can check some verbal and non-verbal sample
questions here. After this test you will get some rest, and later proceed for PPDT.

(c) PPDT. You will be shown a picture for 30 secs, later you have to write a story based on
the picture you have seen in 3 mins, after that, you will be divided into sub groups of 14-15
members, firstly each candidate will narrate his/her story which is followed by the group discussion
on the picture, among the group members. Keep in mind that PPDT is the most important part
which helps you to clear screening and takes you to stage-2 testing.

(d) Results of Screening. After the completion of PPDT, you will get some rest for 2-3 hours
and lunch too. Your screening results will be declared after it, selected candidates are allotted with
new chest numbers. Rest of the candidates gets their TA and dropped backed to the railway station
or bus stand.
100

10. Stage-2 Testing.

(a) Psychological Test. It is a battery of projective tests; all tests are used to check the
psychological suitability of the candidate to be an officer. Candidates are required to write their
responses based on the particular test. Here the time limit is very crucial, so you are required to
write your first response in time.

(b) Battery of Test.

(i) Thematic Appreciation Test [TAT]

(ii) Word Association Test [WAT]

(iii) Situation Reaction Test [SRT]

(iv) Self-Description Test [ SD]

(c) TAT. You will be shown 11 pictures in which last picture is a blank slide, each picture
will come just for 30 seconds and then disappear, after that you will get 4 minutes time to write the
story based on that picture. After 4 mins another picture will come for 30 seconds and same
process will be followed till last slide.

(d) WAT. You will be shown 60 words back to back, each word remains on the screen for
15 seconds, you are required to write a sentence in 15 secs which comes in your mind first after
reading that word. Likewise, you have to write 60 words continuously without any pause in
between.

(e) SRT. You will get a booklet with 60 situations written on it, you are required to write your
responses based on those 60 situations, time allotted will be 30 mins.

(f) SD. You are required to write opinion about you from your parents, friends, teachers,
yourself and things you would like to develop in future. Time allotted will be 15 mins. It’s all about
your speed of thinking and writing, do not manipulate much because it may create problem for you
in later stage. Write legible and correct.

11. GTO. This also has a series of outdoor task, the main aim of this task is to judge your qualities
during group performance, remember most of the task in this series are group task, you are required to
support the group with best of your qualities and not to compete with them in any manner.

(a) GD. Back to back group discussion (GD) on two topics, mostly current affairs.

(b) GPE. Group Planning Exercise (GPE), each candidate has to write his planning for the
mentioned problem and map given, later group members are required to discuss on the problem
and have to come with a common plan with common consensus. Later one of the group members
has to explain the common planning with the help of pointer and map.

(c) PGT. Progressive Group Task (PGT), you are required to cross some obstacles with the
help of supporting materials like rope, plank, wood log etc. Some rules are required to be followed
during this task, it a full group activity.

(d) HGT. Half Group Task (HGT), mostly same as PGT but the number of group members
will be half, you may get more chance to show your potential.

(e) IOT. Individual Obstacles Task (IOT), you are required to attempt 10 obstacles
individually, each obstacle consist of some points from 1 to 10.

(f) Command Task. You will be a commander in this task; you are required to cross
some obstacles with the help of 2-3 subordinates. You can choose 2-3 candidates from your own
group whom you think can help you to clear the obstacles.
101

(g) Snake race/Group Obstacle Race. All group members will be competing with other
groups, members will be holding a snake like rope, and they are required to cross certain obstacles
with the snake. There are certain rules like all other tasks. It is kind of race amongst different
groups.

(h) Individual Lecturette. Each candidate will be giving lecture for 3 mins on a topic selected
by him/her. You will get 4 topics out of which you have to select one topic.

(j) FGT. Final Group Task (FGT), same like PGT, just like another chance to show your
potential.

12. Personal Interview. It is a main key which decides your recommendation in the SSB
Interview, SSB Interview questions and answers play vital role in the assessment of the candidate.

13. Conference. Each candidate will be facing all SSB board members, he/she will face few general
questions like how was your stay or what did you learn from this, conference is just to decide whether or
not to recommend you as an officer in Indian defence forces. All assessors collectively decide your
suitability, for some candidates those who are in border line, may face certain questions, which can be
decisive one. It hardly goes for 1-2 mins.

INTERVIEW SKILLS

Curriculum Vitae

14. Curriculum Vitae (CV). An outline of a person’s educational and professional history, it is usually
prepared for job applications. Another name for a CV is a resume.

15. A CV is the most flexible and convenient way to make applications. It can convey your personal
details in the way that presents you in the best possible light and can be used to make multiple applications
to employers in a specific career area. There is no "one best way" to prepare a CV. It is your document
and can be structured and presented as you wish within the basic framework.

The Interview

16. Interview Skills. The interview is the final test most people have to clear in getting a job.
Some colleges and scholarship committees also require interviews. Being chosen for an interview means
someone is interested in your skills, knowledge and experience. However, a great application or resume
can quickly find its way into the garbage if you do not do well in an interview. You now must become a
sales person. The interviewer is the buyer. They want to see if your talents meet their needs for the job
or for admission to the college. Sell yourself.

17. The interview is when you want to tell the employer or admissions representative about your
strengths, skills, education, and work experience. Knowing yourself - positively selling your strong points -
is what is going to get you the job or admission to the college.

18. Before the Interview.

(a) Do your homework! Learn as much as you can about the company or college before the
interview.

(b) Do some research: ask people who work there, go to the library, look on the internet, and
make an anonymous call to the secretary. Find out what services/products the company provides,
how long they have been in business, whether the company is growing or downsizing.

(c) Reputation, etc. An interviewer will be impressed that you have made an effort to learn
about the company or college. Read any material they send you!

(d) Know where you are going. Drive by the site of the interview a day or two before the
interview.
102

(e) Arrive 5 - 15 minutes early.

(f) Be prepared when you go to the interview. Bring extra copies of your resume, your
portfolio, a notepad with some questions prepared for the interview, and a pen.

(g) Dress for Success! Hair should be clean, properly cut and combed. Fingernails must be
clean with no gaudy polish. Keep perfume, cologne and aftershave to a minimum. Brush your teeth
and don’t forget deodorant.

(i) Women. Dress, skirt (not too short), or dress pants with a nice blouse or
blazer. No excessive jewellery, make-up, or “big hair.”

(ii) Men. Pants (not jeans!), collared shirt, tie, sports coat and shoes. A suit may be
worn.

19. Conducting Yourself during the Interview. The major points that are important will include
the following:-

(a) Try to remember persons’ names, and call each person by his or her name.

(b) Always focus on the person asking the question, but use your peripheral vision to observe
the facial and other nonverbal expressions of others involved in the interview.
(c) If you don’t have an answer to a specific question, respond honestly that you don’t know
much about that topic.

(d) Be aware of your tone of voice and your body language. Do not, for example, slouch and
put your arms on a table. Also, do not display nervous mannerisms or speak with a strained voice.

(e) Don’t try to answer a question immediately; if you want to, take a little time to provide a
more complete answer.

(f) Always answer each question honestly, because you will probably have to live with what
you present. Being dishonest in your answers may occasionally assist you in obtaining the position
you desire, but you will have to live with the dishonesty. If you have presented a false image and
you behave differently on the job, you may soon be on your way out.

(g) Display a good knowledge of the subject, based upon all the homework you have done.
However, do not bury the interviewers with your knowledge, as you may very well turn them off.
Also, if you display greater knowledge of a variety of subjects than the interviewers, you may scare
them off from your candidacy.

(h) Don’t argue if you disagree with the opinion of an interviewer. If you can, avoid it.

(j) At the end of the interview, you will often be asked whether you have any questions for the
interviewer(s). It is wise, at this point, to respond:-

(i) That the interviewers and your homework have provided you with all the
information that you feel you need, but ask permission to call to obtain additional
information if you think of something important that you missed.

(ii) Ask if you can take a few minutes to stress why you desire the specific job,
emphasizing strengths that you will bring to the position.

(k) If you have materials that you would like the interviewers to review, do not hand them out
prior / during the interview. If you do this, the interviewers many times will be reading your handout
materials rather than paying attention to what is being discussed during the interview.

(l) At the end, make certain to express your gratitude for being given the opportunity for the
interview.
103

(m) At the very end, provide an additional copy of your resume to each person conducting the
interview. This will probably be taken home and will remind them of you when they think about a
final employment decision. This is especially important if you were fortunate enough to obtain the
final interview.

(n) Throughout the entire interview, respond with sincerity, tact, and a high degree of interest.

(o) Engage in active listening. Pay attention to the emotional tone of the interviewer, not just
the words he or she utters.

(p) Most important, throughout the entire interview situation, display life, pep, enthusiasm. Let
your personality shine and display a high interest for the job for which you are interviewed.

Conclusion

20. Interviewing is one of the most important skills one can have in the workplace. You cannot move
in or up without passing the interview. Yet as important as it is, few people ever take the time to study
material on the skills needed to master that process. They go in to an interview, answer the questions as
best as they can and hope for the best. However, there is a technique to interviewing. It’s just as important
as your CVs’, skills, experience, and accomplishments.

SUMMARY

1. Career counselling is counselling or mentoring/coaching on issues related to an individual’s career.

Career counselling helps individuals make the right choice about their career paths, career development
and career change. Career Counselling is a process that will help you to know and understand yourself
and the world of work in order to make career, educational, and life decisions. The Benefits of Career
Counselling are ;-

(a) Helps in Determining a Student’s True Potential.

(b) Clear Doubts.
(c) Support and Motivation.
(d) Guidance to Students.

SSB Procedure

2. The SSB Procedure is over a period of 05 days.

3. Stage-1 Testing.

(a) Screening.
(b) Verbal and Non-verbal Test.
(c) PPDT.
(d) Results of Screening.

4. Stage-2 Testing.

(a) Psychological Test

(b) Battery of Test.

(i) Thematic Appreciation Test [TAT]

(ii) Word Association Test [WAT}
(iii) Situation Reaction Test [SRT]
(iv) Self-Description Test [ SD]

5. GTO Tests.

(a) GD.
(b) GPE.
104

(c) PGT
(d) HGT.
(e) IOT
(f) Command Task
(g) Snake race/Group Obstacle Race.
(h) Individual Lecturette
(j) FGT.

6. Personal Interview

7. Conference

Interview Skills

8. The interview is when you want to tell the employer or admissions representative about your
strengths, skills, education, and work experience. Knowing yourself - positively selling your strong points -
is what is going to get you the job or admission to the college. The interview is the final hurdle most people
have to cross in getting a job. Some colleges and scholarship committees also require interviews. Being
chosen for an interview means someone is interested in your skills, knowledge and experience.
105

CHAPTER PD - IV

PUBLIC SPEAKING

1. Public speaking skills are valuable both in your personal life and in your career. Even if you don’t
regularly engage in public speaking, developing skills in this area will increase your confidence and
reduce anxiety about situations in which you may be called upon to speak in public.

2. The following points should be kept in mind to improve public speaking skills:

(a) Stage Presence. Good public speakers appear confident, friendly, enthusiastic and
energetic. Confidence comes from choosing a topic you like and researching it well.
Friendliness can be conveyed simply by smiling at your audience. Enthusiasm and energy will
naturally follow when you enjoy your topic and are well prepared.

(b) Voice Control. Your voice is the most important tool you will use as a public speaker.
Improve the quality of your voice through diaphragmatic breathing; breathing from your diaphragm
instead of your chest. This is how professional singers breathe. It is what helps to make their
voices sound fabulous and enables them to hold notes long after most people would be out of
breath. Doing so also reduces feeling of breathlessness caused by speech anxiety. This type of
breathing will allow you to better control the following aspects of your voice:

(i) Tone (quality)

(ii) Pitch (high or low)

(iii) Volume of your voice

(c) Body Language. Practice standing with a relaxed upright posture. Place your
hands at your sides or clasped in front of you, unless you are making a gesture to emphasize a
point. Become aware of your facial expressions as well; they should match the message you are
delivering. If you’re giving an upbeat speech, try to have a relaxed and joyful look on your face.

(d) Delivery. When it comes to public speaking, delivery is everything. Even if you have
a great voice and good body language, your message will get lost if the audience can’t easily follow
what you say. Below are some tips for developing good delivery skills.

(i) Speak slowly and deliberately. Here’s a tip: it will probably seem too slow for you.

(ii) Pause between ideas to give the audience time to digest what you are saying.

(iii) Carefully articulate and pronounce your words. A mumbling public speaker is hard
to understand.

(iv) Avoid filler sounds like "Um" and "ah." It detracts from what you are saying and is
distracting to the audience.

(v) Vary the pitch and volume of your voice to add interest. Speaking in a monotone
is a surefire way to lose the interest of your listeners. Listen to podcasts of upbeat public
speakers and try to imitate how they talk.

(e) Audience Relations. Good public speakers are in tune with their audience.
Public speaking is more than standing in front of a group and talking.

(i) Acknowledge your audience right away and begin talking as soon as all eyes are
on you. This helps to make you seem more like a "real" person and keeps a conversational
tone.

(ii) If you need to set up equipment, converse with your audience at the same time
to keep their attention.
106

(iii) Make eye contact and watch for communication from the audience. Smiles and
nodding are good; fidgeting or confused looks may mean that you need to adjust what you
are doing. However, if you live with social anxiety, be careful not to focus too much on
negative faces. It could be that they are just having a bad day, and their facial expressions
have nothing to do with what you are saying. A good rule of thumb is to find a friendly
face at the start of your talk. If that person seems to be confused or bored, that is when
you know it is time to address issues with your public speaking.

3. Some recommended topics for Public speaking are enlisted below:

India’s Foreign Policy The metropolitan cities of India Insurgency – A Phenomenon

You-tube Terrorism/Naxalism/Maoism Needs Understanding
Censorship Issues Population problem E Governance
Religious Tolerance in India Adult Education Health Tourism
Women Safety Indo US Relations Govt Schools vs Private Public
Sachin Tendulkar Beauty Pageants School
Bharat Ratna Cable TV Indian Railways
Lobbying in Medical World Personality – Secret of Success National Anthem
Sports in India Dog Man’s Best Friend G 20
Football in India Ragging Volcano
Cricket in India IT Secularism
Computer Hacking Students Union Ambition in Life
China India Relationship IT Industry Internet Education
Kashmir Issue Your Favorite Day Internet
Narendra Modi on the World Role of Discipline in Life Rattan Tata – A Business
Front Smart Card Personality
Role of President in India G 8 Nations Should Article 370 be
Modern means of E-Commerce Abrogated?
Transportation Cyber Crime Article 376 is an Insult to Indian
IT industry in India Sports in India Democracy
Brain Drain Role of Opposition in Indian Democracy v/s Dictatorship
Role of Women in Nation Politics Aviation Industry in Developing
Building BPO vs KPO India
Women Safety Why Youth Hesitate to Join Security Industry in Present Day
NOTA Defense Forces IT is a Boon for Society
Delhi Elections Peaceful use of Nuclear Energy Water Shall be the Cause of
Democracy in India Globalization World War –III
India-Pakistan Relations India’s Agricultural Problem Bribery- A Cancer of Indian
India ‘s relation with her Favorite Actress India Society
neighbors USA in Changing World Should India go for war with
Criminalization of politics Criminalization in Politics Pakistan
Social Media’s role in society Child Labor Constitution of India – As I see
Youth and social media USA – A Policeman of Unipolar it
Role of youth in nation building World Mutual Funds
Internet revolution Education is a Modern Day Higher Education in India
Arab Spring Industry Election Commission
Israel Palestine Issue Religion – A Secular View in Life Insurance Industry in India
US-Russia Relationship Indian Society Indian Cinema Industry
Rivers in India Page 3 – A Way of Life (Bollywood)
AGNI V Indian Society – Turning to Electronic Media And Print
Emerging India Writers Western Way of Life Media
Pollution and its prevention Infrastructure of India Policing in Our Country –
What Indian Military needs Rain Water Harvesting Requires Review
Modernization in Military Favorite Cricketer Which is the Most Neglected
Books Versus E-Books Democracy in Pakistan – A Joke Sector in Our Country ?
Education System in India Status of Women in India Girl Child in Indian Society –
Judicial System in India Misunderstood Aspect
107

SUMMARY

1. Public speaking skills are valuable both in your personal life and in your career. Even if you don’t
regularly engage in public speaking, developing skills in this area will increase your confidence and
reduce anxiety about situations in which you may be called upon to speak in public. The following point
should be kept in mind to improve public speaking skills:

(a) Stage Presence.

(b) Voice Control.

(i) Tone (quality)

(ii) Pitch (high or low)
(iii) Volume of your voice

(c) Body Language.

(d) Delivery.
(i) Speak slowly and deliberately
(ii) Pause between ideas
(iii) Carefully articulate and pronounce your words.
(iv) Avoid filler sounds like "Um" and "ah."
(v) Vary the pitch and volume of your voice
(e) Audience Relations.
116

CHAPTER L - II

CASE STUDIES

SHIVAJI

1. Shivaji Bhonsle was an Indian warrior king and a member of the Bhonsle Maratha clan. Shivaji
carved out an enclave from the declining Adilshahi sultanate of Bijapur that formed the genesis of
the Maratha Empire. In 1674, he was formally crowned as the chhatrapati (monarch) of his realm
at Raigad.

Early life

2. Shivaji was born in the hill-fort of Shivneri, near the city of Junnar in what is now Pune district.
Scholars disagree on his date of birth. The Government of Maharashtra lists 19 February as a holiday
commemorating Shivaji’s birth (Shivaji Jayanti). Shivaji was named after a local deity, the goddess
Shivai. Shivaji’s father Shahaji Bhonsle was a Maratha general who served the Deccan Sultanates. His
mother was Jijabai, the daughter of Lakhuji Jadhavrao of Sindhkhed, a Mughal-aligned sardar claiming
descent from a Yadav royal family of Devagiri. At the time of Shivaji’s birth, power in Deccan was shared
by three Islamic sultanates: Bijapur, Ahmednagar, and Golkonda. Shahaji often changed his loyalty
between the Nizamshahi of Ahmadnagar, the Adilshah of Bijapur and the Mughals, but always kept
his jagir (fiefdom) at Pune and his small army.

Coronation

3. Shivaji was crowned king of Satara in a lavish ceremony on 6 June 1674.] Gaga Bhatt officiated,
holding a gold vessel filled with the seven sacred waters of the
rivers Yamuna, Indus, Ganges, Godavari, Narmada, Krishna and Kaveri over Shivaji’s head, and chanted
the Vedic coronation mantras. After the ablution, Shivaji bowed before Jijabai and touched her feet. Nearly
fifty thousand people gathered at Raigad for the ceremonies. Shivaji was entitled Shakakarta ("founder of
an era") and Chhatrapati ("paramount sovereign").

Conquest in Southern India

4. Beginning in 1674, the Marathas undertook an aggressive campaign, raiding Khandesh (October),
capturing Bijapuri Ponda (April 1675), Karwar (mid-year), and Kolhapur (July). In November the Maratha
navy skirmished with the Siddis of Janjira, but failed to dislodge them.[95] Having recovered from an illness,
and taking advantage of a conflict between the Afghans and Bijapur, Shivaji raided Athani in April 1676.

5. In the run-up to his expedition Shivaji appealed to a sense of Deccani patriotism, that Southern
India was a homeland that should be protected from outsiders. His appeal was somewhat successful, and
in 1677 Shivaji visited Hyderabad for a month and entered into a treaty with the Qutubshah of the Golkonda
sultanate, agreeing to reject his alliance with Bijapur and jointly oppose the Mughals. In 1677 Shivaji
invaded Karnataka with 30,000 cavalry and 40,000 infantry, backed by Golkonda artillery and
funding. Proceeding south, Shivaji seized the forts of Vellore and Gingee; the latter would later serve as a
capital of the Marathas during the reign of his son Rajaram I.

Death and succession

6. In late March 1680, Shivaji fell ill with fever and dysentery,[105] dying around 3–5 April 1680 at the
age of 52, on the eve of Hanuman Jayanti. Putalabai, the childless eldest of the surviving wives of Shivaji
committed sati by jumping into his funeral pyre. Another surviving spouse, Sakwarbai, was not allowed to
follow suit because she had a young daughter. Rumours followed Shivaji’s death, with some Muslims
opining he had died of a curse from Jan Muhammad of Jalna, as punishment for Shivaji’s troops attacking
merchants who had taken refuge in his hermitage. After Shivaji’s death, Soyarabai made plans with various
ministers of the administration to crown her son Rajaram rather than her stepson Sambhaji. On 21 April
1680, ten-year-old Rajaram was installed on the throne. However, Sambhaji took possession of Raigad
Fort after killing the commander, and on 18 June acquired control of Raigad, and formally ascended the
throne.
117

A. P. J. ABDUL KALAM

1. Avul Pakir Jainulabdeen Abdul Kalam (15 October 1931 – 27 July 2015) was an aerospace
scientist who served as the 11th President of India from 2002 to 2007. He was born and raised
in Rameswaram, Tamil Nadu and studied physics and aerospace engineering. He spent the next four
decades as a scientist and science administrator, mainly at the Defence Research and Development
Organisation (DRDO) and Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) and was intimately involved in
India’s civilian space programme and military missile development efforts. He thus came to be known as
the Missile Man of India for his work on the development of ballistic missile and launch
vehicle technology. He also played a pivotal role in India’s Pokhran-II nuclear tests in 1998, the first since
the original nuclear test by India in 1974.

2. Kalam was elected as the 11th President of India in 2002 with the support of both the
ruling Bharatiya Janata Party and the then-opposition Indian National Congress. Widely referred to as the
"People’s President", he returned to his civilian life of education, writing and public service after a single
term. He was a recipient of several prestigious awards, including the Bharat Ratna, India’s highest civilian
honour.

Early life and education

3. In his school years, Kalam had average grades but was described as a bright and hardworking
student who had a strong desire to learn. He spent hours on his studies, especially mathematics. After
completing his education at the Schwartz Higher Secondary School, Ramanathapuram, Kalam went on to
attend Saint Joseph’s College, Tiruchirappalli, then affiliated with the University of Madras, from where he
graduated in physics in 1954. He moved to Madras in 1955 to study aerospace engineering in Madras
Institute of Technology. He narrowly missed achieving his dream of becoming a fighter pilot, as he was
placed ninth in qualifiers, and only eight positions were available in the IAF.

Career as a scientist

4. After graduating from the Madras Institute of Technology in 1960, Kalam joined the Aeronautical
Development Establishment of the Defence Research and Development Organisation as a scientist after
becoming a member of the Defence Research & Development Service (DRDS). He started his career by
designing a small hovercraft, but remained unconvinced by his choice of a job at DRDO. Kalam was also
part of the INCOSPAR committee working under Vikram Sarabhai, the renowned space scientist. In 1969,
Kalam was transferred to the Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) where he was the project
director of India’s first Satellite Launch Vehicle (SLV-III) which successfully deployed the Rohini satellite in
near-earth orbit in July 1980; Kalam had first started work on an expandable rocket project independently
at DRDO in 1965. In 1969, Kalam received the government’s approval and expanded the programme to
include more engineers.

5. In 1963 to 1964, he visited NASA‘s Langley Research Center in Hampton, Virginia; Goddard
Space Flight Center in Greenbelt, Maryland; and Wallops Flight Facility. Between the 1970s and 1990s,
Kalam made an effort to develop the Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) and SLV-III projects, both of
which proved to be successful.

6. His research and educational leadership brought him great laurels and prestige in the 1980s,
which prompted the government to initiate an advanced missile programme under his directorship. R
Venkatraman was instrumental in getting the cabinet approval for allocating ₹388 crores for the mission,
named Integrated Guided Missile Development Programme (IGMDP) and appointed Kalam as the chief
executive. Kalam played a major part in developing many missiles under the mission including Agni, an
intermediate range ballistic missile and Prithvi, the tactical surface-to-surface missile, although the projects
have been criticised for mismanagement and cost and time overruns.

7. Kalam served as the Chief Scientific Adviser to the Prime Minister and Secretary of the Defence
Research and Development Organisation from July 1992 to December 1999. The Pokhran-II nuclear tests
were conducted during this period in which he played an intensive political and technological role. Kalam
118

served as the Chief Project Coordinator, along with Rajagopala Chidambaram, during the testing
phase. Media coverage of Kalam during this period made him the country’s best-known nuclear scientist.

8. In 1998, along with cardiologist Soma Raju, Kalam developed a low cost coronary stent, named
the "Kalam-Raju Stent". In 2012, the duo designed a rugged tablet computer for health care in rural areas,
which was named the "Kalam-Raju Tablet".

Presidency

9. Kalam served as the 11th President of India, succeeding K. R. Narayanan. He won the 2002
presidential election with an electoral vote of 922,884, surpassing the 107,366 votes won by Lakshmi
Sahgal. His term lasted from 25 July 2002 to 25 July 2007. Kalam was the third President of India to have
been honoured with a Bharat Ratna, India’s highest civilian honour, before becoming the President. Dr
Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan (1954) and Dr Zakir Hussain (1963) were the earlier recipients of Bharat Ratna
who later became the President of India. He was also the first scientist and the first bachelor to
occupy Rashtrapati Bhawan.

Death

10. On 27 July 2015, Kalam travelled to Shillong to deliver a lecture on "Creating a Livable Planet
Earth" at the Indian Institute of Management Shillong. While climbing a flight of stairs, he experienced some
discomfort, but was able to enter the auditorium after a brief rest. At around 6:35 p.m. IST, only five minutes
into his lecture, he collapsed. He was rushed to the nearby Bethany Hospital in a critical condition; upon
arrival, he lacked a pulse or any other signs of life. Despite being placed in the intensive care unit, Kalam
was confirmed dead of a sudden cardiac arrest at 7:45 p.m IST.

11. Following his death, Kalam’s body was airlifted in an Indian Air Force helicopter from Shillong to
Guwahati, from where it was flown to New Delhi on the morning of 28 July in an air force C-130J Hercules.
His body was then placed on a gun carriage draped with the Indian flag and taken to his Delhi residence
at 10 Rajaji Marg; there, the public and numerous dignitaries paid homage.

12. On the morning of 29 July, Kalam’s body, wrapped in the Indian flag, was taken to Palam Air Base
and flown to Madurai in an air force C-130J aircraft, arriving at Madurai Airport that afternoon. On 30 July
2015, the former president was laid to rest at Rameswaram‘s Pei Karumbu Ground with full state honours.
Over 350,000 people attended the last rites, including the Prime Minister, the governor of Tamil Nadu and
the chief ministers of Karnataka, Kerala and Andhra Pradesh.

DEEPA MALIK

1. Deepa Malik was born on 30 September 1970. She is an Indian athlete. She is the first Indian
woman to win a medal in Paralympic Games and won a Silver medal at the 2016 Summer Paralympics in
the shot put.[3] She has also won gold in F-53/54 Javelin event at the para athletic grand Prix held in Dubai
in 2018. She currently is the world number one in the F-53 category. She won accolades for her
participation in various adventure sports. She is associated with Himalayan Motorsports Association
(H.M.A.) and Federation of Motor Sports Clubs of India (F.M.S.C.I.). She has undertaken an 8-day, 1700-
km drive in sub-zero temperatures which included a climb to 18000 feet. It was – Raid De Himalaya. This
journey covers many difficult paths including remote Himalayas, Leh, Shimla and Jammu. She was
previously honored with the Arjuna award in 2012, at the age of 42 yrs. She has also been conferred the
prestigious Padma Shri award in 2017. She created a New Asian Record in Asian Para Games 2018 and
is the only Indian woman to win medals in 3 consecutive Asian Para Games (2010, 2014, 2018). She has
won 58 national & 23 International medals across all disciplines to date.

2. Malik is the wife of Colonel Bikram Singh and daughter of Colonel BK Nagpal. She is the mother
of two adult daughters.

3. Her aim of joining motor sports is to spread awareness towards the fact that physically challenged
individuals can obtain an official license and attain independence and self-reliance through driving. Deepa
Malik has undertaken numerous rallies to promote this cause.
119

Records and rankings

4. Holds an Official IPC Asian Record In Javelin F-53 Category – Felicitated by Milkha Singh and P.T.
Usha.

5. Holds All Three National Records In Throws {Discus, Javelin, Shot-put} In F-53 Category

6. Holds All Three National Records In S-1 Swimming Category {Back Stroke, Breast Stroke, Free
Style}

7. World Ranking 2010–12 – 2nd Shot-put, 3rd -Discus, 3rd Javelin

8. Asian Ranking 2010–12 – 1st In All Three Throws

LIMCA World Records

9. Longest Pan-India drive done by a paraplegic woman. Chennai-Delhi 3278 km – 2013

10. Driving Across Nine High Altitude Passes in Nine Days on Leh-Ladakh Highest Motorable Roads.
(First Woman in the world in her disability to attempt a journey like this – 2011)

11. Riding Special Bike −2009

12. Swimming in River Yamuna Against the Current For 1 km. Allahabad-2008

MAHARANA PRATAP

1. Pratap Singh I (9 May 1540 – 19 January 1597) popularly known as Maharana Pratap, was the
13th Rajput king of Mewar, a region in north-western India in the present day state of Rajasthan.

Early life and accession

2. Maharana Pratap was born in a Rajput family. He was born to Udai Singh II and Jaiwanta Bai. He
was married to Ajabde Punwar of Bijolia. He belonged to the Royal Family of Mewar, which was also related
to the Royal Family of Saurashtra, Gujarat.

3. After the death of Udai Singh in 1572, Rani Dheer Bai wanted her son Jagmal to succeed him but
senior courtiers preferred Pratap, as the eldest son, to be their king. The desire of the nobles prevailed.

Battle of Haldighati

4. The bloody Siege of Chittorgarh in 1568 had led to the loss of the fertile eastern belt of Mewar to
the Mughals. However, the rest of the wooded and hilly kingdom was still under the control of the Rana.
The Mughal emperor Akbar was intent on securing a stable route to Gujarat through Mewar; when Pratap
Singh was crowned king (Rana) in 1572, Akbar sent a number of envoys entreating the Rana to become a
vassal like many other Rajput leaders in the region. When the Rana refused to personally submit to Akbar,
war became inevitable.

5. The Battle of Haldighati was fought on 18 June 1576 between Maharana Pratap and Akbar’s forces
led by Man Singh I of Amer. The Mughals were victorious and inflicted significant casualties among the
Mewaris but failed to capture Maharana. The site of the battle was a narrow mountain pass
at Haldighati near Gogunda, modern day Rajsamand in Rajasthan. Maharana Pratap fielded a force of
around 3000 cavalry and 400 Bhil archers. The Mughals were led by Man Singh of Amber, who commanded
an army numbering around 5000-10,000 men. After a fierce battle lasting more than three hours, Maharana
found himself wounded and the day lost. The mughal were unable to capture him. He managed to escape
to the hills and lived to fight another day. The casualties for Mewar was far more, 1600 men to 100 men of
the Mughal army with another 350 wounded.
120

6. Haldighati was a futile victory for the Mughals, as they were unable to capture Maharana Pratap,
or any of his close family members in Udaipur.

7. As soon as the empire’s focus shifted north-west, Pratap and his army came out of hiding and
recaptured the western regions of his dominion.

Resurgence

8. Mughal pressure on Mewar relaxed after 1579 following rebellions in Bengal and Bihar and Mirza
Hakim’s incursion into the Punjab. In 1582, Maharana Pratap attacked and occupied the Mughal post at
Dewair (or Dawer). In 1585, Akbar moved to Lahore and remained there for the next twelve years watching
the situation in the north-west. No major Mughal expedition was sent to Mewar during this period. Taking
advantage of the situation, Pratap recovered Western Mewar including Kumbhalgarh, Udaipur and
Gogunda. During this period, he also built a new capital, Chavand, near modern Dungarpur.

Death

9. Reportedly, Pratap died of injuries sustained in a hunting accident at Chavand on 19 January 1597,
aged 56. He was succeeded by his eldest son, Amar Singh I.

10. Rana Pratap’s defiance of the mighty Mughal empire, almost alone and unaided by the other Rajput
states, constitute a glorious saga of Rajput valour and the spirit of self sacrifice for cherished principles.
Rana Pratap’s methods of sporadic warfare was later elaborated further by Malik Ambar, the Deccani
general, and by Shivaji Maharaj.

RATAN TATA

1. Ratan Tata was born in Bombay, now Mumbai, on 28 December 1937, and is the son of Naval
Tata (born in Surat). His biological maternal grandmother had been the sister of Hirabai Tata, wife of group
founder Jamshedji Tata. His biological father, Hormusji Tata, had belonged to the broader Tata family;
Ratan therefore was a Tata by birth. Parents Naval and Sonoo separated in 1948 when Ratan was 10, and
he was subsequently raised by the widow of Sir Ratanji Tata, his grandmother, Navajbai Tata, who formally
adopted him through the J. N. Petit Parsi Orphanage.

2. He studied at the Campion School till the 8th class, followed by Cathedral and John Connon
School and at Bishop Cotton School in Shimla, and in 1955, graduated from Riverdale Country
School in New York City. In 1959, he then received a B. Arch. degree in Architecture with Structural
Engineering from Cornell University, and in 1975, attended the seven-week Advanced Management
Program of Harvard Business School — an institution which he has since endowed.

3. In 1961, Tata began his career in the Tata Group, working on the shop floor of Tata Steel,
shovelling limestone, and handling the blast furnace. Promoted to management during the 1970s; he then
endured trial by fire and was able to turn Group company National Radio and Electronics (NELCO) around,
only to see it collapse during an economic slowdown. In 1991, J. R. D. Tata stepped down as chairman of
Tata Sons, naming him his successor. When he settled down into the new role, he faced stiff resistance
from many companies heads, some of whom had spent decades in their respective companies and rose
to become very powerful and influential due to the freedom to operate under JRD Tata. He began replacing
them by setting a retirement age, and then made individual companies report operationally to the group
office and made each contribute some of their profit to build and use the Tata group brand. Innovation was
given priority and younger talent was infused and given responsibilities. Under his stewardship, overlapping
operations in group companies were streamlined into a synergised whole, with the salt-to-software group
exiting unrelated businesses to take on globalisation.

4. He was the interim chairman of Tata Sons. He continues to head the main two Tata trusts Sir
Dorabji Tata Trust and Sir Ratan Tata Trust and their allied trusts, with a combined stake of 66% in Tata
Sons, Tata group's holding company.

5. He has served in various capacities in organizations in India and abroad. He is a member of Prime
Minister's 'Council on Trade and Industry' and the 'National Manufacturing Competitiveness Council'. He is
121

on the jury panel of Pritzker Architecture Prize– considered to be one of the world's premier architecture
prizes.

6. Ratan Tata received the Padma Bhushan in 2000 and Padma Vibhushan in 2008, the third and
second highest civilian honours awarded by the Government of India.

KIRAN MAZUMDAR-SHAW

1. Kiran Mazumdar-Shaw (born on 23 March 1953) is an Indian billionaire entrepreneur. She is the
chairperson and managing director of Biocon Limited, a biotechnology company based in Bangalore, India
and the chairperson of Indian Institute of Management Bangalore. In 2014, she was awarded the Othmer
Gold Medal, for outstanding contributions to the progress of science and chemistry. She is on the Financial
Times’ top 50 women in business list. In 2015, she was listed as the 85th most powerful woman in the
world by Forbes. Forbes again listed her in 2016 and 2017 - the most powerful women in the world at 77th
and 71st position respectively.

Early Life

2. Kiran Mazumdar was born to Gujarati parents in Bangalore, India. She went to school at
Bangalore’s Bishop Cotton Girl’s High School, graduating in 1968. She then attended Mount Carmel
College, Bangalore, a women’s college offering pre-university courses as an affiliate of Bangalore
University. She studied biology and zoology, graduating from Bangalore University with a bachelor’s
degree in zoology in 1973. Mazumdar hoped to go to medical school, but did not obtain a scholarship.

3. Her father, Rasendra Mazumdar, was the head brewmaster at United Breweries. He suggested
that she study fermentation science, and train to be a brewmaster, a very non-traditional field for a
woman. Mazumdar went to Federation University (formerly University of Ballarat) in Australia to study
malting and brewing. In 1974 she was the only woman on the brewing course, and came top of her class.
She earned the degree of master brewer in 1975.

4. She worked as a trainee brewer in Carlton and United Breweries, Melbourne and as a trainee
maltster at Barrett Brothers and Burston, Australia. She also worked for some time as a technical consultant
at Jupiter Breweries Limited, Calcutta and as a technical manager at Standard Maltings Corporation,
Baroda between 1975 and 1977. However, when she investigated the possibility of further work in
Bangalore or Delhi, she was told that she would not be hired as a master brewer in India because "It’s a
man’s work." She began to look abroad, and was offered a position in Scotland.

Biocon

5. Before Mazumdar could move, she met Leslie Auchincloss, founder of Biocon Biochemicals
Limited, of Cork, Ireland. Auchincloss’s company produced enzymes for use in the brewing, food-
packaging and textile industries. Auchincloss was looking for an Indian entrepreneur to help establish an
Indian subsidiary. Mazumdar agreed to undertake the job on the condition that if she did not wish to
continue after six months she would be guaranteed a brewmaster’s position comparable to the one she
was giving up.

Expanding into biopharmaceuticals

6. Mazumdar spearheaded Biocon’s evolution from an industrial enzymes manufacturing company

to a fully integrated bio-pharmaceutical company with a well-balanced business portfolio of products and a
research focus on diabetes, oncology and auto-immune diseases. She also established two subsidiaries:
Syngene (1994) which provides early research and development support services on a contract basis and
Clinigene (2000) which focuses on clinical research trials and the development of both generic and new
medicines. Clinigene was later merged with Syngene. Syngene was listed on BSE/NSE in 2015 and has a
current market cap of US$1.15 billion.

7. Mazumdar is responsible for establishing Biocon’s direction. As early as 1984, she began to
develop a research and development team at Biocon, focusing on discovery of novel enzymes and on
development of novel techniques for solid substrate fermentation technology. The company’s first major
expansion came in 1987, when Narayanan Vaghulof ICICI Ventures (Industrial Credit and Investment
122

Corporation of India) supported creation of a venture capital fund of US$250,000. The money enabled
Biocon to expand its research and development efforts. They built a new plant featuring proprietary solid
substrate fermentation technology based on a semi-automated tray culture process, inspired by Japanese
techniques. In 1989, Biocon became the first Indian biotech company to receive US funding for proprietary
technologies.

8. In 1990, Mazumdar incorporated Biocon Biopharmaceuticals Private Limited (BBLP) to

manufacture and market a select range of biotherapeutics in a joint venture with the Cuban Center of
Molecular Immunology.

9. As of 2014, Biocon directed about 10% of its revenue into research and development, a much
higher proportion than most Indian pharmacological companies. Biocon has filed at least 950 patent
applications as a result of its research activity. Mazumdar-Shaw has actively engaged in acquisitions,
partnerships and in-licensing within the pharmaceuticals and bio-pharmaceutical area, entering into more
than 2,200 high-value R&D licensing and other deals between 2005 and 2010.

RANI OF JHANSI

1. Lakshmibai, the Rani of Jhansi; (19 November 1828 – 18 June 1858), was the queen of
the princely state of Jhansi in North India currently present in Jhansi district in Uttar Pradesh, India. She
was one of the leading figures of the Indian Rebellion of 1857 and became a symbol of resistance to
the British Raj for Indian nationalists.

Early Life

2. Rani Lakshmibai was born on 19 November 1828 in the town of Varanasi into
a Marathi family. She was named Manikarnika Tambe and was nicknamed Manu. Her father was Moropant
Tambe and her mother Bhagirathi Sapre (Bhagirathi Bai). Her parents came from Maharashtra. Her mother
died when she was four years old. Her father worked for a court peshwa (one of 8 ministers
under Chhatrapati) of Bithoor district. The peshwa called her "Chhabili", which means "playful". She was
educated at home and was more independent in her childhood than others of her age; her studies included
shooting, horsemanship, fencing and mallakhamba with her childhood friends Nana Sahib and Tatya
Tope.

3. Rani Lakshmibai was accustomed to riding on horseback accompanied by a small escort between
the palace and the temple although sometimes she was carried by palanquin. Her horses included Sarangi,
Pavan and Baadal; according to historians she rode Baadal when escaping from the fort in 1858. The Rani
Mahal, the palace of Rani Lakshmibai, has now been converted into a museum. It houses a collection of
archaeological remains of the period between the 9th and 12th centuries AD.

History of Jhansi, 1842 - May 1857

4. Manikarnika was married to the Maharaja of Jhansi, Raja Gangadhar Newalkar, in May 1842 and
was afterwards called Lakshmibai (or Laxmibai) in honour of the Hindu goddess Lakshmi and according to
the traditions. She gave birth to a boy, later named Damodar Rao, in 1851, who died after four months.
The Maharaja adopted a child called Anand Rao, the son of Gangadhar Rao’s cousin, who was
renamed Damodar Rao, on the day before the Maharaja died. The adoption was in the presence of the
British political officer who was given a letter from the Maharaja instructing that the child be treated with
respect and that the government of Jhansi should be given to his widow for her lifetime.

5. After the death of the Maharaja in November 1853, because Damodar Rao (born Anand Rao) was
an adopted son, the British East India Company, under Governor-General Lord Dalhousie, applied
the Doctrine of Lapse, rejecting Damodar Rao’s claim to the throne and annexing the state to its territories.
When she was informed of this she cried out "I shall not surrender my Jhansi" (Main meri Jhansi nahi
doongi). In March 1854, Rani Lakshmibai was given an annual pension of Rs. 60,000 and ordered to leave
the palace and the fort.

Siege of Jhansi
123

6. From August 1857 to January 1858, Jhansi under the Rani’s rule was at peace. The British had
announced that troops would be sent there to maintain control but the fact that none arrived strengthened
the position of a party of her advisers who wanted independence from British rule. When the British forces
finally arrived in March they found it well-defended and the fort had heavy guns which could fire over the
town and nearby countryside. Hugh Rose, commanding the British forces, demanded the surrender of the
city; if this was refused it would be destroyed. After due deliberation the Rani issued a proclamation: "We
fight for independence. In the words of Lord Krishna, we will if we are victorious, enjoy the fruits of victory,
if defeated and killed on the field of battle, we shall surely earn eternal glory and salvation." She defended
Jhansi against British troops when Sir Hugh Rose besieged Jhansi on 23 March 1858.

Flight to Gwalior

7. The leaders (the Rani of Jhansi, Tatya Tope, the Nawab of Banda, and Rao Sahib) fled once more.
They came to Gwalior and joined the Indian forces who now held the city (Maharaja Scindia having fled to
Agra from the battlefield at Morar). They moved on to Gwalior intending to occupy the strategic Gwalior
Fort and the rebel forces occupied the city without opposition. The rebels proclaimed Nana
Sahib as Peshwa of a revived Maratha dominion with Rao Sahib as his governor (subedar) in Gwalior. The
Rani was unsuccessful in trying to persuade the other rebel leaders to prepare to defend Gwalior against
a British attack which she expected would come soon. General Rose’s forces took Morar on 16 June and
then made a successful attack on the city.

Death

8. On 17 June in Kotah-ki-Serai near the Phool Bagh of Gwalior, a squadron of the 8th (King’s Royal
Irish) Hussars, under Captain Heneage, fought the large Indian force commanded by Rani Lakshmibai,
who was trying to leave the area. The 8th Hussars charged into the Indian force, slaughtering 5,000 Indian
soldiers, including any Indian "over the age of 16".They took two guns and continued the charge right
through the Phool Bagh encampment. In this engagement, according to an eyewitness account, Rani
Lakshmibai put on a sawar’s uniform and attacked one of the hussars; she was unhorsed and also
wounded, probably by his sabre. Shortly afterwards, as she sat bleeding by the roadside, she recognised
the soldier and fired at him with a pistol, whereupon he "dispatched the young lady with his
carbine". According to another tradition Rani Lakshmibai, the Queen of Jhansi, dressed as a cavalry leader,
was badly wounded; not wishing the British to capture her body, she told a hermit to burn it. After her death
a few local people cremated her body. Her tomb is in the Phool Bagh area of Gwalior.

N. R. NARAYANA MURTHY

1. Nagavara Ramarao Narayana Murthy was born 20 August 1946 he commonly referred to
as Narayana Murthy, he is an Indian IT industrialist and the co-founder of Infosys, a multinational
corporation providing business consulting, technology, engineering, and outsourcing services. Murthy
studied electrical engineering at the National Institute of Engineering, University of Mysore, and MTech at
the Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur.

2. Before starting Infosys, Murthy worked with Indian Institute of Management Ahmedabad as chief
systems programmer and Patni Computer Systems in Pune (Maharashtra). He started Infosys in 1981 and
served as its CEO from 1981 to 2002 and as chairman from 2002 to 2011. In 2011, he stepped down from
the board and became chairman Emeritus. On 1 June 2013, Murthy was appointed as Additional Director
and Executive Chairman of the board for a period of five years.

3. Murthy has been listed among the 12 greatest entrepreneurs of our time by Fortune magazine. He
has been described as the "father of the Indian IT sector" by Time magazine due to his contribution to
outsourcing in India. Murthy has also been honoured with the Padma Vibhushan[14] and Padma
Shri awards.

4. Murthy first served as Research Associate under a faculty at IIM Ahmedabad and then later served
as chief systems programmer There he worked on India’s first time-sharing computer system and designed
and implemented a BASIC interpreter for Electronics Corporation of India Limited. He started a company
named Softronics. When that company failed after about a year and a half, he joined Patni Computer
Systems in Pune.
124

5. Murthy and six software professionals founded Infosys in 1981 with an initial capital injection of Rs
10,000, which was provided by his wife Sudha Murthy. Murthy served as the CEO of Infosys for 21 years
from 1981 to 2002 and was succeeded by co-founder Nandan Nilekani. At Infosys he articulated, designed
and implemented the Global Delivery Model for IT services outsourcing from India. He was chairman of the
board from 2002 to 2006, after which he became Chairman of the board and Chief Mentor. In August 2011,
he retired from the company, taking the title chairman Emeritus.

PRAKASH PADUKONE

1. Prakash Padukone (born on 10 June 1955) is a former Indian badminton player. He was ranked
World No. 1 in 1980; the same year he became the first Indian to win the All England Open Badminton
Championships. He was awarded the Arjuna award in 1972 and the Padma Shri in 1982 by the
Government of India. He is one of the co-founders of Olympic Gold Quest, a foundation dedicated to the
promotion of Olympic sports in India.

Background and early life

2. Padukone was born on 10 June 1955 in Padukone village near Kundapura, Udupi. His surname,
Padukone, is the name of the village Padukone from where his family originates.

3. Padukone got married to Ujjala, a match arranged by their parents in the Indian Hindu system.
They have two daughters - Deepika Padukone, a Bollywood actress, and Anisha Padukone, a
golfer. Padukone, his wife and younger daughter Anisha reside in Bangalore, whereas Deepika lives and
works in Mumbai.

4. Prakash Padukone’s life story has been chronicled in the biography ‘Touch Play‘, by Dev S.
Sukumar. The book is only the second biography of any badminton player.

Career

5. Prakash was initiated into the game by his father Ramesh Padukone, who was the Secretary of
the "Mysore Badminton Association" for many years.

6. Padukone’s first official tournament was the Karnataka state junior championship in 1962. Though
he lost in the very first round, two years later he managed to win the state junior title. He changed his
playing style into a more aggressive style in 1971, and won the Indian national junior title in 1972. He also
won the senior title the same year. He won the National title consecutively for the next seven years. In
1978, he won his first major international title, the men’s singles gold medal at the 1978 Commonwealth
Games in Edmonton, Canada. In 1979, he won the "Evening of Champions" at the Royal Albert Hall,
London.

7. In 1980, he won the Danish Open, the Swedish Open and became the first Indian to win the men’s
singles title at the All England Championship with a victory over Indonesian rival Liem Swie King. He spent
much of his international career training in Denmark, and developed close friendships with European
players such as Morten Frost.

Other services

8. After his retirement from competitive sports in 1991, Padukone served as the chairman of
the Badminton Association of India for a short while. He also served as the coach of the Indian national
badminton team from 1993 to 1996.

Olympic gold quest

9. After retirement, Prakash Padukone has sought to mentor budding young players and help them
achieve glory for the country. He runs the Prakash Padukone Badminton Academy and, along with Geet
Sethi, he is a co-founder of Olympic Gold Quest, a foundation dedicated to the promotion of Olympic sports
in India.

TIPU SULTAN
125

1. Tipu Sultan was born on 20 November 1750 at Devanahalli, in present-day Bangalore Rural
district, about 33 km north of Bangalore city. He was named "Tipu Sultan" after the saint Tipu Mastan Aulia
of Arcot. Being illiterate, Hyder was very particular in giving his eldest son a prince’s education and a very
early exposure to military and political affairs. From the age of 17 Tipu was given independent charge of
important diplomatic and military missions. He was his father’s right arm in the wars from which Hyder
emerged as the most powerful ruler of southern India.

2. Tipu’s father, Hyder Ali, was a military officer in service to the Kingdom of Mysore who had become
the de facto ruler of Mysore in 1761 while his mother Fatima Fakhr-un-Nisa was the daughter of Mir Muin-
ud-Din, the governor of the fort of Kadapa. Hyder Ali appointed able teachers to give Tipu an early
education in subjects like Urdu, Persian, Arabic, Kannada, Quran, Islamic jurisprudence, riding, shooting
and fencing.

Early military service

3. Tipu Sultan was instructed in military tactics by French officers in the employment of his father. At
age of 15, he accompanied his father against the British in the First Mysore War in 1766. He commanded
a corps of cavalry in the invasion of Carnatic in 1767 at age 16. He also distinguished himself in the First
Anglo-Maratha War of 1775–1779.

Second Anglo-Mysore War

4. In 1779, the British captured the French-controlled port of Mahé, which Tipu had placed under his
protection, providing some troops for its defence. In response, Hyder launched an invasion of the Carnatic,
with the aim of driving the British out of Madras. During this campaign in September 1780, Tipu Sultan was
dispatched by Hyder Ali with 10,000 men and 18 guns to intercept Colonel Baillie who was on his way to
join Sir Hector Munro. In the Battle of Pollilur, Tipu decisively defeated Baillie. Out of 360 Europeans, about
200 were captured alive, and the sepoys, who were about 3800 men, suffered very high casualties. Munro
was moving south with a separate force to join Baillie, but on hearing the news of the defeat he was forced
to retreat to Madras, abandoning his artillery in a water tank at Kanchipuram.

5. Tipu Sultan defeated Colonel Braithwaite at Annagudi near Tanjore on 18 February 1782.
Braithwaite’s forces, consisting of 100 Europeans, 300 cavalry, 1400 sepoys and 10 field pieces, was the
standard size of the colonial armies. Tipu Sultan seized all the guns and took the entire detachment
prisoner. In December 1781 Tipu Sultan successfully seized Chittur from the British. Tipu Sultan had thus
gained sufficient military experience by the time Hyder Ali died on Friday, 6 December 1782 .

6. Tipu Sultan realised that the British were a new kind of threat in India. He became the ruler of
Mysore on Sunday, 22 December 1782, in a simple coronation ceremony. He then worked on to check the
advances of the British by making alliances with the Marathas and the Mughals. The Second Mysore War
came to an end with the 1784 Treaty of Mangalore.

Third Anglo-Mysore War

7. In 1791 his opponents advanced on all fronts, with the main British force under Cornwallis taking
Bangalore and threatening Srirangapatna. Tipu harassed the British supply and communication and
embarked on a "scorched earth" policy of denying local resources to the invaders. In this last effort he was
successful, as the lack of provisions forced Cornwallis to withdraw to Bangalore rather than attempt a siege
of Srirangapatna. Following the withdrawal, Tipu sent forces to Coimbatore, which they retook after a
lengthy siege.

8. The 1792 campaign was a failure for Tipu. The allied army was well-supplied, and Tipu was unable
to prevent the junction of forces from Bangalore and Bombay before Srirangapatna. After about two weeks
of siege, Tipu opened negotiations for terms of surrender. In the ensuing treaty, he was forced to cede half
his territories to the allies, and deliver two of his sons as hostages until he paid in full three crores and thirty
lakhs rupees fixed as war indemnity to the British for the campaign against him. He paid the amount in two
instalments and got back his sons from Madras.

Death
126

9. Three armies marched into Mysore in 1799—one from Bombay and two British, one of which included
Arthur Wellesley. They besieged the capital Srirangapatna in the Fourth Mysore War. Thus, the soldiers in
the British force numbered more than 50,000, whereas Tipu Sultan had only about 30,000. The
British broke through the city walls, and French military advisers told Tipu Sultanto escape via secret
passages, but he refused.

10. Tipu Sultan was killed at the Hoally (Diddy) Gateway, which was located 300 yards (270 m) from
the N.E. Angle of the Srirangapatna Fort. He was buried the next afternoon at the Gumaz, next to the grave
of his father.
RABINDRANATH TAGORE

1. Rabindranath Tagore born Robindronath Thakur, (7 May 1861 – 7 August 1941), and also
known by his sobriquets Gurudev, Kabiguru, and Biswakabi, was a Bengali polymath, poet, musician,
and artist from the Indian subcontinent. He reshaped Bengali literature and music, as well as Indian
art with Contextual Modernism in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Author of the "profoundly sensitive,
fresh and beautiful verse" of Gitanjali, he became the first non-European to win the Nobel Prize in Literature
in 1913. Tagore’s poetic songs were viewed as spiritual and mercurial; however, his "elegant prose and
magical poetry" remain largely unknown outside Bengal. He is sometimes referred to as "the Bard of
Bengal". As an exponent of the Bengal Renaissance, he advanced a vast canon that comprised paintings,
sketches and doodles, hundreds of texts, and some two thousand songs; his legacy also endures in the
institution he founded, Visva-Bharati University.

2. Tagore modernised Bengali art by spurning rigid classical forms and resisting linguistic strictures.
His novels, stories, songs, dance-dramas, and essays spoke to topics political and
personal. Gitanjali (Song Offerings), Gora (Fair-Faced) and Ghare-Baire (The Home and the World) are
his best-known works, and his verse, short stories, and novels were acclaimed—or panned—for their
lyricism, colloquialism, naturalism, and unnatural contemplation. His compositions were chosen by two
nations as national anthems: India’s Jana Gana Mana and Bangladesh‘s Amar Shonar Bangla. The Sri
Lankan national anthem was inspired by his work.

Early life: 1861–1878

3. The youngest of thirteen surviving children, Tagore (nicknamed "Rabi") was born on 7 May 1861
in the Jorasanko mansion in Calcutta to Debendranath Tagore (1817–1905) and Sarada Devi (1830–
1875).

4. Tagore was raised mostly by servants; his mother had died in his early childhood and his father
travelled widely. The Tagore family was at the forefront of the Bengal renaissance. They hosted the
publication of literary magazines; theatre and recitals of Bengali and Western classical music featured there
regularly. Tagore’s father invited several professional Dhrupad musicians to stay in the house and
teach Indian classical music to the children.

5. Tagore largely avoided classroom schooling and preferred to roam the manor or
nearby Bolpur and Panihati, which the family visited. His brother Hemendranath tutored and physically
conditioned him—by having him swim the Ganges or trek through hills, by gymnastics, and by practising
judo and wrestling. He learned drawing, anatomy, geography and history, literature, mathematics, Sanskrit,
and English—his least favourite subject. Tagore loathed formal education—his scholarly travails at the
local Presidency College spanned a single day.

6. After his upanayan (coming-of-age) rite at age eleven, Tagore and his father left Calcutta in
February 1873 to tour India for several months, visiting his father’s Santiniketan estate and Amritsar before
reaching the Himalayan hill station of Dalhousie. There Tagore read biographies, studied history,
astronomy, modern science, and Sanskrit, and examined the classical poetry of Kālidāsa. During his 1-
month stay at Amritsar in 1873 he was greatly influenced by melodious gurbani and nanak bani being sung
at Golden Temple for which both father and son were regular visitors. He wrote 6 poems relating to Sikhism
and a number of articles in Bengali child magazine about Sikhism.

7. Tagore returned to Jorosanko and completed a set of major works by 1877, one of them a long
poem in the Maithili style of Vidyapati. As a joke, he claimed that these were the lost works of newly
127

discovered 17th-century Vaiṣṇava poet Bhānusiṃha. Regional experts accepted them as the lost works of
the fictitious poet. He debuted in the short-story genre in Bengali with "Bhikharini" ("The Beggar Woman").
Published in the same year, Sandhya Sangit (1882) includes the poem "Nirjharer Swapnabhanga" ("The
Rousing of the Waterfall").

Santiniketan: 1901–1932

8. In 1901 Tagore moved to Santiniketan to found an ashram with a marble-floored prayer hall—
The Mandir—an experimental school, groves of trees, gardens, a library. There his wife and two of his
children died. His father died in 1905. He received monthly payments as part of his inheritance and income
from the Maharaja of Tripura, sales of his family’s jewellery, his seaside bungalow in Puri, and a derisory
2,000 rupees in book royalties.

9. In November 1913, Tagore learned he had won that year’s Nobel Prize in Literature: the Swedish
Academy appreciated the idealistic—and for Westerners—accessible nature of a small body of his
translated material focused on the 1912 Gitanjali: Song Offerings. He was awarded a knighthood by King
George V in the 1915 Birthday Honours, but Tagore renounced it after the 1919 Jallianwala Bagh
massacre.

10. In 1921, Tagore and agricultural economist Leonard Elmhirst set up the "Institute for Rural
Reconstruction", later renamed Shriniketan or "Abode of Welfare", in Surul, a village near the ashram. With
it, Tagore sought to moderate Gandhi’s Swaraj protests, which he occasionally blamed for British India’s
perceived mental — and thus ultimately colonial — decline. He sought aid from donors, officials, and
scholars worldwide to "free village[s] from the shackles of helplessness and ignorance" by "vitalising
knowledge". In the early 1930s he targeted ambient "abnormal caste consciousness" and untouchability.
He lectured against these, he penned Dalit heroes for his poems and his dramas, and he campaigned—
successfully—to open Guruvayoor Temple to Dalits.

Death

11. Tagore spent the last four years of his life in sickness and pain. In late 1937, he lost consciousness.
He was in a coma for a long time. Eventually he woke up, but three years later, he went back into a coma.
During these years, whenever he was conscious and felt well enough, he wrote poems. These poems talk
about how he came close to death. After a long period of suffering, Tagore died on 7 August 1941, at the
age of 80, in his childhood home in Kolkata.
137

CHAPTER DM - II

INITIATIVE TRG, ORGANISING SKILLS AND DO’s AND DONT’s

NATURAL DISASTERS

Introduction

1. NCC can play a significant role in the management of the after effects of natural calamities and
disasters. With its organizational capability, strength and quality of its cadre, involvement of NCC in disaster
relief will provide able assistance to the nation as well as an avenue to the youth in showing its commitment
to the society, play a significant role in forming correct attitudes, feelings of empathy in respect of fellow
human beings and also result in personal growth and improved self-image of the cadets. The NCC will in
turn benefit immensely with its enhanced image. Cadets being young and exuberant can be selectively
employed through correct selection of areas of intervention. Proper guidance and strict supervision of their
activities will ensure success of cadets.

2. Some disaster situations may, however, demand functioning of cadets on their own. It would,
however, be preferable to determine their areas of activity and responsibility in any disaster situation before
hand and limit the same to an indirect support role, while the direct intervention is left to the experts in the
field. Ordinarily participation should be restricted to 2nd/3rd year SD/SW cadets only and selection of boys
and girls should depend on area and distance from home town.

Precautionary Measures to Be Followed by NCC Cadets

3. NCC cadets have to perform multifaceted duties during disaster under the guideline of District
Disaster Management Authorities. JD/JW cadets are young and may not be considered suitable for such
operations. SW cadets may be used for softer jobs like providing medical assistance or manning exchanges
during strikes of nurses or telephone operators. Only SD cadets may be found suitable for helping in natural
calamities like earthquakes, land-slides and floods.

4. Prior to sending the cadets on such tasks, suitable bonds would be required to be obtained from
parents of cadets. Cadets are not adequately trained for specialized tasks related to Disaster Management.
Suitable training must be given to them during institutional training. Adequate allowances would require to
be allocated for the cadets taking part in these activities. Joint schemes with the State Disaster Relief
machinery would be required to be made in which NCC cadets may be incorporated. Adequate signal
equipment and other disaster relief equipment would be required to be authorised to NCC to carry out
necessary training cadets would have to carry out rehearsals along with the Army, Police, Fire Fighting
forces and others in the state.

5. Dos and Don’ts. Few Do’s and Don’ts instructions to be followed by NCC cadets
performing disaster related tasks are given below: -

Ser Do’s Don’ts

No
(a) NCC cadets should take all the preventive Ensure that no cadet will be permitted
measures during disaster management without the consent bond document from
the parents.
(b) Assist in Traffic Management under Without adequate signal equipment traffic
supervision control should not be operated.

First Aid can be given to the rescued people. They should avoid treatment of serious
(c) injuries.
(d) Help in setting up and administration of Without suitable training specialized tasks
Relief Camps. should not be handled by NCC cadets.
138

(e) Distribute the relief material to the affected Don’t operate away from your group.
population for their temporary sustenance.

(f) Manning exchanges during strikes of Cadets should not act as experts as they
telephone operators. don’t have required technical knowledge.
Collect the water containers, food and Cadets should not indulge in mishandling
(g) ordinary and special medicines. of water, food and medicines as these are
important amenities during disaster.
(h) Submit suitable bonds to be obtained from Avoid risky work during the disaster
their parents. management.
(i) SW cadets may be used for softer jobs like Ensure that SD cadets are not involved
providing medical assistance or manning directly in the rescue operations.
exchanges.
(j) Be prepared for immediate response Cadets should not make unnecessary
delays in their response
(k) Cadets can mark safe places and make Cadets should not impede rescue
evacuation route chart of the arena. operations.
(l) Collect data of the injured & casualties Given task should not be neglected.
(m) Counteract gossip and rumours to restore Cadets should stay away from gossiping
the morale of the people and rumours.
(n) Conduct of cultural and recreational activities Operate without full preparation.
for victims to boost their morale at later /Land
rehabilitation stages.

(o) Help removal of debris. Cadets should not be involved in removal

of toxic material.

FLOODS
6. Before floods.

(a) Do not litter waste, plastic bags, plastic bottles in drains

(b) Try to be at home if high tide and heavy rains occur simultaneously
(c) Listen to weather forecast at All India Radio, Doordarshan. Also, messages by Municipal bodies
from time to time and act accordingly.
(d) Evacuate low lying areas and shift to safer places.
(e) Make sure that each person has lantern, torch, some edibles, drinking water, dry clothes and
necessary documents while evacuating or shifting.
(f) Make sure that each family member has identity card.
(g) Put all valuables at a higher place in the house.

7. In the Flood Situation.

(a) Obey orders by government and shift to a safer place.

(b) Be at safe place and they try to collect correct information.
(c) Switch of electrical supply and don’t touch open wires.
(d) Don’t get carried away by rumours and don not spread rumours.

8. DO's.

(a) Switch off electrical and gas appliances, and turn off services off at the mains.
(b) Carry your emergency kit and let your friends and family know where you are going.
(c) Avoid contact with flood water it may be contaminated with sewage, oil, chemicals or other
substances.
(d) If you have to walk in standing water, use a pole or stick to ensure that you do not step into deep
water, open manholes or ditches.
(e) Stay away from power lines electrical current can travel through water, Report power lines that are
down to the power company.
139

(f) Look before you step-after a flood, the ground and floors are covered with debris, which may
include broken bottles, sharp objects, nails etc. Floors and stairs covered with mud and debris can
be slippery.
(g) Listen to the radio or television for updates and information.
(h) If the ceiling is wet shut off electricity. Place a bucket underneath the spot and poke a small hole
into the ceiling to relieve the pressure.
(i) Use buckets, clean towels and mops to remove as much of the water from the afflicted rooms as
possible.
(j) Place sheets of aluminium foil between furniture wet carpet.

9. Don’ts.

(a) Don't walk through flowing water - currents can be deceptive, and shallow, fast moving water can
knock you off your feet.
(b) Don't swim through fast flowing water - you may get swept away or struck by an object in the
water.
(c) Don't drive through a flooded area - You may not be able to see abrupt drop - offs and only half a
meter of flood water can carry a car away. Driving through flood water can also cause additional
damage to nearby property.
(d) Don't eat any food that has come into contact with flood water.
(e) Don't reconnect your power supply until a qualified engineer has checked it. Be alert for gas
leaks - do not smoke or use candles, lanterns, or open flames.
(f) Don't scrub or brush mud and other deposits from materials, this may cause further damage.
(g) Never turn on ceiling fixtures if ceiling is wet. Stay away from ceilings those are sagging.
(h) Never use TVs, VCRS, CRT terminals or other electrical equipment while standing on wet floors,
especially concrete.
(i) Don't attempt to remove standing water using your vacuum cleaner.
(j) Don't remove standing water in a basement too fast. If the pressure is relieved too quickly it may
put undue stress on the walls.

TSUNAMI
10. DO’s.

(a) Remain calm.

(b) Protect yourself if it is accompanied by an earthquake.
(c) Immediately head inland and to higher ground (at least 60' above sea level) if you experience an
earthquake that lasts a minute or more, you are on the beach and the tide suddenly goes way
out, or you see a wall of water rushing toward you. If you can’t get inland and up, go up.
(d) Know whether you are in a tsunami hazard zone or not.
(e) Know where the nearest tsunami escape route is.
(f) Have already put together portable emergency survival kits for you
and your family.
a. Have an emergency radio that automatically turns on in the event of
i. a hazard warning.
b. Assemble your family and walk or bicycle to the nearest tsunami. Safety zone (unless
someone with you is mobility impaired).
(g) Wait for an official announcement that the danger has passed before returning home or to the
beach.
(h) Have emergency supplies set in at home, since it might take days or weeks for electricity, food,
water, and protective services to be restored.
(i) You should find out if your home, school, workplace, or other frequently visited locations are in
tsunami hazard areas along sea-shore.
(j) Know the height of your street above sea level and the distance of your street from the coast or
other high-risk waters. (Local administration may put sign boards).
(k) Plan evacuation routes from your home, school, workplace, or any other place you could be
where tsunamis present a risk.
(l) If your children's school is in an identified inundation zone, find out what the school evacuation
plan is.
(m) Practice your evacuation routes.
140

(n) Use a Weather Radio or stay tuned to a local radio or television station to keep informed of local
watches and warnings.
(o) Talk to your insurance agent. Homeowners' policies may not cover flooding from a tsunami. Ask
the Insurance Agent about the benefits from Multi-Hazard Insurance Schemes.
(p) Discuss tsunamis with your family. Everyone should know what to do in a tsunami situation.
Discussing tsunamis ahead of time will help reduce fear and save precious time in an
emergency. Review flood safety and preparedness measures with your family.

11. DON’T’s.

(a) Rush to the beach to see the big wave.

(b) Rush to the beach after the first wave to see what has washed up on shore. (A tsunami may
include several waves arriving over a period of hours.)
(c) Hop in your car to get to higher ground. (Roads may be impassable, you’ll just contribute to the
traffic jam, and you may not get to safety. You’ll also make it harder for emergency vehicles to
get through.)
(d) Stop to pack your most cherished possessions to take with you. (You may not have time.)
(e) Wait for an official warning if you feel an earthquake that lasts a minute or more, are on the
beach and the tide suddenly goes out, or you see a wall of water rushing toward you. (By the
time a warning is issued, it may be too late.)
(f) Start to put together an emergency survival kit. (You should already have one prepared.)
(g) Go back because you don’t remember whether you turned off the oven.
(h) Brush your teeth and put on your makeup before going out.
(i) Stop to put on clean underwear because you might have to go to the hospital.
(j) Live in a tsunami hazard zone.

EARTHQUAKES

12. What to Do Before an Earthquake.

(a) Repair deep plaster cracks in ceilings and foundations. Get expert advice if there are signs of
structural defects.
(b) Anchor overhead lighting fixtures to the ceiling.
(c) Follow BIS codes relevant to your area for building standards
(d) Fasten shelves securely to walls.
(e) Place large or heavy objects on lower shelves.
(f) Store breakable items such as bottled foods, glass, and china in low, closed cabinets with
latches.
(g) Hang heavy items such as pictures and mirrors away from beds, settees, and anywhere that
people sit.
(h) Brace overhead light and fan fixtures.
(i) Repair defective electrical wiring and leaky gas connections. These are potential fire risks.
(j) Secure water heaters, LPG cylinders etc., by strapping them to the walls or bolting to the
floor.
(k) Store weed killers, pesticides, and flammable products securely in closed cabinets with
latches and on bottom shelves.
(l) Identify safe places indoors and outdoors.
(i) Under strong dining table, bed
(ii) Against an inside wall
(iii) Away from where glass could shatter around windows, mirrors, pictures, or where
heavy bookcases or other heavy furniture could fall over
(iv) In the open, away from buildings, trees, telephone and electrical lines, flyovers and
bridges
(m) Know emergency telephone numbers (such as those of doctors, hospitals, the police, etc)
(n) Educate yourself and family members

13. Have a disaster emergency kit ready.

(a) Battery operated torch with extra batteries

(b) Battery operated radio
141

(c) First aid kit and manual

(d) Emergency food (dry items) and water (packed and sealed)
(e) Candles and matches in a waterproof container
(f) Knife
(g) Chlorine tablets or powdered water purifiers
(h) Can opener.
(i) Essential medicines
(j) Cash and credit cards
(k) Thick ropes and cords
(l) Sturdy shoes

14. What to Do During an Earthquake. Stay as safe as possible during an earthquake. Be

aware that some earthquakes are actually foreshocks and a larger earthquake might occur. Minimize
your movements to a few steps that reach a nearby safe place and stay indoors until the shaking has
stopped and you are sure exiting is safe.

15. If indoors.

(a) DROP to the ground; take COVER by getting under a sturdy table or other piece of furniture; and
HOLD ON until the shaking stops. If there is no a table or desk near you, cover your face and
head with your arms and crouch in an inside corner of the building.
(b) Protect yourself by staying under the lintel of an inner door, in the corner of a room, under a table
or even under a bed.
(c) Stay away from glass, windows, outside doors and walls, and anything that could fall, (such as
lighting fixtures or furniture).
(d) Stay in bed if you are there when the earthquake strikes. Hold on and protect your head with a
pillow, unless you are under a heavy light fixture that could fall. In that case, move to the nearest
safe place.
(e) Use a doorway for shelter only if it is in close proximity to you and if you know it is a strongly
supported, load bearing doorway.
(f) Stay inside until the shaking stops and it is safe to go outside. Research has shown that most
injuries occur when people inside buildings attempt to move to a different location inside the
building or try to leave.
(g) Be aware that the electricity may go out or the sprinkler systems or fire alarms may turn on.

16. If outdoors.

(a) Do not move from where you are. However, move away from buildings, trees, streetlights, and
utility wires.
(b) If you are in open space, stay there until the shaking stops. The greatest danger exists directly
outside buildings; at exits; and alongside exterior walls. Most earthquake-related casualties result
from collapsing walls, flying glass, and falling objects.

17. If in a moving vehicle.

(a) Stop as quickly as safety permits and stay in the vehicle. Avoid stopping near or under buildings,
trees, overpasses, and utility wires.
(b) Proceed cautiously once the earthquake has stopped. Avoid roads, bridges, or ramps that might
have been damaged by the earthquake.

18. If trapped under debris.

(a) Do not light a match.

(b) Do not move about or kick up dust.
(c) Cover your mouth with a handkerchief or clothing.
(d) Tap on a pipe or wall so rescuers can locate you. Use a whistle if one is available. Shout only as
a last resort. Shouting can cause you to inhale dangerous amounts of dust.
142

MAN MADE DISASTERS

ACCIDENTS

1. Dos

(a) DO seek medical attention before doing anything else.

(b) DO call the police to the scene of the accident, in appropriate cases.
(c) DO cooperate with all law enforcement and emergency personnel who respond to the scene.
(d) DO get the license plate numbers of all other vehicles involved in car accidents and the
drivers' names, addresses, telephone numbers, and insurance information.
(e) DO write down the names, addresses, and phone numbers of all potential witnesses to an
accident before the witnesses leave the area where the accident occurred.
(f) DO take photographs of all of the following, as applicable, as soon as possible after the
accident:
(i) The scene of the accident, from all angles.
(ii) The surrounding area.
(iii) The product or animal that caused your injuries.
(iv) Your injuries, including taking pictures over the time it takes your injuries to heal.
(v) Any property damages.
(g) DO keep track of all work missed because of the accident and follow-up medical
appointments, all medical treatment received, and how you felt physically and emotionally
because of your injuries.
(h) DO get a property damage valuation from your insurance company or from two independent
shops if you aren’t satisfied with how your insurance company has valued the damage to
your car.
(i) DO contact your attorney. If you don’t have an attorney or your attorney is unable to take car
accident cases, contact a qualified attorney in your area. For more on hiring a car accident
attorney, read this article.

2. DON'Ts.

(a) DON'T move your vehicle after an automobile accident unless necessary for safety or required by
law.
(b) DON'T put yourself at risk of being further injury by standing or waiting in an area with traffic or
other safety hazards.
(c) DON'T leave the scene of an accident until the police tell you it’s okay to do so.
(d) DON'T throw away any potential evidence in the case, such as defective products, torn or
bloodstained clothing, or car parts that came off the car during the accident.
(e) DON'T remain in a burning car or building while calling for help. Leave the area of danger first,
and then immediately call 911 from a safe place.
(f) DON'T engage in discussions about who was at fault in the accident with anyone, and make sure
you don't apologize for anything - it can be considered evidence that you were legally at fault.
(g) DON'T agree to settlement terms without contacting your attorney and having him or her review
the settlement offer.

3. Tips To Save Life. Here are a few important things that you can do as a responsible citizen
to save a precious life before the arrival of the ambulance:

a. Remain Calm – Do not panic. It is important for you and the victim to remain calm as it
will help you take rational decisions. Do not allow any person at the scene, be it the
victim or bystander to panic.

b. Assess the Accident Spot – Move closer to the accident area, to understand if the
accident involves only a single person or there are more. Be careful and check for
leaking CNG and petrol pipes, live wires or broken glass.

c. Call the Emergency Services – Dial 102 for ambulance and 100 for police. Give the exact
location of the accident, so that they do not waste time in reaching the accident spot.
143

d. Stop Cars and Ask for Help – If there aren’t too many people on the road, try and stop
other cars or bikes for help. Request other bystanders to help you.

e. Call Family and Friends – Check the last dialled number from the victim’s mobile or
check for frequently called numbers or names like Mom, Dad, Hubby, Wife etc.

f. Provide First Aid – If you know or are trained to give CPR (Chest pressure for heart rate /
Mouth to Mouth Oxygen transfer) do it if the victim is unconscious. If it involved a car
accident, search for a first aid kit inside car or take help from the bystanders.

g. Check for Pulse – Try and assess the condition of the victim. If the victim is unconscious
and not responding, then you might have to immediately take the victim to the nearest
hospital without waiting for the ambulance. Remember to take care of the neck and head
portion. Lesser movements and road jerks will help if you have given a little head and
neck support to the victim’s body. However, avoid moving the victim, unless absolutely
necessary or you are trained in it as you might be hurting the victim and causing further
damage.

h. Help Keep the Traffic Moving – Make space for ambulance to come, so keep the traffic
moving. Some curious people simply slow down their vehicles to check out an accident.
Just let them know it is nothing serious. You should also warn the oncoming traffic and
let drivers know that there is an accident and they need to avoid the area.

i. Comfort the Victim – The accident victim is scared and even hurt. Talk to the victim if he
or she is conscious with comforting and encouraging words like ‘ambulance is on the
way’ and ‘nothing serious has happened.’

j. Accompany the Victim – Do accompany the victim to the hospital till the arrival of the
family members and provide all the support to the police to help them register a case.

Conclusion

A sound disaster prevention and response plan reflect on the effectiveness of the NCC cadets
during the disaster. Suitable training must be given to them during institutional training. NCC cadets can
effectively assist the state which could take the form of traffic management under supervision, conduct of
cultural and recreational activities for victims to boost their morale at later or rehabilitation stages, collection,
loading and dispatch of medical aid material, food and other articles of relief, help in setting up and
administration of relief camps etc. Cadets must be well versed with various Do’s and Don’ts associated
with disaster related tasks.
144

CHAPTER DM - III

FIRE SERVICES AND FIRE FIGHTING

Introduction

1. Fire is a major cause for destruction of property / lives these days. Due to increase in the standard
of living, electrical goods, air conditioners and cooking gas are found in most of the houses. Also, due to
the influx of multinational companies, most offices, shopping malls and hospitals have air conditioners.
With the influx of these electrical gadgets and cooking gas, occurrences of fire incidents have increased
manifold, especially during winters and summers. It is therefore essential that everyone should be aware
of how to prevent fire hazards and/or to provide assistance in fire fighting.

Causes and Prevention of Fire

2. Fire is the outcome of either heating or over heating of a combustible substance to the required
temperature or igniting an inflammable material. The following three elements are essential for creation of
fire and its continuation:-

(a) Oxygen.
(b) Sufficient heat to raise the temperature of fuel to its burning point or ignition temperature.
(c) Combustible or burnable material (Solid, Liquid or Gas).

Prevention of Fire

3. The following measures must be taken to prevent occurrence of fire incidents:-

(a) Domestic Fires.

(i) Kitchen Fires. These fires can be prevented by following measures:-

(aa) Don’t keep any inflammable material like petrol, kerosene or clothing near
the fire or the gas.
(ab) Always check the gas cylinder, gas pipe for leakage. Keep the kitchen well
ventilated to prevent leaking gas accumulation. Switch off the regulator when the
gas is not in use.
(ac) Before lighting the gas, ensure there is no gas leakage.
(ad) Keep children away from gas or fire or stoves.
(ae) Before leaving the kitchen, ensure that the gas and kerosene stoves are
switched off and there are no burning embers in the ‘Chulha’.

(ii) Other Fires.

(aa) Ensure that no electrical circuit is overloaded’.

(ab) Ensure that good quality electrical items are used.
(ac) Ensure that all electrical gadgets are switched off when not in use, e.g.
TV, AC, room heater or iron.
(ad) Ensure that smokers do not leave any burning cigarettes or stubs in
ashtrays near inflammable material.
(ae) Don’t ignite any fire cracker inside the house.

(b) Fire in Public Places.

(i) Ensure that smokers do not leave any burning cigarettes or stubs in public
dustbins or near inflammable material in closed AC offices, shopping malls or cinema halls.
(ii) Don’t ignite any fire cracker near petrol pumps, in crowded markets, near
inflammable material or inside malls.
145

Fire Fighting

4. Fire can be extinguished if any one or more of the three main constituents are removed from the
scene of fire. The fire can thus be extinguished by:-

(a) Starvation. Starvation means removal of fuel or combustible material and it can be
achieved by either segregation of fire and un-burnt fuel by removing either of them e.g. removing
un-burnt combustible materials from a room on fire with the help of hook or otherwise or division
of a large fire into several smaller ones to prevent the radiated heat from setting alight combustible
material at some distance.

(b) Cooling. Cooling implies the removal of heat to lower the temperature of burning
material to a point below its ignition point. This is usually achieved by water. When water is poured
over a burning material, it absorbs heat, becomes hot and flows away or is converted into steam.
The burning substance loses heat to the water and its temperature comes down to below its ignition
temperature and so the fire is extinguished.

(c) Smothering. Smothering means Choking ‘or restricting the supply of Oxygen
(Air) to the burning material. This is also called - blanketing’ and is achieved by sealing all the
burning material from Oxygen (Air) by covering it with sand/dry earth/ foam or by creating an
atmosphere over the fire of heavier than air inert gas.

Fire Fighting Parties

5. House Fire Parties. It consists of four persons who carry stirrup pumps and water buckets. They
act as fire watchers and work under the orders of the wardens. They carry one stirrup pump, two buckets,
one torch and one hand axe. One steel helmet and one whistle per member are envisaged as personal
equipment.

6. Auxiliary Fire Services. This consists of eight persons with Trailer Pump which can throw water
at the fire from a distance. The members of this Service are drawn from the Home Guards.

Fire Fighting Equipment

7. Fire Fighting Equipment can be divided into the following four categories:-

(a) Fire Extinguishers.

(b) Stirrup Pumps.
(c) Buckets.
(d) Fire Beaters and Hooks.

8. Fire Extinguishers. For the convenience of study, these could be grouped as under:-

(a) Soda Acid Extinguishers. These fire extinguishers are used for extinguishing fires
involving ordinary combustible material, where the cooling effect is achieved by water or solution
containing large percentage of water. Such extinguishers are conical /cylindrical in shape.

(b) Foam Type or Dry Chemical Powder Extinguishers. These fire extinguishers contain
dry chemicals or solution and are exclusively meant for extinguishing fires involving inflammable
liquids such as oils, fats, or grease, where blanketing the fire to isolate it from Oxygen (Air) is
required.

(c) CTC Carbon dioxide and Dry Chemical Extinguishers. These fire
Extinguishers contain chemicals, either liquid, gas or dry, and are mainly used to fight fires involving
Live ‘electrical equipment’ etc. where, the use of an electrically non-conductive extinguishing agent
is of most importance.

(d) The main advantages of these extinguishers are:-

(i) They are easy to operate.

146

(ii) They need only one man to operate and carriage to another place.
(iii) They are very useful in the initial stages of fire.

(e) The disadvantages of these extinguishers are:-

(i) The use is limited as the duration of the working of the extinguishers is
approximately one to two minutes.
(ii) The cost of these extinguishers is high.
(iii) These extinguishers require constant care and careful maintenance.

9. Stirrup Pumps. The stirrup pump is an excellent piece of first aid fire fighting equipment designed
for use on small fire. It is very useful in localizing and controlling fires with limited water supplies. Water
spray from this equipment may be used on small fires for cooling the combustible material or the
surrounding of scene of fire. It is generally operated by a team of four members but in an emergency a
team of two members can also operate it effectively. The consumption of water is about 3.8 to 5.7 litres per
minute. The spray produced by this pump can reach 15 to 20 feet away from the nozzle with water
consumption 2.8 litres per minute.

10. Bucket. Buckets are ideal for storing water and sand for fighting small fires. They could be
easily carried by one person, from one place to another.

11. Fire Beaters / Hooks. Beaters made of wire net in a rectangular shape and hooks made of iron
fitted on bamboo poles are ideal for separating the burning and unburnt combustible material, and
extinguishing by beating the small fires.

Conclusion

12. It is extremely essential for all to be aware of the causes of fires and how to prevent fires or
carryout firefighting in homes and public places.

SUMMARY

1. Fire is the outcome of either heating or over heating of a combustible substance to the required
temperature or igniting an inflammable material. The following three elements are essential for creation of
fire and its continuation: -

(a) Oxygen.
(b) Sufficient heat to raise the temperature of fuel to its burning point or ignition temperature.
(c) Combustible or burnable material (Solid, Liquid or Gas).

2. The fire can thus be extinguished by:-

(a) Starvation.
(b) Cooling.
(c) Smothering.

3. Fire Fighting Parties.

(a) House Fire Parties.

(b) Auxiliary Fire Services.

4. Fire Fighting Equipment can be divided into the following four categories: -

(a) Fire Extinguishers.

(b) Stirrup Pumps.
(c) Buckets.
(d) Fire Beaters and Hooks.
156

CHAPTER SS - III

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPEMENT ACTIVITIES

Introduction

1. Social Security refers to all governmental or others programmes aimed at providing basic needs
to citizens who are retired, unemployed, or unemployable due to disability/old age. It is funded through
contributions from both the employees and the employers or by the government itself. The ILO in 2014
estimated that only 27% of the world’s population has access to comprehensive social security.

Social Security

2. Social security refers to the action programs of government intended to promote the welfare of the
population through assistance measures guaranteeing access to sufficient resources for food and shelter
and to promote health and well-being for the population at large and potentially vulnerable segments such
as children, the elderly, the sick and the unemployed. Services providing social security are often
called social services.

3. Importantly, the need to ensure social security for all, especially those in the unorganized sector,
is an overarching concern recognized in the Five-Year Plans. The Constitution of India provides strength
and spirit to the social security for organized and unorganized workers through its Directive Principles of
the State Policy.

4. Social welfare refers to a set of institutional or personal services provided either by the state or
voluntary organizations to prevent the incidence or to reform or rehabilitate the victims of disabilities, or
disorganization or delinquencies or destitution and so on.

5. Types of Social Security. Social security is of three types:-

(a) Social Insurance. It is where people receive benefits of services in recognition of

contributions to an insurance program. These services typically include provision for retirement
pensions, disability insurance, survivor benefits and unemployment insurance.

(b) Services. The ones provided by government or designated agencies responsible for
social security provision. In different countries, that may include medical care, financial support
during unemployment, sickness, or retirement, health and safety at work, aspects of social work
and even industrial relations.

(c) Basic Security. It is irrespective of participation in specific insurance program where

eligibility may otherwise be an issue. For instance, assistance given to newly arrived refugees for
basic necessities such as food, clothing, housing, education, money, and medical care.

SOCIAL EVILS

FEMALE FOETICIDE

6. Causes of Female Foeticide.

(a) Extreme Desire to Have a Male Child. Removal of girls from the family tree, even
before they are born, clearly shows the desire for a boy child. Sons are seen as main source of
income and help at old age.

(b) Unwanted Pregnancy. Though most people mention this as an excuse for performing
abortions, but it is generally the course taken after knowing the sex of the baby.

(c) Dowry System. In India, the age-old custom of ‘dowry system’ puts a burden on
the parents’, who are “blessed” with a girl child and start calculating the high costs related with
marriage expenses.
157

(d) Poor Medical Ethics. Many unscrupulous and unethical hospitals, clinics and illegal
agencies run ultra sound facilities to determine the sex and later facilitate selective abortion of
females illegally. It is a booming multi-million industry in India.

(e) Inferior Status. Inferior status of women in Indian society is not new, and has
been an age-old practice.

7. Effects of Female Foeticide.

(a) Reduced Sex Ratio. 914 girls for 1000 boys as per census 2011.
(b) Female / Women Trafficking. Poor and young girls are the victims of this illegal practices.
(c) Increase in rape and assault cases.
(d) Population Drop. With less mothers and wombs, there are fewer births.

8. Measures to Prevent Female Foeticide.

(a) Cancellation / permanent ban of the doctor’s license who reveal the gender of the child.
(b) Heavy penalty imposed on firms doing illegal sex determination.
(c) High fines / judicial actions against ‘parents’ who knowingly try to kill their unborn girl.
(d) High incentives for the girl child in education, employment etc.
(e) Equal rights for women in the property of the parents / husband.
(f) Awareness campaigns targeted specially on the youth.

DOWRY
9. Causes of Dowry System.

(a) Economic factors. There are many economic factors that contribute towards the system
of dowry. Some of these include inheritance systems and the bride’s economic status.

(b) Social factors. The structure and kinship of marriage in parts of India contributes to dowry.
In the north, marriage usually follows a patrilocal (lives with husband’s family) system, where the
groom is a non-related member of the family. In the south, marriage is more often conducted within
the bride’s family, for example with close relatives or cross-cousins, and in a closer physical
distance to her family. In addition, brides may have the ability to inherit land, which makes her more
valuable in the marriage, decreasing the chance of dowry over the bride price system.

(c) Religious Factors. Dowry in India is not limited to any specific religion. It is widespread
among Hindus and other religions. For example, Indian Muslims call dowry as jahez, justify the
practice in terms of jahez-e-fatimi.

(d) Economic Inequality. This fuels the desire to ask for more and more cash or gifts to live
a lavish life style.

(e) Increasing Unemployment of Males. In order to prove their status, unemployed males
are growingly demanding more and more dowry to fulfil their desires.

(f) Parental Compulsions. In order to find a good match for their daughter, well to do
parents are offering huge dowry.

(g) Divine Sanctions. The Vedas prescribe that a dowry be given by the bride’s family
to the groom.

10. Prevention of Dowry

(a) Not to offer or accept any dowry.

(b) Educate the members of the family with law - that accepting or giving dowry is an offence.

(c) Educate the members of the family and the neighbours to

respect a woman’s rights and privileges.
158

(d) Encourage women to fight for their rights.

(e) Educate the girl child to become economically independent.

(f) Strict law enforcement on dowry.

CORRUPTION

11. Prevention of Corruption. These are some suggested measures to prevent corruption:-

(a) Proper education of all sections of society to understand that corruption in any form is bad
and will not be tolerated.
(b) Neither give bribe or favors to any one nor takes bribes/favors from any one.
(c) Highlighting / reporting of cases of corruption.
(d) Speedy trial and exemplary punishment for persons involved in corruption.
(e) Ensuring transparency in all dealings.
(f) Full freedom to Lok Pal or Lokayukta to investigate cases of corruption.
(g) Simplifying routine procedures.

DRUG ABUSE AND TRAFFICKING

12. What is Drug Abuse. Consuming the substance which is neither approved nor supervised by
medical professionals. The use of steroids for performance enhancement in sports is also called drug abuse.
Continuous and prolonged abuse of drugs may make a person an addict.

13. Preventive and Remedial Measures. There are certain preventive and remedial measures
for dealing with the problem of drug abuse.

(a) The Government must use all the media to propagate against the habit of drug-taking.
(b) Voluntary organizations should pay more attention to instruct addicts how to give up the
vice to bring them to the main stream of public life without shame or sorrow.
(c) Physicians should teach them how to prevent and avoid the evil and how to lead a normal
healthy life.
(d) Parents should pay more care, attention and love to their sons and daughters.
(e) Reading of moral and religious books is also helpful to addicts.
(f) The police must act fearlessly to act against the people involved drug traffic.

HIV / AIDS

14. What is HIV / AIDS. Although HIV and AIDS are often used synonymously, they are different.
HIV (Human Immuno-deficiency Virus) is a virus that gradually destroys the body’s immune system. AIDS
(Acquired Immuno Deficiency Syndrome) is a condition wherein various diseases affect the body because
of the body’s weak natural defense mechanism – the immunity. Therefore, AIDS is an acquired condition
in which a person may have various diseases that cause similar symptoms, all of which are due to the
body’s diminished ability to fight diseases. Anyone who has HIV infection will develop AIDS over a period
of time.

15. How Does HIV/AIDS Spread. HIV is present in all body fluids of an infected person and is more
in number, in the blood, semen and vaginal fluids. HIV infection normally spreads when there is contact
with these body fluids through four main routes:-

(a) Sexual Transmission. The most common route of spread of HIV infection is through
unprotected sex between two people, where at least one has HIV infection. Unprotected sex means
having sex without condom.

(b) Blood Transfusions. As per the guidelines of the National AIDS Control Organization
(NACO), it is mandatory to test blood for HIV before transfusion. The risk of transmission of HIV
through tested blood is therefore very remote. The only possibilities of infection through blood
are, if the blood was not tested for HIV or the HIV infection was in the window period. Window
159

period is the term used for the duration between the entry of HIV in the body and the detection of
its antibodies through blood tests. Window period is normally up to three months

(c) Sharing Needles and Syringes for Intravenous Drug Use. When people inject drugs
intravenously, they may draw small amounts of blood into the needle. If another person uses this
needle immediately, the blood containing HIV will be injected into the second person. Thus, he/she
can also be infected with HIV.

(d) Mother to Child Transmission. Mother to child transmission of HIV can occur in three
ways:-

(i) During pregnancy, when the HIV crosses the placenta.

(ii) During delivery.
(iii) During Breastfeeding. Although HIV is present in breast milk, it does not mean
that the baby will always be infected with it.

(e) Other Methods.

(i) Skin Piercing. There are several cultural practices in India that involve skin
piercing such as, piercing ears or nose for ornamental reasons, tattooing, etc.
(ii) Oral Route. The risk through oral route may be there only if there are cuts or
wounds in the mouth or bleeding gums.

16. Role of the Youth in Preventing HIV / AIDS. HIV is more common in the most productive age
group of 15-45 years, and therefore causes major impacts on the economic status of the affected individual,
family, community, and the nation at large. The young adults can play a very important role in preventing
the HIV at community level, and also minimise its impact at all levels by taking following actions:-

(a) Youth can assume responsibility in preventing HIV infections by avoiding behaviour that
might lead to HIV infections.

(b) Youth may also share the right to refuse sex and assume responsibility for ensuring safe
sex.

(c) People living with HIV/AIDS have the same right to education, employment, health, travel,
marriage, recreation, privacy, social security, scientific benefits etc. Hence, all should share
responsibilities for avoiding HIV infection / re-infection.

(d) The youth by creating a proper and positive peer pressure, can delay the age at first sex,
avoid sex before marriage, practicing safer sex, and preventing alcohol and drug abuse. The
stereotypical image of a “macho” male needs to be changed to depict responsible behaviours.

(e) The young can also play an important role in addressing gender imbalance, which is one
of the important factors for underdevelopment and HIV transmission.

(f) Youth should also educate general public by spreading the information that HIV cannot be
transmitted by the following actions:-

(i) Shaking Hands.

(ii) Sharing of Clothes.
(iii) Sharing of Food and Utensils.
(iv) Sharing of Toilets.
(v) Insect Bites.
(vi) Hugging or Kissing.
(vii) Working in the same office or travelling in the same vehicle.
(viii) Playing or swimming with the infected person.
(ix) Coughing, sneezing or in routine patient-care activities (bedmaking, feeding etc).
160

BETI BACHAO, BETI PADHAO

17. It is a campaign of the Government of India that aims to generate awareness and improve the
efficiency of welfare services intended for girls in India. Female foeticide has led to a sharp drop in the
ratio of girls born in contrast to boy infants in some states in India. Ultrasound technology has made it
possible for pregnant women and their families to learn the gender of a foetus early in a pregnancy.
Discrimination against girl infants, for several reasons, has combined with the technology to result in a rise
in abortions of foetuses identified as female during ultrasonic testing.

18. The trend was first noticed when results of the 1991 national census were released, and it was
confirmed to be a worsening problem when results of the 2001 national census were released. The
reduction in the female population of certain Indian states continues to worsen, as results of the 2011
national census have shown. It has been observed that the trend is most pronounced in relatively
prosperous regions of India. The dowry system in India is often blamed; the expectation that a
large dowry must be provided for daughters in order for them to marry is frequently cited as a major cause
for the problem. Pressure for parents to provide large dowries for their daughters is most intense in
prosperous states where high standards of living, and modern consumerism, are more prevalent in Indian
society.

19. This campaign aims to address the issue of the declining child sex ratio image (CSR) and is a
national initiative jointly run by the Ministry of Women and Child Development, the Ministry of Health and
Family Welfare and the Ministry of Human Resource Development. It initially focused multi-sector action in
100 districts throughout the country where there was a low CSR.

20. Strategies employed to successfully carry out the scheme are:

(a) Implement a sustained social mobilization and communication campaign to create equal
value for the girl child and promote her education.
(b) Place the issue of decline in child sex ratio/sex ratio at birth in public discourse,
improvement of which would be an indicator for good governance.
(c) Focus on gender critical districts and cities.

21. The Beti Bachao campaign is also supported by the Indian Medical Association.

MISSION INDRADHANUSH

22. Mission Indradhanush is a health mission of the government of India. The scheme seeks to drive
towards 90% full immunization coverage of India and sustain the same by year 2020. Vaccination is being
provided to prevent eight vaccine preventable diseases nationally,
i.e. Diphtheria, Pertussis, Tetanus, Polio, Measles, severe form of Childhood Tuberculosis and Hepatitis B
and meningitis & pneumonia caused by Haemophilus influenza type B; and against Rotavirus Diarrhoea
and Japanese Encephalitis in selected states and districts respectively.

23. The ultimate goal of Mission Indradhanush is to ensure full immunization with all available vaccines
for children up to two years of age and pregnant women. The Government has identified 201 high focus
districts across 28 states in the country that have the highest number of partially immunized and
unimmunized children.

24. To further intensify the immunization programme, Government of India aims to reach each and
every child up to two years of age and all those pregnant women who have been left uncovered under the
routine immunisation programme/UIP. The special drive will focus on improving immunisation coverage
in select districts and cities to ensure full immunisation to more than 90% by December 2018. The
achievement of full immunisation under Mission Indradhanush to at least 90% coverage was to be achieved
by 2020 earlier. With the launch of IMI, achievement of the target has now been advanced.

25. Intensified Mission Indradhanush will cover low performing areas in the selected districts (high
priority districts) and urban areas. Special attention will be given to unserved/low coverage pockets in sub-
centre and urban slums with migratory population. The focus is also on the urban settlements and cities
identified under National Urban Health Mission (NUHM).
161

DIGITAL INDIA

26. Digital India is a campaign launched by the Government of India in order to ensure the
Government’s services are made available to citizens electronically by improved online infrastructure and
by increasing Internet connectivity or by making the country digitally empowered in the field of
technology. The initiative includes plans to connect rural areas with high-speed internet networks. Digital
India consists of three core components: the development of secure and stable digital infrastructure,
delivering government services digitally, and universal digital literacy.

27. Digital India was launched by the Prime Minister of India Narendra Modi on 1 July 2015 with an
objective of connecting rural areas with high-speed Internet networks and improving digital literacy. The
vision of Digital India programme is inclusive growth in areas of electronic services, products,
manufacturing and job opportunities. It is centred on three key areas – digital infrastructure as a utility to
every citizen, governance and services on demand, and digital empowerment of citizens. The Government
of India entity Bharat Broadband Network Limited (BBNL) which executes the Bharat Net project is the
custodian of Digital India (DI) project.

28. Some of the facilities which will be provided through this initiative are Bharat net, digital locker, e-
education, e-health, e-sign, e-shopping and national scholarship portal. As part of Digital India, Indian
Government planned to launch Botnet cleaning centres. The main features of Digital India are:

(a) National e-Governance Plan aimed at bringing all the front-end government services
online such as:

(i) MyGov.in is a platform to share inputs and ideas on matters of policy and
governance. It is a platform for citizen engagement in governance, through a "Discuss",
"Do" and "Disseminate" approach.

(ii) UMANG (Unified Mobile Application for New-age Governance) is a

Government of India all-in-one single unified secure multi-channel, multi-platform, multi-
lingual, multi-service, freeware mobile app for accessing over 1,200 central and state
government services in multiple Indian languages over Android, iOS, Windows and USSD
(featurephone) devices, including services such as AADHAR, Digi Locker, Bharat Bill
Payment System, PAN, EPFO services, PMKVY services, AICTE, CBSE, tax and fee or
utilities bills payments, education, job search, tax, business, health, agriculture, travel,
Indian railway tickets bookings, birth certificates, e-District, e-Panchayat, police clearance,
passport, other utility services from private companies and much more.

(iii) eSign framework allows citizens to digitally sign a document online using
Aadhaar authentication.

(iv) Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM) Mobile app is being used by people and
Government organisations for achieving the goals of Swachh Bharat Mission.

(v) eHospital application provides important services such as online registration,

payment of fees and appointment, online diagnostic reports, enquiring availability of blood
online etc.

(vi) Digital attendance: attendance.gov.in to keep a record of the attendance of

government employees on a real-time basis. This initiative started with implementation of
a common Biometric Attendance System (BAS) in the central government offices located
in Delhi.

(c) Facilities to digitally empower citizens

(i) Digital Locker facility This will help citizens to digitally store their important
documents like PAN card, passport, mark sheets and degree certificates. Digital Locker
will provide secure access to Government issued documents. It uses authenticity services
provided by Aadhaar. It is aimed at eliminating the use of physical documents and enables
162

the sharing of verified electronic documents across government agencies. Three key
stakeholders of Digi Locker are Citizen, Issuer and requester.

(ii) BPO and job growth: The government is planning to create 28,000 seats of
BPOs in various states and set up at least one Common Service Centre in each of the
gram panchayats in the state.[20]

(iii) e-Sampark Vernacular email service: Out of 10% English speaking Indians, only
2% reside in rural areas. Rest everyone depends on their vernacular language for all living
their lives. However, as of now, email addresses can only be created in English language.
To connect rural India with the Digital India, the Government of India impelled email
services provider giants including Gmail, office and Rediff to provide the email address in
regional languages.

WASTE MANAGEMENT
Introduction

29. Waste Management refers to the collection, transport, processing or disposal, managing and
monitoring of waste materials. The term normally relates to all kinds of waste, whether generated during
the extraction of raw materials, the processing of raw materials into intermediate and final products, the
consumption of final products, or other human activities, including municipal (residential, institutional,
commercial), agricultural, and social (health care, household hazardous waste, sewage sludge). Waste
management is intended to reduce adverse effects of waste on health, the environment or aesthetics. All
wastes materials, whether they are solid, liquid, gaseous or radioactive, fall within the scope of waste
management. It also encompasses the legal and regulatory framework that relates to waste management
encompassing guidance on recycling etc.

30. There are following types of Waste:

(a) Solid Waste. Solid waste predominantly, is any garbage, refuse or rubbish that we
make in our homes and other places. This can be further Classified into different types depending
on their source as under:-

(i) Household waste is generally classified as municipal

(ii) Industrial waste as hazardous waste
(iii) Biomedical waste or hospital waste as disease causing waste
(iv) Electronic wastes such as TV’s, refrigerators and computers

(b) Liquid Waste. Waste can come in non-solid form. Some solid waste can also be
converted to a liquid waste form for disposal. This can be classified into following types:-

(i) Chemicals released by industries.

(ii) Waste water released by households through the sewer lines.

(c) Radioactive Waste. These are those wastes that contain radioactive material.
Radioactive wastes are usually by-products of nuclear power generation and other applications of
nuclear fission or nuclear technology, such as research and medicine. Radioactive waste is
hazardous to most forms of life and the environment and is regulated by government agencies in
order to protect human health and the environment.

(d) Municipal Solid Waste. This includes trash or garbage from households, schools,
offices, market places, restaurants and other public places. This waste comprises of:-

(i) Organic waste such as vegetable and fruit peels, leftover foodstuff, etc.
(ii) Paper.
(iii) Cotton and Woolen clothes.
(iv) Wood.
(v) Plastic Bags.
(vi) Tin, aluminum and other metal items such as cans.
(vii) Glass Bottles.
163

(e) Hospital or Bio-Medical Waste. Hospital waste is generated during the diagnosis,
treatment, or immunization of human beings or animals or in research activities in these fields or
in the production or biological testing. It may include Soiled Waste, Disposables, Anatomical
Waste, Discarded Medicines and Chemical Wastes.

(f) Electronic Waste. This is waste from electronic and electrical devices. Think of
DVD and music players, TV, Telephones, computers, vacuum cleaners and all the other electrical
stuff in your home. These are also called e-waste, e-scrap, or waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE). Some e-waste (like TV) contains lead, mercury, cadmium, and brominated
flame retardants. These are harmful to humans and the environment. It is therefore important that
the right authorities ensure the proper disposal of such waste.

(g) Hazardous Waste. Hazardous or harmful are those that potentially threaten public
health or the environment. Such waste could be inflammable (can easily catch fire), reactive (can
easily explode), corrosive (can easily eat through metal) or toxic (poisonous to human and
animals). It can further be explained as:-

(i) Ignitable. If this waste item easily catch fire, burst into flames, irritate eyes,
skin or breathing. Examples include varnish, paints or polish.
(ii) Reactive. If this waste item can chemically react with another substance to
explode or give of dangerous vapours. An example includes Ammonia, which can react with
Chlorine bleach to produce harmful gas.
(iii) Toxic. If the waste item is poisonous to humans and other living things, many
pesticides and household cleaning chemicals fall in this class.
(iv) Corrosive. These waste items are acidic in nature and can erode other
materials. Corrosive waste can eat through metal, or cause severe burns and skin
complications if they get into contact with skins.

(h) Organic Waste. Organic waste comes from plants or animal sources. Commonly,
they include food waste, fruit and vegetable peels, flower trimmings and even dog poop can be
classified as organic waste. They are biodegradable (this means they are easily broken down by
other organisms over time and turned into manure). Many people turn their organic waste
into compost and use them in their gardens.

(j) Agricultural Waste. Typically, this is waste generated by agricultural activities. These
include horticulture, fruit growing, seed growing, livestock breeding, market gardens and seedling
nurseries. Waste items in this group include empty pesticide containers, old silage wrap, out of
date medicines and wormers, used tyres, surplus milk, cocoa pods and corn husks.

(k) Industrial Waste. Since the industrial revolution, the rise in the number of industries
manufacturing glass, leather, textile, food, electronics, plastic and metal products has significantly
contributed to waste production. Take a look at the things in your home, every item there was
probably manufactured and possibly, waste was produced as a result.

(l) Construction / Demolition waste. Construction waste is that resulting from the
construction of roads and building. Waste items include concrete debris, wood, earth, huge
package boxes and plastics from the building materials and the like.

Disposal and Management of Waste

31. Actions by Individuals. Some steps which all individuals can take while contributing to the waste
management includes the following:-

(a) Separation of household waste into bio-degradable and non-biodegradable.

(b) Reduce use of plastic bags and replace with paper or jute/cloth bags.
(c) Recyclable waste such as paper, glass, cloth etc. could be segregated and disposed off
accordingly.
(d) Keep the surroundings of your house and around the house clean. Do not dump waste just
outside the house on the road.
164

(e) Colonies could start vermin-composting and natural composting.

(f) What is waste for you is wealth for somebody else. There has been a tradition in India of
finding an innovative use for everything –tyres, battery cases, plastic bins and what not. Think of
reuse of the thing you would like to discard.

32. Actions by Civic Bodies. The major functions of civic body may include the following:-

(a) Prohibiting littering of street.

(b) Organizing house to house waste collection.
(c) Conducting awareness programs to spread information to public.
(d) Providing sufficient community storage facilities.
(e) Use of colour code bins and promotion of waste separation.
(f) Transportation of wastes in covered vehicles.
(g) Processing of wastes by adopting suitable combination of composting, aerobic digestion,
palletisation etc.
(h) Up gradation of the existing dump sites and Disposal of inert wastes sanitary landfills.

33. Solid Waste Management. Some of the highlights of the Solid Waste Management (SWM)
Rules, 2016 are:

(a) Waste segregation at source is mandatory. Waste generators have to segregate waste
into three streams - Organic or Biodegradable waste, Dry waste (Plastic, Paper, Metal, Wood, etc.)
and Domestic Hazardous waste (diapers, napkins, mosquito repellents, cleaning agents etc.).
Further, bulk waste generators such as hotels, hospitals etc. are expected to treat organic waste
either onsite or by collaborating with the urban local body.

(b) Municipalities and urban local bodies have been directed to include informal waste pickers
and rag pickers into their waste management process. This is the first time that national policy
has acknowledged and included the informal sector into the waste management process.

(c) FMCG product manufacturers that use non-biodegradable packaging for their products
must put in place a system to collect the packaging waste generated due to their production.

(d) Urban local bodies have been given a provision to charge bulk generators a user fee to
collect and process their waste, additionally spot fines may be levied on user’s burning garbage or
throwing it in a public place.

(e) No non-recyclable waste having a calorific value of 1,500 Kcal/kg or more should be
disposed in the landfills. It should either be utilized for generating energy or can be used for
preparing refuse derived fuel or it can be used for co-processing in cement or thermal power plants.

WOMEN HEALTH AND SANITATION

34. Women’s health in India can be examined in terms of multiple indicators, which vary by geography,
socio economic standing and culture. To adequately improve the health of women in India multiple
dimensions of well-being must be analysed in relation to global health averages and also in comparison to
men in India. Health is an important factor that contributes to human well-being and economic growth.

35. Currently, women in India face a multitude of health problems, which ultimately affect the aggregate
economy’s output. Addressing the gender, class or ethnic disparities that exist in healthcare and improving
the health outcomes can contribute to economic gain through the creation of quality human capital and
increased levels of savings and investment.

36. Gender is one of the main social determinants of health—which include social, economic, and
political factors—that play a major role in the health outcomes of women in India and access to healthcare
in India. Therefore, the high level of gender inequality in India negatively impacts the health of women.
Studies have indicated that boys are more likely to receive treatment from health care facilities compared
to girls.
165

37. Gender discrimination begins before birth; females are the most commonly aborted sex in India.
If a female foetus is not aborted, the mother’s pregnancy can be a stressful experience, due to her family’s
preference for a son. Once born, daughters are prone to being fed less than sons, especially when there
are multiple girls already in the household. As women mature into adulthood, many of the barriers
preventing them from achieving equitable levels of health stem from the low status of women and girls in
Indian society, particularly in the rural and poverty-affected areas.

38. Problems with India’s healthcare system. Women are negatively affected by the
geographic bias within implementation of the current healthcare system in India. Of all health workers in
the country, nearly two thirds are men. This especially affects rural areas where it has been found that
out of all doctors, only 6 percent are women. This translates into approximately 0.5 female allopathic
physicians per 10,000 individuals in rural area.

39. Health problems of tribal women. The high incidence of breast lumps among Adivasi
women of Adilabad in Telangana has created apprehension of more serious health impacts for this remote
population. “Leave alone breast cancer or any other type of carcinoma, even routine mammarian infections
were unknown among indigenous people belonging to the Gond, Pardhan, Kolam and Thotti tribe.”

40. Malnutrition and morbidity. Poverty and malnutrition are common issues faced by Indian
women. Nutrition plays a major role in and individual’s overall health; psychological and physical health
status is often dramatically impacted by the presence of malnutrition. One of the main drivers
of malnutrition is gender specific selection of the distribution of food resources.

41. Maternal malnutrition has been associated with an increased risk of maternal mortality and also
child birth defects. Addressing the problem of malnutrition would lead to beneficial outcomes for women
and children.

Breast Cancer

42. India is facing a growing cancer epidemic, with a large increase in the number of women with
breast cancer. By the year 2020 nearly 70 percent of the world’s cancer cases will come from developing
countries, with a fifth of those cases coming from India.

43. Much of the sudden increase in breast cancer cases is attributed to the rise in Westernisation of
the country. This includes westernised diet, greater urban concentrations of women, and later child bearing.
Additionally, problems with India’s health care infrastructure prevent adequate screenings and access for
women, ultimately leading to lower health outcomes compared to more developed countries.

TREE PLANTATION

44. Tree-planting is the process of transplanting tree seedlings, generally for forestry, land reclamation,
or landscaping purpose. It differs from the transplantation of larger trees in arboriculture, and from the
lower cost but slower and less reliable distribution of tree seeds.

45. Because trees remove carbon dioxide from the air as they grow, tree planting can be used as a
geoengineering technique to remove CO2 from the atmosphere. Desert greening projects are also
motivated by improved biodiversity and reclamation of natural water systems, but also improved economic
and social welfare due to an increased number of jobs in farming and forestry.

46. Tree Plantation drives combat many environmental issues like deforestation, erosion of soil,
desertification in semi-arid areas, global warming and hence enhancing the beauty and balance of the
environment. Trees absorb harmful gases and emit oxygen resulting in increase in oxygen supply. On
an average, a single tree emits 260 pounds of oxygen annually. Similarly, a fully-grown tree is sufficient
for 18 human beings in one acre of land in one year stressing the importance of tree plantation for mankind.

47. The type of tree planted may have great influence on the environmental outcomes. It is often
much more profitable to outside interests to plant fast-growing species, such as eucalyptus, casuarina
or pine (e.g., Pinusradiata or Pinuscaribaea).
166

48. To promote the growth of native ecosystems, many environmentalists advocate only indigenous
trees be planted. A practical solution is to plant tough, fast-growing native tree species which begin
rebuilding the land. Planting non-invasive trees that assist in the natural return of indigenous species is
called "assisted natural regeneration.” Alternatively, farmer-managed natural regeneration (FMNR),
involves farmers preserving trees (not replanting), and is considered to be a more cost effective method of
reforestation than regular tree planting.

TRAFFIC AWARENESS

Save Yourself by Learning Traffic Signs and Road Safety Measures

49. Traffic signs are the silent speakers on the road. Be it the person behind the wheel or a pedestrian,
having a sound knowledge about road safety is absolutely necessary for all before hitting the roads.

50. Traffic signs give information about the road conditions ahead, provide instructions to be followed
at the major crossroads or junctions, warn or guide drivers, and ensure proper functioning of road traffic.
Being unaware of road signs is akin to throwing caution to the wind. It can lead to loss of life and property.
A person is supposed to be familiar (get through a written or oral test) with the traffic signs and symbols
before acquiring a driving license in India.

Traffic Control Organisation

51. Road traffic control involves directing vehicular and pedestrian traffic around a construction zone,
accident or other road disruption, thus ensuring the safety of emergency response teams, construction
workers and the general public. Traffic control also includes the use of CCTV and other means of
monitoring traffic by local or state roadways authorities to manage traffic flows and providing advice
concerning traffic congestion.

52. The responsibility to control all traffic in a city or outside is of the Traffic Police department which
works under the District Police Chief. The Traffic Police carries out the following tasks:-

(a) Clearing of road blockages due to accidents or any other reason.

(b) Educating general public on road safety rules.
(c) Conduct of road safety seminars or training.
(d) Control / monitoring of Speed.
(e) Ensuring proper marking and placement of road signs.

Traffic Organization

53. The traffic in any city or town is controlled by the Deputy Commissioner of Police (Traffic). He is
assisted by various Assistant Commissioners of Police (ACPs), Inspectors, Assistant Sub Inspectors
(ASIs), Head Constables and Constables. The strength depends on the size of the city or town and the traffic
that is to be managed. In addition, there is a Control Room, which monitors all Traffic Cameras and
Communications.

Causes of Road Accidents

54. Road accidents are very common in our nation and the majority of these road crashes are caused
by human error. While some are relatively minor, thousands of lives are taken every year by these road
accidents. Few of the causes are listed below:-

(a) Distracted Driving. It becomes a larger threat every year and has been the leading
cause of car accidents for the past decades. Please pay attention to the road while you are driving.
That means no calls, no eating, no reading, no grooming or application of makeup, and talking
while behind the wheel.

(b) Drunk Driving. Drunk driving is one of the most dangerous causes of accidents in the
nation and is the deadliest. If you have had anything to drink, take a taxi or give your keys to a
sober friend. It is not worth the risk.
167

(c) Speeding. Although it can be tempting to push the speed limit when you are running
late, speeding is the second most common cause of accidents, so you should resist the urge and
stay within the legal limits.

(d) Reckless Driving. Changing lanes too quickly, speeding well over the limit, and
acting aggressive on the roads can lead to horrible accidents. It is important to take your time and
remain calm while driving to avoid needless accidents caused by simple carelessness.

(e) Rain. While you can’t always avoid driving in the rain, the slippery, treacherous road
conditions caused by heavy rains should be avoided when at all possible. If visibility is too low to
drive or the roads seem particularly slick, you should pull over and wait until the storm passes.

(f) Running Red Lights. It may seem obvious, but it bears repeating. Red always means
stop. Even if it seems like no other cars are coming, you can cause a serious accident by running
a red light and you will be breaking the law.

(g) Night Driving. Lack of visibility makes hazards more difficult to see at night. Make sure
that you are extra alert on the road at night, and use your full lights when on an abandoned road
without street lights.
(h) Tailgating. There is never an excuse to get too close to the car in front of you, no
matter how frustratingly slow they seem to be going. Keep a safe distance from other cars so that
you will have time to react to sudden turns or uses of brakes.

(j) Wrong-Way Driving/ Improper Turns. Everyone makes mistakes, but lapses in
judgement while driving a car can cause horrible accidents. Be aware of street signs warning of
one-way streets or other irregularities, especially in unfamiliar areas. When people don’t get in the
proper lane to make a turn, use signals properly, or follow traffic signals, accidents happen. Always
look out for traffic signs and obey the proper right-of-way when you make a turn.

(k) Teenage Drivers. Teens don’t have the experience to know what to do in unsafe
conditions and that causes accidents. If you have teenagers, make sure that they have had a
defensive driving course, do not permit cell phone use while driving, and limit the passengers they
can take with them in the car.

(l) Drugs. While alcohol is the culprit we usually associate with drugs, including marijuana,
prescription pills and other illegal drugs also cause terrible accidents. Never drive if you are under
the influence of any drug, prescribed or not.

55. Road Safety Education. Education about road safety is often provided in schools,
colleges, workplaces, clubs and public places. However, there could be other ways to create mass
awareness:

(a) Distribute booklets and pamphlets in schools.

(b) Show presentations on road safety, traffic signs and negative aspects of road accidents in
the classrooms.
(c) Share online content with peers.
(d) Encourage parents to help children learn preventive measures in real time.
(e) Educate teachers with the basic laws and regulations on the road.

56. Celebrating Road Safety. Every year, prominent metro cities of India celebrate the road
safety week to promote road safety measures and aware people about various traffic signs. During the
entire week, the transport departments of various states create awareness through community building
process in schools, colleges, offices, and on roads. They also sensitize people about the outcome of
drunken driving, high-speed driving, the importance of wearing a helmet for bikers and seat belts for four-
wheeler drivers. They also educate about traffic and driving signals. At times, they choose themes to
communicate to the masses
168

POLLUTION

Types of Pollutants

57. The term "pollution" refers to any substance that negatively impacts the environment or organisms
that live within the affected environment. The five major types of pollution include: air pollution, water
pollution, soil pollution, light pollution, and noise pollution.

58. Air Pollution. A major source of air pollution results from the burning of fossil fuels. Vehicle and
factory emissions are common sources of this type of air pollution. The burning of fossil fuels contributes
to the formation of smog, a dense layer of particulate matter that hangs like a cloud over many major cities
and industrial zones. Air pollution contributes to respiratory problems such as asthma, lung cancer, chronic
bronchitis, and other lung ailments. Nitrogen and sulphur oxides in the air contribute to acid rain, which is
a form of precipitation with a lower (more acidic) pH than normal. Acid rain harms forests, species that
live in water bodies, and degrades outdoor statues, monuments, and buildings.

59. Water Pollution. A major source of water pollution is runoff from agricultural fields, industrial
sites, or urban areas. Runoff disrupts the water body’s natural balance. For example, agricultural runoff
typically includes fertilizer or toxic chemicals. Fertilizer can cause algal blooms (an explosive growth of
algae), choking out other plants and decreasing the amount of available oxygen necessary for the survival
of other species. Raw sewage is another type of water pollutant. When sewage gets into the drinking water
supply, serious stomach and digestive issues may result, including the spread of diseases such as typhoid
or dysentery. A third source of water pollution is trash. Improperly disposed of items, such as plastic bags,
fishing line, and other materials may accumulate in the water and lead to the premature death of animals
that get tangled within the garbage.

60. Soil Pollution. Soil can become polluted by industrial sources or the improper disposal of toxic
chemical substances. Common sources of soil pollution include asbestos, lead, PCBs, and overuse of
pesticides/herbicides.

61. Light Pollution. Light pollution refers to the large amount of light produced by most urban
and other heavily-populated areas. Light pollution prevents citizens from seeing features of the night sky
and has also been shown to impede the migration patterns of birds and the activities of nocturnal animals.

62. Noise Pollution. Noise pollution typically refers to human-made noises that are either very
loud or disruptive in manner. This type of pollution has been shown to impact the movement of sea
mammals, such as dolphins and whales and also impacts the nesting success of birds.

SUMMARY

1. Social security is of three types:-

(a) Social Insurance.

(b) Services.
(c) Basic Security.

Female Foeticide

2. Causes of Female Foeticide.

(a) Extreme Desire to Have a Male Child.

(b) Unwanted Pregnancy.
(c) Dowry System.
(d) Poor Medical Ethics.
(e) Inferior Status.

3. Measures to Prevent Female Foeticide.

(a) Cancellation / permanent ban of the doctor’s license who reveal the gender of the child.
169

(b) Heavy penalty imposed on firms doing illegal sex determination.

(c) High fines / judicial actions against ‘parents’ who knowingly try to kill their unborn girl.
(d) High incentives for the girl child in education, employment etc.
(e) Equal rights for women in the property of the parents / husband.
(f) Awareness campaigns targeted specially on the youth.

Dowry

4. Causes of Dowry System.

(a) Economic factors.

(b) Social factors
(c) Religious Factors
(d) Economic Inequality.
(e) Increasing Unemployment of Males.
(f) Parental Compulsions.
(g) Divine Sanctions.

5. Prevention of Dowry

(a) Not to offer or accept any dowry.

(b) Educate the members of the family with law - that accepting or giving dowry is an offence.
(c) Educate the members of the family and the neighbours to
respect a woman’s rights and privileges.
(d) Encourage women to fight for their rights.
(e) Educate the girl child to become economically independent.
(f) Strict law enforcement on dowry.

Drug Abuse

6. Preventive Measures

(a) The Government must use all the media to propagate against the habit of drug-taking.
(b) Voluntary organizations should pay more attention to instruct addicts how to give up the
vice to bring them to the main stream of public life without shame or sorrow.
(c) Physicians should teach them how to prevent and avoid the evil and how to lead a normal
healthy life.
(d) Parents should pay more care, attention and love to their sons and daughters.
(e) Reading of moral and religious books is also helpful to addicts.
(f) The police must act fearlessly to act against the people involved drug traffic.

HIV / AIDS

7. How Does HIV/AIDS Spread.

(a) Sexual Transmission.

(b) Blood Transfusions.
(c) Sharing Needles and Syringes for Intravenous Drug Use
(d) Mother to Child Transmission.
(e) Skin Piercing.
(f) Oral Route.

8. Role of the Youth in Preventing HIV / AIDS.

(a) Youth can assume responsibility in preventing HIV infections by avoiding behaviour that
might lead to HIV infections.
(b) Youth may also share the right to refuse sex and assume responsibility for ensuring safe
sex.
170

(c) People living with HIV/AIDS have the same right to education, employment, health, travel,
marriage, recreation, privacy, social security, scientific benefits etc. Hence, all should share
responsibilities for avoiding HIV infection / re-infection.
(d) The youth by creating a proper and positive peer pressure, can delay the age at first sex,
avoid sex before marriage, practicing safer sex, and preventing alcohol and drug abuse. The
stereotypical image of a “macho” male needs to be changed to depict responsible behaviours.
(e) The young can also play an important role in addressing gender imbalance, which is one
of the important factors for underdevelopment and HIV transmission.
(f) Youth should also educate general public by spreading the information that HIV cannot be
transmitted by the following actions:-

(i) Shaking Hands.

(ii) Sharing of Clothes.
(iii) Sharing of Food and Utensils.
(iv) Sharing of Toilets.
(v) Insect Bites.
(vi) Hugging or Kissing.
(vii) Working in the same office or travelling in the same vehicle.
(viii) Playing or swimming with the infected person.
(ix) Coughing, sneezing or in routine patient-care activities (bedmaking, feeding etc).

Beti Bachao, Beti Padhao

9. It is a campaign of the Government of India that aims to generate awareness and improve the
efficiency of welfare services intended for girls in India. Strategies employed to successfully carry out the
scheme are:

(a) Implement a sustained social mobilization and communication campaign to create equal
value for the girl child and promote her education.
(b) Place the issue of decline in child sex ratio/sex ratio at birth in public discourse,
improvement of which would be an indicator for good governance.
(c) Focus on gender critical districts and cities.

10. The Beti Bachao campaign is also supported by the Indian Medical Association.

Mission Indradhanush

11. Mission Indradhanush is a health mission of the government of India.The ultimate goal of Mission
Indradhanush is to ensure full immunization with all available vaccines for children up to two years of age
and pregnant women. Intensified Mission Indradhanush will cover low performing areas in the selected
districts (high priority districts) and urban areas. Special attention will be given to unserved/low coverage
pockets in sub-centre and urban slums with migratory population. The focus is also on the urban
settlements and cities identified under National Urban Health Mission (NUHM).

Digital India

12. Digital India is a campaign launched by the Government of India in order to ensure the
Government’s services are made available to citizens electronically by improved online infrastructure and
by increasing Internet connectivity or by making the country digitally empowered in the field of
technology. The initiative includes plans to connect rural areas with high-speed internet networks. Digital
India consists of three core components: the development of secure and stable digital infrastructure,
delivering government services digitally, and universal digital literacy.

Waste Management

13. Waste Management refers to the collection, transport, processing or disposal, managing and
monitoring of waste materials. The term normally relates to all kinds of waste, whether generated during
the extraction of raw materials, the processing of raw materials into intermediate and final products, the
consumption of final products, or other human activities, including municipal (residential, institutional,
171

commercial), agricultural, and social (health care, household hazardous waste, sewage sludge). Waste
management is intended to reduce adverse effects of waste on health, the environment or aesthetics. All
wastes materials, whether they are solid, liquid, gaseous or radioactive, fall within the scope of waste
management. It also encompasses the legal and regulatory framework that relates to waste management
encompassing guidance on recycling etc.

Women Health and Sanitation

14. Women’s health in India can be examined in terms of multiple indicators, which vary by geography,
socio economic standing and culture. To adequately improve the health of women in India multiple
dimensions of well-being must be analysed in relation to global health averages and also in comparison to
men in India. Health is an important factor that contributes to human well-being and economic growth.

15. Currently, women in India face a multitude of health problems, which ultimately affect the aggregate
economy’s output. Addressing the gender, class or ethnic disparities that exist in healthcare and improving
the health outcomes can contribute to economic gain through the creation of quality human capital and
increased levels of savings and investment.

16. Gender is one of the main social determinants of health—which include social, economic, and
political factors—that play a major role in the health outcomes of women in India and access to
healthcare in India.

Tree Plantation

17. Tree-planting is the process of transplanting tree seedlings, generally for forestry, land reclamation,
or landscaping purpose. Because trees remove carbon dioxide from the air as they grow, tree planting can
be used as a geoengineering technique to remove CO2 from the atmosphere.Tree Plantation drives combat
many environmental issues like deforestation, erosion of soil, desertification in semi-arid areas, global
warming and hence enhancing the beauty and balance of the environment.

Traffic Awareness

18. Road traffic control involves directing vehicular and pedestrian traffic around a construction zone,
accident or other road disruption, thus ensuring the safety of emergency response teams, construction
workers and the general public.

19. Causes of Road Accidents

(a) Distracted Driving.

(b) Drunk Driving.
(c) Speeding.
(d) Rain.
(f) Running Red Lights.
(g) Night Driving.
(h) Tailgating.
(j) Wrong-Way Driving/ Improper Turns.
(k) Teenage Drivers.
(l) Drugs.

Pollution

20. The term "pollution" refers to any substance that negatively impacts the environment or organisms
that live within the affected environment. The five major types of pollution include: air pollution, water
pollution, soil pollution, light pollution, and noise pollution.
172

CHAPTER SS - IV

PROTECTION OF CHILDREN AND WOMEN SAFETY

PROTECTION OF CHILDREN

Introduction

1. India is home to the largest child population in the world. Almost 42 per cent of its total population
is under eighteen years of age. The health and security of the country’s children is integral to any vision for
its progress and development. One of the issues marring the vision for the country’s children is the evil of
child sexual abuse. The Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act (POCSO) 2012 came into force
in November 2012 to deal with the problem.

Definitions and Provisions

2. General Provisions.

(a) The Act is gender-neutral and defines a child as any person below the age of eighteen
years.
(b) The Act provides precise definitions for different forms of sexual abuse, including
penetrative and non-penetrative sexual assault, sexual harassment and pornography.
(c) The Act provides for stringent punishment including rigorous imprisonment for life for
certain offences, and fine.
(d) The Act provides for mandatory reporting of sexual offences.
(e) The Act provides for child-friendly procedures for reporting of offences, recording of
evidence, investigation and trial.

3. Under Section 45 of the Act, the power to make rules rests with the Central Government. The rules
framed under the Act provide:-

(a) Arrangements for care and protection and emergency medical treatment of the child.
(b) Compensation payable to a child who has been the victim of a sexual offence.
(c) The periodic monitoring of the provisions of the Act the National Commission for Protection
of Child Rights (NCPCR) and State Commissions for Protection of Child Rights (SCPCR).
(d) Arrangements for the care and protection of the child and no re-victimisation during
investigation and trial.

Punishment under the Act

4. The act also recognizes that the intent to commit an offence, when unsuccessful for whatever
reason, needs to be penalized. The attempt to commit an offence under the act has been made liable for
punishment for up to half the punishment prescribed for the commission of the offence.

5. The act also provides punishment for providing assistance to the offence. This would cover
Trafficking of the children for sexual purposes.

6. Punishment for Offences Covered in the Act. These are as under:-

(a) Penetrative Sexual Assault (Section 3). Not less than seven years imprisonment, this
may extend to imprisonment for life and, fine (Section 4).
(b) Aggravated Penetrative Sexual Assault (Section 5). Not less than ten years
imprisonment, this may lead to imprisonment for life and, fine (Section 6).
(c) Sexual Assault (Section 7). Not less than three years imprisonment, this may extend to
five years and, fine (Section 8).
(d) Aggravated Sexual Assault (Section 9). Not less than five years imprisonment, this may
extend to seven years, and fine (Section 10).
(e) Sexual Harassment of the Child (Section 11). Three years imprisonment and fine
(Section 12).
173

(f) Use of Child for Pornographic Purposes (Section 13). Five years imprisonment and
fine, and in the event of subsequent conviction, seven years imprisonment and fine (Section 14
(1)).

Methods for Reporting and Recording

7. General Provisions.

(a) His or her right to privacy and confidentiality protected and respected by every person by
all means and through all stages of a judicial process involving the child.
(b) The media has been barred from disclosing the identity of the child without the permission
of the special court.
(c) For speedy trial the act provides the evidence of the child to be recorded within a period
of 30 days. Also, the special court is to complete the Trial within a period of one year, as far as
possible.
(d) The Special Juvenile Police Unit (SJPU) or the local police are also required to report the
matter to the child welfare committee within 24hrs of recording the complaint, for long term
rehabilitation of the child.
(e) The Act provides for the establishment of Special Courts for trial of offences under the Act.

8. Reporting and Recording of Evidence. The Act incorporates child friendly procedures for
reporting, recording of evidence, investigation and trial of offences. These include:-

(a) Recording the statement of the child at the residence of the child or at the place of his
choice, preferably by a woman police officer not below the rank of sub-inspector.
(b) No child to be detained in the police station in the night.
(c) Police officer will not be in uniform, while recording the statement of the child.
(d) The statement of the child to be recorded, as spoken by the child.
(e) Assistance of an interpreter or translator or an expert be provided as per the need of the
child.
(f) Assistance of special educator or any person familiar with the manner of communication
of the child in case child is disabled.
(g) Medical examination of the child in presence of parents.
(h) The victim is a girl child; the medical examination shall be conducted by a woman doctor.
(i) Frequent breaks for the child during trial.
(j) Child not to be called repeatedly to testify.
(k) No aggressive questioning or character assassination of the child.
(l) In-camera trial of cases.

Child Abuse

9. General.

(a) Child abuse is an intrinsic part of today’s global attention. Every child is at risk as it does
not affect only one religion, caste or creed.
(b) It is generally observed that the statistics are higher, when the child is at its adolescence.
Abuse can be of mental, as well as physical, or both.

10. Definition. Child abuse constitutes all forms of physical and / or emotional ill-treatment, sexual
abuse, neglect or negligent treatment or commercial or other exploitation, resulting in actual or potential
harm to the child’s health, survival, development or dignity.

11. Forms of Child Abuse. Child Abuse can be of following forms:-

(a) Physical Abuse. Causing physical injury upon a child. This may include hitting,
shaking, kicking, beating, or otherwise harming a child physically.
(b) Emotional Abuse. Emotional abuse (also known as verbal abuse, mental abuse) means,
causing behavioural, emotional, or mental distress/trauma, by acts or the failure to act by others.
(c) Sexual Abuse. Sexual abuse is inappropriate sexual behaviour with a child.
174

(d) Child Neglect. Child neglect is an act of omission or commission leading to the denial of
a child’s basic needs.

12. Child Abuse India. A national study on child abuse conducted in 2006 by Ministry of Child
and Women Welfare found that it is 5-12 year age group children who are most at risk of abuse and
exploitation. Over 50% children were subjected to physical abuse and 53.22% children reported facing
sexual abuse.

WOMEN SAFETY
General

13. Safety of Women in India is a vast topic now-a-days. We cannot say that women are safe in India
by seeing the last few year crimes against women especially in the national capital. Women generally feel
frightened while going alone outside to the home. It is a very sad reality of the country that its women
citizens are living with fear all time. Personal safety of women has been the topic of importance for every
Indian citizen. In order to improve the condition regarding women safety in India, following are some points
as tips for women safety:

14. Some Tips Regarding Women Safety.

(a) Self defence techniques are the first and foremost thing to which each and every woman
must be aware of and get proper self-defense training for their safety. They must be aware of some
effective defence techniques such as kicks to groin, blocking punches, etc.

(b) Generally, most of the women are gifted with sixth sense which they must use whenever
they encounter any problem. They should at once avoid any situation which they feel is bad for
them.

(c) Escape and run is also a good way to reduce some risks of women whenever they
encounter any problem. They should never go with any unknown person alone at unknown places.

(d) Women must understand and feel their physical power and use accordingly. They should
never feel weaker than men and take self-defence training.

(e) They should be careful while communicating with someone on internet in the cyberspace.

(f) Pepper spray can also be proved as a useful self-defence tool however it has a drawback
that some people cannot be harmed through it even after full-face spray.

(g) They must have all the emergency numbers with them and WhatsApp also if possible so
that they can immediately tell to their family members and police.

(h) Women should be very conscious while driving a car and going on any trip. They must lock
all the doors of the car while travelling with own or private car.

Safety Laws for Women in India

15. There is a list of safety laws for women in India working in the field to provide safety to the women
from all type of crimes against women. Some safety laws are Child Marriage Restraint Act 1929, Special
Marriage Act 1954, Hindu Marriage Act 1955, Hindu Widows Remarriage Act 1856, Indian Penal Code
1860, Dowry Prohibition Act 1961, Maternity Benefit Act 1861, Foreign Marriage Act 1969, Indian Divorce
Act 1969, Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act 1971, Christian Marriage Act 1872, Code of Criminal
Procedure 1973, Equal Remuneration Act 1976, Married Women’s Property Act 1874, Births, Deaths &
Marriages Registration Act 1886, Indecent Representation of Women (Prevention) Act 1986, Muslim
women (protection of rights on divorce) Act 1986, Commission of Sati (Prevention) Act 1987, National
Commission for Women Act 1990, Prohibition of Sex Selection Act 1994, Protection of Women from
Domestic Violence Act 2005, Prevention of Children from Sexual Offences Act 2012, Sexual Harassment
of Women at Work Place Act 2013, etc.
175

16. Another Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection of Children) Bill, 2015 has been passed replacing
the existing Indian juvenile delinquency law of 2000 (Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection of Children) Act,
2000). This act was passed by the Lok Sabha on 7th of May in 2015 and however, by the Rajya Sabha on
22nd of December in 2015. This act is passed to lower down the juvenile age from 18 to 16 years in cases
of heinous offense (especially after the release of Nirbhaya’s case accused juvenile).

Conclusion

17. We have a very large population of children in our country and many of them require protection of
various kinds. The Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act 2012, is an important milestone and it
is our moral responsibility that we educate our children about the act and the provisions enshrined in it.

18. Women safety is a big social issue which needs to be solved urgently by the effort of all. It is
inhibiting the growth and development of the country and most importantly hurting the half population of
the country in all aspects (physically, mentally, and socially).

SUMMARY

1. India is home to the largest child population in the world. Almost 42 per cent of its total population
is under eighteen years of age. The health and security of the country’s children is integral to any vision for
its progress and development. One of the issues marring the vision for the country’s children is the evil of
child sexual abuse. The Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act (POCSO) 2012 came into force
in November 2012 to deal with the problem.

2. Child abuse constitutes all forms of physical and / or emotional ill-treatment, sexual abuse, neglect
or negligent treatment or commercial or other exploitation, resulting in actual or potential harm to the child’s
health, survival, development or dignity. Child Abuse can be of following forms:-

(a) Physical Abuse.

(b) Emotional Abuse.
(c) Sexual Abuse
(d) Child Neglect.

3. There is a list of safety laws for women in India working in the field to provide safety to the women
from all type of crimes against women. Some safety laws are Child Marriage Restraint Act 1929, Special
Marriage Act 1954, Hindu Marriage Act 1955, Hindu Widows Remarriage Act 1856, Indian Penal Code
1860, Dowry Prohibition Act 1961, Maternity Benefit Act 1861, Foreign Marriage Act 1969, Indian Divorce
Act 1969, Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act 1971, Christian Marriage Act 1872, Code of Criminal
Procedure 1973, Equal Remuneration Act 1976, Married Women’s Property Act 1874, Births, Deaths &
Marriages Registration Act 1886, Indecent Representation of Women (Prevention) Act 1986, Muslim
women (protection of rights on divorce) Act 1986, Commission of Sati (Prevention) Act 1987, National
Commission for Women Act 1990, Prohibition of Sex Selection Act 1994, Protection of Women from
Domestic Violence Act 2005, Prevention of Children from Sexual Offences Act 2012, Sexual Harassment
of Women at Work Place Act 2013, etc.
179

CHAPTER SS - VI

NEW INITIATIVES
Introduction

1. In the new millennia India has been blessed with twin advantages, namely the demographic
dividend and availability of Information Communication Technology (ICT) to effect unparalleled
transformative change in the country. The ever-improving developments in ICT coupled with technologically
literate young people, India is able to leap-frog many of her development issues in one go. Governments
of the day are taking advantages of this opportunity through various new initiatives bringing in substantial
improvement in the social and economic condition of the masses. Few of these initiatives are as under:-

(a) Aadhar. For unique identity of citizens and its connectivity digitally.
(b) BHIM App. For fast, safe and trustworthy payments.
(c) Make in India. To encourage manufacturing in India.
(d) Start up India. For encouraging new businessmen.
(e) Skill India. For skill training schemes.
(f) Mudra Bank. Loan for entrepreneurs.

AADHAR

2. Aadhar is a Unique Identification Number issued by UIDAI to individuals for the purpose of
establishing unique identification of every single person. Aadhar is actually a 12-digit number and not a
card. The Unique Identification Authority of India (UIDAI) is the regulatory body for this.

Features of Aadhar

3. Aadhar has the following features which are peculiar to it:-

(a) Uniqueness. This is achieved through the process of demographic and biometric de-
duplication. The de-duplication process compares the resident’s demographic and biometric
information, collected during the process of enrolment, with the records in the UIDAI database to
verify if the resident is already in the database or not.

(b) Portability. Aadhaar gives nationwide portability as it can be authenticated anywhere

on-line. This is critical as millions of Indians migrate from one state to another or from rural area to
urban centers etc.

(c) Random Number. Aadhaar number is a random number devoid of any intelligence.
Person willing to enroll has to provide minimal demographic along with biometric information during
the enrolment process. The Aadhaar enrolment process does not capture details like caste,
religion, income, health, geography, etc.

(d) Scalable Technology Architecture. The UID architecture is open and scalable.
Resident’s data is stored centrally and authentication can be done online from anywhere in the
country. Aadhaar Authentication service is built to handle 100 million authentications a day.

(e) Open Source Technologies. Open source architecture precludes dependence on

specific computer hardware, specific storage, specific OS, specific database vendor, or any
specific vendor technologies to scale.

Why Aadhar Card is Becoming Important?

4. With the passage of time, importance of Aadhar card has greatly increased. In future, Aadhar
card will be mandatory to avail benefits of various government schemes and services. Few important uses
of Aadhar card in our basic living are as under:-

(a) LPG Subsidy through Aadhar. Government has started the PAHAL Scheme under
which the subsidy amount of LPG cylinder is directly transferred into the Aadhar number linked
180

bank account of the consumer. Absence of Aadhar card can deprive the consumer from availing
subsidy benefits on LPG cylinders.

(b) Aadhar card must for Passport. Government has also ordered that Aadhar card
is necessary for issuance of new passport. You can be denied of passport if you do not have your
Aadhar card with you.

(c) Aadhar is Digital ID Proof. Aadhar card will be identity proof of every individual in
future. Since the details of Aadhar card holder are kept at secure online servers, the bio-metrically
verified identity of an individual can be used to confirm the identity of its holder.

(d) Use Aadhar for new SIM Card. Aadhar card is necessary for purchasing new
SIM cards. With this you cannot buy a new SIM card without having Aadhar card.

(e) Aadhar Vital for Government Employees. There is a proposal to bring Aadhar card
into use to connect it with the attendance book of government employees.

5. Advantages/Benefits of Aadhar Card. Indian Government is planning to use Aadhar not

only for the identity but also for the various other important purposes. Some of the uses are:-

(a) In several places and all government departments various documentary proof is required,
but, the Aadhar will reduce the burden of many identity proofs.

(b) To open a ‘bank account’ or to operate a current account, now it’s mandatory to submit
your Aadhar Number, to your bank officials. So, RBI can easily find out all the bank accounts of a
person.

(c) Aadhar Number linked to a bank account will get LPG Subsidy directly to their bank
account.

(d) Under the Prime Minister’s ‘Jhan Dhan Yojana’, Aadhar is used as the main document as
evidence, to open a ‘bank account.’

(e) For various monetary transaction providing UIN detail, would be necessary, which reduce
the ‘black money’ transfer.

(f) Various types of duplication of data and fake identities created by frauds for a long time,
in India, for their individual benefits, can be stopped with the help of UIN.

BHIM APP

6. The indigenously developed payment app ‘BHIM’ (Bharat Interface for Money) has been named
after the main architect of Indian constitution, Dr Bhim Rao Ambedkar. BHIM is a biometric payment
system app using Aadhar platform, and is based on Unified Payment Interface (UPI) to facilitate e-
payments directly through bank. It stresses on the importance of technology and digital transactions. It
can be used on all mobile devices, be it a Smartphone or a feature phone with or without internet
connection. The payments through the new system (BHIM App) can be made by just a thumb impression
after the bank account is linked with Aadhar gateway. Indeed, the technology through BHIM will empower
poorest of the poor, small business and the marginalized sections. The app will minimize the role of plastic
cards and point of sale machines. The app will eliminate fee payments for service providers like
MasterCard and Visa, which has been a stumbling block in people switching to digital payments.

7. Advantages of BHIM app are:-

(a) The app can be used to send and receive money through smart phones.
(b) Money can also be sent to non-UPI supported banks.
(c) Bank balance can also be checked through the app.
(d) Currently Hindi and English are supported in the app, with more languages coming soon.
181

MAKE IN INDIA

8. Make in India scheme is a Government initiative to facilitate and augment the manufacturing
industry in India. In other words, it can also be said that this program is intended to increase the GDP of
the Indian economy. Besides promoting manufacturing and employment sector in the country it has set
wide array of targets which are meant to change the entire economy of the country positively.

9. This program has a wide scope, associated with different sectors of the economic environment of
the country. It is specifically designed to promote the enlisted or targeted, 25 different sectors, which were
badly in a need of such reforms. It is intended and approved to facilitate the foreign direct investment and
domestic companies in manufacturing their products in the Indian vicinity.

10. The initiative is built on four pillars which are as follows:

(a) New Processes. The government is introducing several reforms to create

possibilities for getting Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and foster business partnerships. Some
initiatives have already been undertaken to alleviate the business environment from outdated
policies and regulations. This reform is also aligned with parameters of World Bank’s ‘Ease of
Doing Business’ index to improve India’s ranking on it.

(b) New Infrastructure. Infrastructure is integral to the growth of any industry. The
government intends to develop industrial corridors and build smart cities with state-of-the-art
technology and high-speed communication. Innovation and research activities are supported by
a fast-paced registration system and improved infrastructure for Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
registrations. Along with the development of infrastructure, the training for the skilled workforce
for the sectors is also being addressed.

(c) New Sectors. ‘Make in India’ has identified 25 sectors to promote with the detailed
information being shared through an interactive web-portal. The Government has allowed 100%
FDI in Railway, Construction, Defence and Pharmaceutical.

(d) New Mindset. Government in India has always been seen as a regulator and not a
facilitator. This initiative intends to change this by bringing a paradigm shift in the way Government
interacts with various industries. It will focus on acting as a partner in the economic development
of the country alongside the corporate sector.

11. Major initiatives, policy changes and a slew of reforms have put India on the global industrial map
as one of the fastest growing economies as well as one of the most attractive investment destinations in
the world due to following advantages:-

(a) Fastest Growing Economy.

(b) Demographic Advantage. With 356 million 10-24 year-olds, India has the world’s
largest youth population.
(c) Favourable Policies. Major FDI policy reforms have been made in a number of sectors,
such as defense, construction development, pensions, broadcasting, pharmaceutical and civil
aviation

12. Key features of the Programme:-

(a) Facilitate foreign direct investment and production of goods in India by Indian and foreign
companies in India.
(b) Increased demand for employment in various sectors.
(c) Attract foreign currency to be invested in the Indian industrial sectors.
(d) Create a demand of skilled people in specific sectors.
(e) It aims to ease doing business in India. It has far more potential to take India ahead of the
present ranking.
182

START UP INDIA

13. Start-up India Campaign of Government of India intends to promote bank financing for start-up
ventures, to increase entrepreneurship and encourage start-ups with jobs creation. It will restrict the role
of States in policy domain and to get rid of "license raj" and interruptions like land permissions, foreign
investment proposal, environmental clearances etc. A Start-Up is defined as an entity that is
headquartered in India which was opened less than five years ago and have an annual turnover less than
Rs 25 crore. The government has already launched the MUDRA Bank, a new institution set up for
development and refinancing activities relating to micro units with a refinance Fund of Rs 200 billion.

14. The Stand-up India Initiative is also planned and run concurrently with Start-up India intended to
encourage entrepreneurship among SCs/STs and women communities. Start-up India will be a flagship
initiative of the Government of India to develop a strong eco-system for fostering innovation and Start-ups
in the country that will drive sustainable economic progress and generate huge employment opportunities.
The government through this initiative aims to empower Start-ups to grow through modernization and
design. The main features of Start-up India campaign are as follows:-

(a) Single Window Clearance even with the help of a mobile application.
(b) 10,000 crore INR of funds.
(c) 80% reduction in patent registration fee.
(d) Modified and friendlier Bankruptcy Code to ensure 90-day exit window.
(e) Eliminating red tape.
(f) Self-certification compliance.
(g) Encourage entrepreneurship.

SKILL INDIA

15. Skill India is a campaign launched by the Government on 15 July 2015 which aims to train over 40
crore (400 million) people in India in different skills by 2022. It includes various initiatives of the
government like "National Skill Development Mission", "National Policy for Skill Development and
Entrepreneurship, 2015", "Pradhan Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana (PMKVY)" and the "Skill Loan scheme".

16. Objectives of ‘Skill India’. The main goal is to create opportunities, space and scope for the
development of the talents of the Indian youth and to develop more of those sectors which have already
been put under skill development for the last so many years and also to identify new sectors for skill
development. The new programme aims at providing training and skill development to 500 million youth of
our country by the year 2020, covering each and every village.

17. Features of ‘Skill India’.

(a) The emphasis is to skill the youths in such a way so that they get employment and also
improve entrepreneurship.

(b) Provides training, Support and guidance for all occupations that were of traditional type
like carpenters, cobblers, welders, blacksmiths, masons, nurses, tailors, weavers etc.

(c) More emphasis will be given on new areas like real estate, construction, transportation,
textile, gem industry, jewellery designing, banking tourism and various other sectors, where skill
development is inadequate or nil.

(d) Tailor-made, need-based programmes would be initiated for specific age groups which can
be like language and communication skills, life and positive thinking skills, personality development
skill, management skills, behavioral skills, including job and employability skills.

(e) The course methodology of ‘Skill India’ would be innovative, which would include games,
group discussion, brainstorming sessions, practical experiences, case studies etc.
183

18. Advantages of Skill India.

(a) Raise confidence, improve productivity and give direction through proper skill
development.

(b) Skill development will enable the youths to get blue-collar jobs.

(c) Developments of skills, at a young age, right at the school level, is very essential to
channelize them for proper job opportunities.

(d) Every job aspirant would be given training in soft skills to lead a proper and decent life.
Skill development would reach the rural and remote areas also.

(e) Corporate educational institutions, non-government organizations Government, academic

institution and society would help in the development of skills of the youths so that better results
are achieved in the shortest time possible.

MUDRA BANK

19. Micro Units Development and Refinance Agency Bank (or MUDRA Bank) is a public sector
financial institution in India. It provides loans at low rates to micro-finance institutions and non-banking
financial institutions which then provide credit to MSMEs - Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises.

20. Objective of Mudra Bank.

(a) The main aim of the Mudra Bank programme is regulate the lending and borrowing
activities in the microfinance setup of India and thus make it stable to a certain extent.

(b) These organizations primarily cater to small business units, self-help groups, retailers and
individual entrepreneurs.

(c) The initiative aims to provide crediting services and financial support to those microfinance
entities that are functioning across the country.

21. Products and Offerings.

(a) The Mudra Bank will provide three kinds of loans – Shishu, Tarun and Kishore.

(b) Shishu loans are basically for the ones who are just starting out their businesses the
maximum amount that will be lent under Shishu loan is Rs. 50,000.

(c) Kishore loans are for those who are in the middle stage of their business endeavours For
Kishore loan, the upper limit is Rs. 5 lakhs.

(d) Tarun loans are for those who are looking to move on to higher levels, such as doing
business expansion. Tarun loan, the maximum amount has been fixed at Rs. 10 lakhs.

(e) The bank will determine which loan applicant falls under particular category and the loans
will be provided in accordance to that.

22. Benefits of Mudra Bank.

(a) The biggest potential advantage of the Mudra Bank programme is that it can help a large
number of countless entrepreneurs across the country by providing financial support, which is such
an important component in their existence and eventual success.

(b) With its focus on the underprivileged section of the Indian economic hierarchy, Mudra Bank
may one day replicate what Grameen Bank has done in Bangladesh.
184

Conclusion

23. The new development initiatives undertaken by Government of India will definitely propel India to a
higher developmental pedestal if executed properly. The government, the industries, banks, various other
agencies and common man especially youth will have to work in collaboration to make these initiatives a great
success.

SUMMARY

1. Few of the Government Initiatives are as under:-

(a) Aadhar. For unique identity of citizens and its connectivity digitally.
(b) BHIM App. For fast, safe and trustworthy payments.
(c) Make in India. To encourage manufacturing in India.
(d) Start up India. For encouraging new businessmen.
(e) Skill India. For skill training schemes.
(f) Mudra Bank. Loan for entrepreneurs.

2. Aadhar is a Unique Identification Number issued by UIDAI to individuals for the purpose of
establishing unique identification of every single person. Aadhar is actually a 12-digit number and not a
card. The Unique Identification Authority of India (UIDAI) is the regulatory body for this. Aadhar is meant
for individuals of any age (including children) for the purpose of establishing identities. Since Aadhar is
for only individuals, it is different for all the members of a family. For deciding uniqueness of every
individual, the demographic details (residence address information) of the person and his/her biometric
information (photograph, iris-scan, fingerprints) is collected which is stored in a centralized database.

3. BHIM is a biometric payment system app using Aadhar platform, and is based on Unified Payment
Interface (UPI) to facilitate e-payments directly through bank. It stresses on the importance of technology
and digital transactions. It can be used on all mobile devices, be it a Smartphone or a feature phone with
or without internet connection. The payments through the new system (BHIM App) can be made by just
a thumb impression after the bank account is linked with Aadhar gateway.

4. Make in India scheme is a Government initiative to facilitate and augment the manufacturing
industry in India. In other words, it can also be said that this program is intended to increase the GDP of
the Indian economy. Besides promoting manufacturing and employment sector in the country it has set
wide array of targets which are meant to change the entire economy of the country positively.

5. Start-up India Campaign of Government of India intends to promote bank financing for start-up
ventures, to increase entrepreneurship and encourage start-ups with jobs creation. It will restrict the role
of States in policy domain and to get rid of "license raj" and interruptions like land permissions, foreign
investment proposal, environmental clearances etc. The Stand-up India Initiative is also planned and run
concurrently with Start-up India intended to encourage entrepreneurship among SCs/STs and women
communities. Start-up India will be a flagship initiative of the Government of India to develop a strong
eco-system for fostering innovation and Start-ups in the country that will drive sustainable economic
progress and generate huge employment opportunities.

6. Skill India is a campaign launched by the Government on 15 July 2015 which aims to train over
40 crore (400 million) people in India in different skills by 2022. The main goal is to create opportunities,
space and scope for the development of the talents of the Indian youth and to develop more of those
sectors which have already been put under skill development for the last so many years and also to
identify new sectors for skill development. The new programme aims at providing training and skill
development to 500 million youth of our country by the year 2020, covering each and every village.

7. Micro Units Development and Refinance Agency Bank (or MUDRA Bank) is a public sector
financial institution in India. It provides loans at low rates to micro-finance institutions and non-banking
financial institutions which then provide credit to MSMEs - Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises.
185

CHAPTER SS - VII

CYBER AND MOBILE SECURITY

CYBER SECURITY

Definition

1. Cyber security refers to the body of technologies, processes, and practices designed to protect
networks, devices, programs, and data from attack, damage, or unauthorized access. Cyber security may
also be referred to as information technology security. Cyber Security is all about protecting your devices
and network from unauthorized access or modification. The Internet is not only the chief source of
information, but it is also a medium through which people do business.

2. Types of Cyber Security. Cyber Security is classified into the following types:

(a) Information Security. Information security aims to protect the users’ private information
from unauthorized access, identity theft. It protects the privacy of data and hardware that handle,
store and transmit that data.

(b) Network Security. Network security aims to protect the usability, integrity, and safety
of a network, associated components, and data shared over the network. When a network is
secured, potential threats gets blocked from entering or spreading on that network.

(c) Application Security. Application security aims to protect software applications from
vulnerabilities that occur due to the flaws in application design, development, installation, and
upgrade or maintenance phases.

3. Types of Threats. There are many different types of cybersecurity threats, some of the most
common types of threats are listed below,

(a) Viruses. Viruses are a type of malware programs that are specially designed to
cause damage to the victims’ computer. Viruses can self-replicate under the right conditions and
can infect a computer system without the permission or knowledge of the user. It has two major
characteristics, the ability to replicate itself and the ability to attach itself to another computer file.
A virus has the capability to corrupt files and steal private information like credit card details of the
user and send them back to the hacker. Viruses cannot exist on its own, i.e., without a host
program; it is usually present as a parasite on another program.

(b) Password Attacks. It is a type of cyber security threat which involves a hacking
attempt by hackers to crack the passwords of the user. With the help of a hacking tool, hackers
may enter many passwords a second to crack the victim’s account credentials and gain access.
Hackers may also perform password attacks on a computer login screen to gain access to a
victim’s computer and the data stored in it.

(b) Spyware and Keyloggers. Malware such as the spyware can spy on computing
habits of the victims. Some malware such as the keyloggers can record the victims’ keystrokes
including their passwords, PIN numbers, and credit card details. Keyloggers and spyware
programs enter the victims’ system when they download and install seemingly benign software
from a dubious website.

(c) Adware. Adware is a group of malwares that is known to generate these pop-ups. If a
user notices strange pop-up messages on their computer screen, it is most likely to be a malware
attack. The main intention of adware is to gain permissions that will then allow them to install
additional malicious software. If the user downloads that additional software, it may then either
delete or steal your data. Some of these pop-up messages can also be used to simply bombard
your computer screen with unwanted information such as advertisements.

(d) Trojans. Trojans are a type of malware programs that disguise themselves as harmless
or useful software. Trojans can cause a variety of malicious activities on the victims’ computer
186

including downloading malicious programs, deleting or stealing files and providing hackers
unauthorized access to the victims’ computer.

(e) Ransomware. Ransomware is a group of malwares which locks or encrypts the victim’s
computer and demands payment for decrypting the computer. The primary motive for all
ransomware attacks is always monetary. Unlike many other types of cyber-attacks, ransomware
attacks notify the victim about the exploit, and it also gives instructions on how to recover from it
(usually it demands payment for recovery). To avoid a crackdown by law enforcement, hackers
who are behind the ransomware attacks typically demand payments in virtual currencies, such as
the Bitcoins.

4. Challenges. For an effective cyber security, an organization needs to coordinate its efforts
throughout its entire information system. Elements of cyber encompass all of the following:

(a) Network security

(b) Application security
(c) Endpoint security
(d) Data security
(e) Identity management
(f) Database and infrastructure security
(g) Cloud security
(h) Mobile security
(i) Disaster recovery/business continuity planning
(j) End-user education

MOBILE SECURITY

5. Introduction. There are three prime targets for attackers for mobile devices:

(a) Data. Smartphones are devices for data management, and may contain sensitive data
like credit card numbers, authentication information, private information, activity logs (calendar, call
logs);
(b) Identity. Smartphones are highly customizable, so the device or its contents can
easily be associated with a specific person. For example, every mobile device can transmit
information related to the owner of the mobile phone contract, and an attacker may want to steal
the identity of the owner of a smartphone to commit other offenses;
(c) Availability. Attacking a smartphone can limit access to it and deprive the owner of its
use.

6. User awareness. Much malicious behavior is allowed by the carelessness of the user.
Smartphone users were found to ignore security messages during application installation, especially during
application selection, checking application reputation, reviews and security and agreement messages.
From simply not leaving the device without a password, to precise control of permissions granted to
applications added to the smartphone, the user has a large responsibility in the cycle of security: to not be
the vector of intrusion. This precaution is especially important if the user is an employee of a company that
stores business data on the device. Detailed below are some precautions that a user can take to manage
security on a smartphone.

7. Being sceptical. A user should not believe everything that may be presented, as some
information may be phishing or attempting to distribute a malicious application. It is therefore advisable to
check the reputation of the application that they want to buy before actually installing it.

8. Permissions given to applications. The mass distribution of applications is accompanied by

the establishment of different permissions mechanisms for each operating system. It is necessary to clarify
these permissions mechanisms to users, as they differ from one system to another, and are not always
easy to understand. In addition, it is rarely possible to modify a set of permissions requested by an
application if the number of permissions is too great. But this last point is a source of risk because a user
can grant rights to an application, far beyond the rights it needs.
187

9. Be careful. Protection of a user’s phone through simple gestures and precautions, such as
locking the smartphone when it is not in use, not leaving their device unattended, not trusting applications,
not storing sensitive data, or encrypting sensitive data that cannot be separated from the device.

10. Disconnect peripheral devices that are not in use. NIST Guidelines for Managing the
Security of Mobile Devices 2013, recommends: Restrict user and application access to hardware, such as
the digital camera, GPS, Bluetooth interface, USB interface, and removable storage.

11. Enable Android Device Encryption. Latest Android Smartphones come with an inbuilt
encryption setting for securing all the information saved on your device. It makes it difficult for a hacker to
extract and decipher the information in case your device is compromised.

Precautions

12. These precautions are measures that leave no easy solution to the intrusion of people or malicious
applications in a smartphone. If users are careful, many attacks can be defeated, especially phishing and
applications seeking only to obtain rights on a device. Here are some practical steps that will help you
minimize the exposure of your mobile device to digital threats.

(a) Use strong passwords/biometrics. Strong passwords coupled with biometric

features, such as fingerprint authenticators, make unauthorized access nearly impossible. Your
passwords should be eight or more characters long and contain alphanumeric characters.

(b) Ensure public or free Wi-Fi is protected. Everybody loves free Wi-Fi, especially
when the data plan is inexpensive. But cheap can turn expensive in a very devastating manner.
That’s because most of the free Wi-Fi points are not encrypted. These open networks allow
malicious people to eavesdrop on the network traffic and easily get your passwords, usernames
and other sensitive information. To protect against Wi-Fi hacking, use applications that secure
your connection or at least tell you the status of the Wi-Fi to which you are connected.

(c) Utilize VPN. If you’re not sure about the security status of the network to which you’re
connected, using VPN (Virtual Private Network) client is mandatory. A VPN will enable you to
connect to a network securely. At the same time, any browsing activity you do on the public Wi-
Fi will be shielded from prying eyes. It is also useful when accessing sites that are less secure.
You really need to have a new mindset when it comes to fighting cybercrime.

(d) Encrypt your device. Most mobile devices are bundled with a built-in encryption
feature. Encryption is the process of making data unreadable. Decryption is converting the
unreadable data into normal data. This is important in case of theft, and it prevents unauthorized
access. You simply need to locate this feature on your mobile device and enter a password to
encrypt your device.

(e) Install an Antivirus application. The files you download and the apps you install
on your mobile device might be packed with malicious code. Once launched, this code could send
your data to hackers, thereby making you unsecured and robbing you of your privacy. To avoid
that, installing a reputable antivirus application will guarantee your security. Some antivirus
applications also offer more functionalities, such as erasing your data if you lose your mobile
device, tracking and blocking unknown callers who might be a threat, and telling you which
applications are not safe.

(f) Update to the latest software. Your mobile device firmware might also be vulnerable
to security threats. New loopholes might be exploited leaving your device open to threats, to avoid
that, always update your firmware/device.

13. Other things to consider.

(a) Avoid turning on autofill. Some websites and applications will automatically fill in
your username when you visit them. This is due to the autofill feature. Turn it off as soon as
possible.
188

(b) Log out. After using mobile applications, especially those that are linked to one
another, such as google applications, ensure that you log off each time you are done using them.

(c) Use only trusted stores. You should download apps from secure stores, such as
Apple’s App Store. This depends on the platform your mobile device uses.

Conclusion

14. Making your mobile device secure is not an easy task, but it should be your first priority. As there
are new vulnerabilities found every day, it’s important to make sure that you are aware of any suspicious
activity that occurs on your device.

SUMMARY

1. Cyber security refers to the body of technologies, processes, and practices designed to protect
networks, devices, programs, and data from attack, damage, or unauthorized access. Cyber security may
also be referred to as information technology security. Cyber Security is all about protecting your devices
and network from unauthorized access or modification.

2. There are many different types of cybersecurity threats, some of the most common types of threats
are listed below:-
(a) Viruses
(b) Password Attacks.
(b) Spyware and Keyloggers.
(c) Adware.
(d) Trojans.
(e) Ransomware.

3. There are three prime targets for attackers for mobile devices: -

(a) Data.
(b) Identity.
(c) Availability.

4. Here are some practical steps that will help you minimize the exposure of your mobile device to
digital threats:-

(a) Use strong passwords/biometrics.

(b) Ensure public or free Wi-Fi is protected.
(c) Utilize VPN
(d) Encrypt your device
(e) Install an Antivirus application.
(f) Update to the latest software.
(g) Avoid turning on autofill.
(h) Log out.
(j) Use only trusted stores.
202

CHAPTER HH - III

INTRODUCTION TO YOGA

Introduction

1. Yoga is a commonly known activity for physical, mental, and spiritual disciplines which originated
in ancient India. One of the most detailed and thorough expositions on the subject are the Yog Sutras of
Patanjali. Various traditions of yoga are found in Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism and Sikhism. UNO has
declared 21 June as the International Day of yoga. NCC is practising, propagating and celebrating this in
a big way every year.

Definition and Purpose of Yoga

2. Definition. The concepts and practices of Yoga originated in India about several thousand
years ago. Its founders were great Saints and Sages. The great Yogis presented rational interpretation of
their experiences of Yoga and brought about a practical and scientifically sound method within everyone’s
reach. Yoga today is no longer restricted to hermits, saints and sages; it has entered into our everyday
lives and has aroused a worldwide awakening and acceptance in the last few decades. The science of
Yoga and its techniques have been reoriented to suit modern sociological needs and lifestyles. Experts
of various branches of medicine including modern medical sciences are realizing the role of these
techniques in the prevention and mitigation of diseases and promotion of health.

Purpose

3. Yoga is a disciplined method utilized for attaining a goal. In the sense the physical postures of yoga
are to alleviate health problems, reduce stress and make the spine supple. Yoga is also used as a complete
exercise program and physical therapy routine.

4. The characteristics of Yoga are given below:-

(a) The Yogic system of health involves the exercise of skeletal as well as the deep-seated
smooth muscles of the body.

(b) The intra-thoracic and intra-abdominal pressure may be mentioned as special

characteristics of the yoga system of health.

(c) Little expenditure of energy and money is involved in the Yoga practices.

(d) The rich as well as poor, and men and women of all ages can practice Yogic practices.

(e) Every school of Yoga emphasized specific practices, but their aim always remained the
same; but the highest level of integration through the control of the modification of mind.

(f) The nature of Yogic practices is psycho-neurophysical.

(g) All yogic practices are complementary.

Asanas

5. There are innumerable asanas. Some of the asanas useful for curing ailments and for maintaining
good health are as follows:-

(a) Padmasana. Sit on the asan. Spread the leg forward, place your
left foot on the join of your right thigh, and right foot on the joint of left thigh
in such a way that both heels touch each other below your navel in the
middle of abdomen. Place your hands on your knees. Keep the head and
spinal column erect. Keep your eyes close or open. Stay in the final
position for 1-2 minutes in the initial stage. Later increase the time
203

gradually. This asan is useful for Jaap, Dhyana and Samadhi. This asan also helps in curing
diseases like asthama, hysteria and insomnia.

(b) Siddhasana. The main function of this asana is to

awaken the power of Kundalini. Sit on the carpet. Place the
heel of left foot under the testis on the prostrate gland in such a
way, that the sole of your foot should be placed at root of genitals.
Place the hand on the knees so that palm face upward. This
asana helps the mind to be firm, attentive and alert.

(c) Gyan Mudra. Sit in Padmasana or siddhasana. Put your Hands

on your knees with palm facing upwards. Bend your index finger and place
them at the root of your thumbs. Spread the remaining three fingers forward,
all joined together. This asana is most suitable for pranayam and dhyana.

(d) Suryanamaskara. Suryanamaskara is a combined sequence of

12 positions. By this sequence of 12 positions, the whole body is well exercised. While practicing
Suryanamaskara recite the different names of Sun god at each position.

(i) Stage 1:- Stand in attention. Fold your hands in the centre of your chest. Now
recite the first of the twelve mantras.

(ii) Stage 2:- Stretch your hands up and take the body backwards from the waist as
far as possible. The hands must remain straight and touch your ears.

(iii) Stage 3:- Now bend down without bending the knees. Try to put the palms
on the ground and touch the nose with knees without bending knees.

(iv) Stage 4:- Take left leg back. Bend your right knee, the knee will remain between
the two arms, with the hands sticking to the ground, Now bend the neck backward as far
as possible. Look forward and hold the breath.

(v) State 5:- Take right leg back. Put both the toes and the knees together and pull
your body up in such a way that it looks like inverted ‘V’. Look backward through your legs
keeping the head, the waist and the arms in a straight line.

(vi) State 6:- Bend down

your body in such a way that
your forehead, chest and
knees should touch the
ground except your hips
which should be slightly
raised from the ground.

(vii) State 7:- Stretch the

arms, Inhale, put the chest
forward and move back your
neck as much as you can.
Look up and hold the breath.

(viii) State 8:-

Maintain same position as in
Stage 5.
(ix) Stage 9:-
Maintain same position as in
Stage 4.
204

(x) Stage 10:- Maintain same position as in Stage 3.

(xi) Stage 11:- Maintain same position as in stage 2.
(xii) Stage 12:- Maintain same position as in Stage 1 and then take your hand down.
Make the rest posture.

(e) Shavasana. The main aim of this

asana is releasing the mind from the body. By
this asana we can achieve relaxation in the
shortest possible time. This asana provides
relief in disease like blood pressure, weakness
of nerves and other ailments. Lie on your back and let your body be relaxed completely. Your
feet should be 30-45 cm apart, arms in sides with palm upwards, eyes gently closed with attention
on breathing. Keep body in a straight position. For proper blood circulation in the body, the legs,
hand and neck should have no curves or bend. Take a long and deep breath then concentrate on
each and every part of your body, putting it in a relaxed state Timing 5-10 minutes.

(f) Vajrasana. Bend the legs and sit on

knees. Place the heels at the sides of the anus in
such a way that thighs rest on the legs and the
buttock rest on the heels. Stretch the arms and
place the hands on the knees. Keep the knees close
by. Sit erect. This asana can be done immediately
after eating food. This helps digestion and
eliminates gas troubles. Timing 1-3 minutes.

(g) Dhanurasana. Lie down on

the chest, legs should be folded at the
knees and the feet should be grasped
with both the hands near the ankles.
The thighs and the chest should be
raised, making the body appear like a
bow. This asana provides good
exercise to the abdominal muscles,
lower back and thighs, Timing 10-30
seconds, 4-5 times.

(h) Chakrasana. Lie down on the back.

Bend the legs at the knees. Heels are close to
the hips and sole touching the ground. Bend
the arms at the elbows and place them on the
ground on either side of the head. Place them
in such a way that palms should rest on the
ground and the direction of the fingers should
be towards your feet. First raise your hips and
waist, keeping the legs straight. Raise the back as far as possible. This asana helps in making the
spine supple. Timing ½ -1 min, 1-2 times.
205

(n) Sarvangasana. Lie down flat on the

back. Raise legs from the hips, push the trunk
up until legs are in vertical position. The chin
should press against the chest. The hands
are giving support to lower ribs. Hold this
position up to 2-10 minutes. Come back as
slowly as possible. Do not give any jerks to
the body. This asana improves circulatory,
respiratory and alimentary systems of the
body. Timings: ½ -1 minute.

(o) Halasana. Lie down flat on the back. Place the arms
by sides along the hips, palm facing the ground. The legs are
raised up in a single motion and put down behind the head
keeping knees unbent. The chin should touch the chest. In this
exercise, the legs will remain straight and breathing should be
normal. Hold this position for 30-50 seconds. This asana
stimulates blood circulation and makes the spine flexible and
elastic.

Conclusion

6. Yoga is a subject which can be looked at intellectually and some useful and beneficial ideas
imbibed. Yoga can be imbibed by adopting certain attitudes which alter the nature of the samskaras. Yoga
can be imbibed by living in an ashram environment and trying to be aware of the physical, mental and
spiritual dimensions at the same time. Yoga can be learnt in a classroom environment as science, as
psychology, as an applied subject, with the aim of providing new understanding and insight into the life
process, into areas where karmas are performed, into areas which shape the inner being in terms of
awareness, inner development, the experience of harmony or balance, eventually culminating in the
experience of samadhi and the fullness of wisdom, prajna.

SUMMARY

1. Yoga is a commonly known activity for physical, mental, and spiritual disciplines which originated
in ancient India. One of the most detailed and thorough expositions on the subject are the Yog Sutras of
Patanjali. The concepts and practices of Yoga originated in India about several thousand years ago. Its
founders were great Saints and Sages. The great Yogis presented rational interpretation of their
experiences of Yoga and brought about a practical and scientifically sound method within everyone’s
reach.

2. The characteristics of Yoga are given below:-

(a) The Yogic system of health involves the exercise of skeletal as well as the deep-seated
smooth muscles of the body.
(b) The intra-thoracic and intra-abdominal pressure may be mentioned as special
characteristics of the yoga system of health.
(c) Little expenditure of energy and money is involved in the Yoga practices.
(d) The rich as well as poor, and men and women of all ages can practice Yogic practices.

(e) Every school of Yoga emphasized specific practices, but their aim always remained the
same; but the highest level of integration through the control of the modification of mind.
(f) The nature of Yogic practices is psycho-neurophysical.
(g) All yogic practices are complementary.
211

CHAPTER EA - I

WATER AND ENERGY CONSERVATION

WATER CONSERVATION

1. Introduction. Water is a very important and precious resource for life. Water Conservation
covers policies, strategies and activities to manage fresh water as a sustainable resource, to protect the
water environment and to meet current and future human demands. Population growth, household size
effect the quantity of water that is consumed. Factors such as climate change will increase pressures on
natural water resources, especially in manufacturing and agricultural irrigation. Water is fast becoming
insufficient due to increase in population, industries and agricultural activities and due to poor rainfall.

2. Ways to Conserve Water Indoors. The best place to start Water Conservation is one’s own
house. Certain measures which can be adopted at home are:-

(a) Ensure that there are no leaks in your house, in the pipelines, taps and toilets.
(b) Use water efficient flushes and if possible, toilets with dual flushing systems.
(c) Close taps while brushing your teeth, shaving or soaping your face.
(d) Use water from washing of clothes for cleaning floors.
(e) Use appropriate amount of detergent for washing clothes.
(f) Close the shower tap while soaping your body.
(g) While washing the dishes by hand, don’t let the water run while rinsing. Fill one sink with
wash water and the other with rinse water.
(h) Monitor your water bill for unusually high use. Your bill and water meter are tools that can
help you discover leaks.
(i) Water your lawn and garden in the morning or evening when temperature is cooler to
minimize evaporation
(j) Never throw the water unnecessary on roads which can be used for gardening and
cleaning.
(k) Avoid unnecessary flushing the toilets. Dispose off the tissues, cigarettes and other waste
into the bin instead of toilets.
(l) Use minimum amount of water to bathe.
(m) Do not leave the tap running while washing the dishes in the kitchen.
(n) Install small shower heads to reduce the flow of water.

Other Practices for Water Conservation

3. Water Conservation Practices for Water Utilities. Common practices used by water supply
utilities include metering, leak detection, repairing water lines, well capping, retrofitting programs, pricing,
waste-water reuse and developing public education programs and drought management plans.

4. Agricultural Water Conservation Practices. Practices such as drip irrigation can save large
quantities of water. Careful and judicious use of water for irrigation can lead to irrigating much more land.
212

5. Industrial and Commercial Water Conservation Practices. Industries could save large
amounts of water by installing water recycling systems. Cooling Water Recirculation and Wash Water
Recycling are the most widely used water recycling practices.

6. Additional Methods to initiate Water Conservation would include, public awareness programmes,
nukkad natak and community dramas and water audits. Rainwater harvesting is one of the most
successful techniques being used in India.

Rain Water Harvesting

7. The term rainwater harvesting is being frequently used these days; however, the concept of water
harvesting is not new for India. Water harvesting techniques had been evolved and developed centuries
ago. Rainwater harvesting means capturing the runoff of the rainwater in our own house, village, town or
city. It basically means accumulation and storage of rainwater for reuse, before it reaches the aquifer.
Utilization includes water for garden, livestock, irrigation, etc. In many places, the water collected is just
redirected to a deep pit with percolation. The harvested water can be used for drinking water also, if the
storage is a tank that can be accessed and cleaned when needed.

8. Why Harvest Rain water.

(a) To arrest ground water decline and augment ground water table
(b) To beneficiate water quality in aquifers
(c) To conserve surface water runoff during monsoon
(d) To reduce soil erosion
(e) To inculcate a culture of water conservation

9. Need for Rainwater Harvesting. India is in a state of water crisis, both in rural and urban
areas. Floods and droughts go hand in hand in our country, which causes water shortage. Rainwater is a
pure form of water if stored properly and can greatly reduce the pressures on treated water supply.
Rainwater harvesting is therefore extremely essential for the following reasons: -

(a) It helps to recharge sub soil and groundwater thus increasing the level of the water.
(b) It helps to create large quantity of pollution free clean water that can be stored in huge tanks
or ponds for use later on. In cities, it reduces the dependency on treated water supply to a great
extant.
(c) It ensures ready supply of water on the land surface thereby reducing dependence on the
ground water.

10. Types of Rainwater Harvesting Systems. There are a number of ways to harvest rainwater,
ranging from very simple to the complex industrial systems. Generally, rainwater is either harvested from
the ground or from a roof. The rate at which water can be collected from either system is dependent on
the plan area of the system, its efficiency and the intensity of rainfall.

(a) Ground Catchment Systems. Channelize water from a prepared catchment area into a
storage system. Generally, this method is only considered in areas, where rainwater is very rare
and other sources of water are not available. They are more suited to small communities than
individual families. If properly designed, ground catchments can collect large quantities of
rainwater. This method is ideally suitable for villages in rural India.

(b) Roof Catchment Systems. Roof catchment systems channelize rainwater that falls
onto a roof, into a storage tank via a system of pipes. The first flush of rainwater after a dry season,
should be allowed to run to waste as, it will be impure with dust, bird droppings etc. Rain Water
from the subsequent showers can be harvested. Roofs and pipes should have sufficient incline
to avoid standing water. They must be strong enough and large enough to carry peak flows.
Storage tanks should be covered to prevent mosquito breeding and to reduce evaporation losses,
contamination and algae growth. Rainwater harvesting systems require regular maintenance and
cleaning, to keep the system hygienic and in good working order. This method is most suited for
towns and cities.
213

(c) Sub Surface Dyke. Subsurface dyke is a barrier impermeable to water, placed
underground to control the groundwater flow in an aquifer, and to increase the ground water level.
It is also known as ground water dams. Example, the subsurface dyke at Krishi Vigyan Kendra,
Kannur under Kerala Agricultural University with the support of ICAR, has become an effective
method for ground water conservation by means of rain water harvesting technologies. The dyke
is now the largest rainwater harvesting system in that region.

11. Groundwater Recharge. Rainwater may also be used to recharge groundwater where the
runoff on the ground is collected and allowed to be absorbed, adding to the groundwater. In India this
includes Bawdis and Johads, or Ponds which collect the run-off from small streams in a wide area. In
India, reservoirs called tank as were used to store water; typically, they were shallow with mud walls.
Ancient tank as still exists in some places.

12. Advantages in Urban Areas. Rainwater harvesting in urban areas can have manifold advantages.
Some of the reasons why rainwater harvesting can be adopted in cities are to provide supplemental water
for the city’s requirements, to increase soil moisture levels for urban greenery to increase the ground water
table through artificial recharge, to mitigate urban flooding and to improve the quality of groundwater. In
urban areas of the developed world, at a household level, harvested rainwater can be used for flushing
toilets, washing laundry, showering or bathing. It may however require some treatment before it can be
used for drinking.
ENERGY CONSERVATION

Introduction

13. “ENERGY” means any form of energy derived from fossil fuels, nuclear substances or materials,
hydro-electricity and includes electrical energy or electricity generated from renewable sources of energy
or bio-mass connected to the grid. Energy conservation refers to various ways and methods of reducing
energy consumption by economizing on the use of a particular source of energy.

14. Energy conservation is the management of processes and policies, designed to reduce energy
usage. Energy conservation can be achieved only by reducing consumption of energy by, either
preventing wasteful use of energy or by using energy efficient products.

15. Energy Conservation Measures. An Energy conservation measure (ECM) is any type of
project conducted, or technology implemented, to reduce the consumption of energy in a building. The
types of projects implemented can be in a variety of forms but usually are designed to reduce utility costs:
water, electricity and gas being the main three for industrial and commercial enterprises. The aim of an
ECM should be to achieve a savings, reducing the amount of energy used by a particular process,
technology or facility.

(a) Energy Saving Building Designs. Construction of industrial / domestic buildings

with energy efficient designs, to reduce the consumption of electricity on air conditioning, lighting
and proper ventilation.

(b) Use of Energy Efficient Equipment / Implements. Use of energy efficient

equipment /gadgets like ACs, Heaters, Tube lights, CFLs & LEDs, Frost Free Refrigerators,
Distribution Transformers, Induction Motors, Direct Cool Refrigerator, Geysers, Ceiling Fans, TVs
/ LCDs, Agricultural Pump Sets, LPG Stoves and Washing Machines etc. contribute immensely in
reducing the consumption of electricity. Use of solar lighting / heating gadgets also contributes
towards saving large quantity of electricity.

(c) Public Lighting. This is a large consumer of electricity. Hence, energy saving /
efficient equipment like CFLs, Halogen Lamps, Distributors and Solar Lighting must be used in a
big way to conserve electricity.

(d) Usage Habits. Everyone must be passionate about preventing wasteful use of
electricity. Strict measures should be enforced to switch off all lights which are not required during
day or at night at homes, offices or public places.
214

(e) Public Transport System. Efficient, speedy and reliable public transport system with
fuel efficient vehicles must be employed. This can reduce a large burden of the fuel energy, by
reducing the number of personal vehicles on the road.

(f) Energy Efficient Infrastructure. This includes creation of high-quality roads, rails
and transmission methods to reduce wasteful use of electric and fuel energy.

(g) Preventing Pilferage. Large quantity of electricity, coal and fuel is pilfered by people
during transmission and transporting causing huge losses. This pilferage must be reduced at all
costs.

(h) Use of Non-Conventional Sources of Energy. Some of the non-conventional sources

of energy are as under:

(i) Solar Energy. Solar energy is a renewable energy which is released by the sun
as electromagnetic waves and directly collected from the sun light. Solar energy can be
used in two ways: Solar heating and Solar electricity. Solar Heating is to capture sun’s
energy for heating buildings and for cooking / heating foodstuffs etc. Solar Electricity is
mainly produced by using photovoltaic solar cells which is made of semi conducting
materials that directly converts sunlight into electricity and can provide large amounts of
power for the electric grid. As the solar energy is produced when the sun is shining during
the day, so solar cells are used to charge batteries which are used either as secondary
energy source or for other applications of intermittent use such as night lightening or water
pumping etc. Use of solar energy does not produce air or water pollution and greenhouse
gases. Solar energy is predictable and is most efficient when utility rates are the highest.

(ii) Wind Energy. Wind is air in motion caused by natural factors like the uneven
heating of the earth’s surface by the sun, the rotation of the earth and the irregularities of
the earth’s surface. Kinetic energy in the wind can be used to run wind turbines but the
output power depends upon the wind speed. Wind turbines operate on a simple principle.
The energy in the wind turns two or three propeller-like blades around a rotor. The rotor is
connected to the main shaft, which spins a generator to create electricity. Wind turbines
convert the kinetic energy in the wind into mechanical power and the generator converts
the mechanical power into electricity.

(iii) Biogas. It is a mixture of different gases produced by the breakdown of

organic matter in the absence of oxygen. Biogas is a renewable energy source and can
be produced from raw materials such as agricultural waste, municipal waste, plant
material, sewage, green waste or food waste. It can be used for any heating purpose,
such as cooking. It can also be used in a gas engine to convert the energy in the gas into
electricity and heat.

Conclusion

16. The increasing preference for commercial energy has led to a sharp increase in the demand for
electricity and fossil fuels. There is still a considerable potential for reducing energy consumption by
adopting energy efficient measures in various sectors of our country including individual and collective
community level initiatives.

SUMMARY

1. Water is a very important and precious resource for life. Water Conservation covers policies,
strategies and activities to manage fresh water as a sustainable resource, to protect the water
environment and to meet current and future human demands. No other natural resource has had such an
overwhelming response on the history of mankind as much as Water. Water conservation should not be
considered an option any longer but is an inescapable necessity. Current circumstances require our full
attention, if we hope to thrive as a civilization.

2. Ways to Conserve Water Indoors. The best place to start Water Conservation is one’s own
house. Certain measures which can be adopted at home are:-
215

(a) Ensure that there are no leaks in your house, in the pipelines, taps and toilets.
(b) Use water efficient flushes and if possible, toilets with dual flushing systems.
(c) Close taps while brushing your teeth, shaving or soaping your face.
(d) Use water from washing of clothes for cleaning floors.
(e) Use appropriate amount of detergent for washing clothes.
(f) Close the shower tap while soaping your body.
(g) While washing the dishes by hand, don’t let the water run while rinsing. Fill one sink with
wash water and the other with rinse water.
(h) Monitor your water bill for unusually high use. Your bill and water meter are tools that can
help you discover leaks.
(i) Water your lawn and garden in the morning or evening when temperature is cooler to
minimize evaporation
(j) Never throw the water unnecessary on roads which can be used for gardening and
cleaning.
(k) Avoid unnecessary flushing the toilets. Dispose off the tissues, cigarettes and other waste
into the bin instead of toilets.
(l) Use minimum amount of water to bath.
(m) Do not leave the tap running while washing the dishes in the kitchen.
(n) Install small shower heads to reduce the flow of water.

3. Rainwater harvesting means capturing the runoff of the rainwater in our own house, village, town
or city. It basically means accumulation and storage of rainwater for reuse, before it reaches the aquifer.
Utilization includes water for garden, livestock, irrigation, etc. In many places, the water collected is just
redirected to a deep pit with percolation. The harvested water can be used for drinking water also, if the
storage is a tank that can be accessed and cleaned when needed.

4. Why Harvest Rain water.

(a) To arrest ground water decline and augment ground water table
(b) To beneficiate water quality in aquifers
(c) To conserve surface water runoff during monsoon
(d) To reduce soil erosion
(e) To inculcate a culture of water conservation

5. “ENERGY” means any form of energy derived from fossil fuels, nuclear substances or materials,
hydro-electricity and includes electrical energy or electricity generated from renewable sources of energy
or bio-mass connected to the grid. Energy conservation refers to various ways and methods of reducing
energy consumption by economizing on the use of a particular source of energy. Energy conservation is
the management of processes and policies, designed to reduce energy usage. Energy conservation can
be achieved only by reducing consumption of energy by, either preventing wasteful use of energy or by
using energy efficient products.

6. Energy Conservation Measures.

(a) Energy Saving Building Designs.

(b) Use of Energy Efficient Equipment / Implements.
(c) Public Lighting.
(d) Usage Habits.
(e) Public Transport System.
(f) Energy Efficient Infrastructure.
(g) Preventing Pilferage.
(h) Use of Non-Conventional Sources of Energy:-

(i) Solar Energy.

(ii) Wind Energy.
(iii) Biogas.
216
217

CHAPTER OT - I

OBSTACLE TRAINING

Introduction

1. The training in crossing the obstacles/barriers by NCC cadets is a very important aspect of NCC
syllabus. The obstacle course training not only makes the cadets physically strong but also develops a high
degree of confidence and develops the qualities of courage and will power to face all types of challenges
and barriers in life.

Obstacle Course

2. The Standard Obstacle Course that the NCC cadets are required to cross consists of ten obstacles.
The obstacles, depending upon the structure are constructed of wood, bricks, concrete and mud. Each
obstacle is placed at a distance of about 30 feet from each other. The details of each obstacle are described
as below:-

(a) Straight Balance. It is a wooden slab of 3 inches thick, 4 inches wide and 12 ft long,
which is placed 1 ½ ft above ground level. A cadet crosses this obstacle running, keeping his arms
open and balancing his body.

(b) Clear Jump. Its structure is just like a straight bar of 18 ft long. This wooden bar is
placed 2 ft above the ground. Cadet has to jump over it without touching or using any part of the
body.
218

(c) Gate Vault. This is a wooden structure which has two parallel bars at a height of 3 ft
and 5 ft respectively, both 18 ft long. One has to cross the gate by holding upper beam with both
hands and by putting one’s feet on 3 ft bar and jump across.

(d) Zig-Zag Balance. It is a Zig-Zag like structure made of wooden bar which is 18 ft in
length and 3-inch width. The height of the bar above the ground is 1½ ft at the beginning and
gradually increases to 3½ ft in the end. The Cadet has to run over the obstacle with open hands
and balance the body similar to straight balance and cross it.

(e) High Wall. It is 6 feet high and 12 feet long bricked wall with plaster on both sides.
For crossing this obstacle, a cadet has to run, jump, kick the wall with one leg and take leap putting
both hands on the wall and then push his body upwards and jump over the other side.
219

(f) Double Ditch. The obstacle is made up of two similar ditches each of approximately 8 ft
in long, 6 ft wide and 3-4 ft deep separated by a small gap of approximately 4 feet. The cadet has
to jump across the two ditches by jumping over the first ditch, placing one foot on the gap and
jumping across the second ditch.

(g) Right Hand Vault. This wooden slab is 3 ½ ft above the ground and 18 feet long. The
cadet is required to jump over using the right hand as support on the beam, throwing both legs up
and jump across.

(h) Left Hand Vault. This wooden structure is 3 ½ ft above the ground just like Right
Hand Vault. The Cadet is required to jump over using the left hand as support on the bar, throwing
both legs up and jump across.
220

(j) Ramp. It is 15 feet long, 18 feet wide and 4 ½ feet high sloppy hillock. For crossing it, a
cadet has to crawl and climb over the ramp and take long jump after reaching the top and then
landing on ground with both the feet.

(k) Straight Balance. It is piece of wooden 3 inches thick, 4 inches wide and 12 ft in
length, which is above the ground level. A cadet crosses this obstacle running, keeping his arms
open and balancing his body.

3. Safety Measures. Following safety measures must be ensured during the conduct of Obstacle
Course training to cadets -

(a) Suitable and physically fit cadets only to be selected.

(b) Training to be given first in PT dress, later on with packs and weapon.
(c) Emphasis to be given on closing of individual timings and later team timings.
(d) Wet and slippery obstacles and area to be avoided.
(e) Obstacles to be done under supervision of qualified instructors and correct technique only
to be used.
(f) Arrangement of first aid to be ensured.

4. Benefits. Benefits of Obstacles courses are as under:-

(a) Ensures physical fitness.

(b) Ensures flexibility.
(c) Ensures mental strength.
(d) Coordination and balance of mind and body.
(e) Improves risk taking ability.
(f) Evaluating problem solving skills.
(g) Over all team spirit.
221

Conclusion

5. The training in NCC is comprehensive. The basic training of regular Defence services (Army, Navy
and Air force) is given to the students. The cadets receive training throughout the NCC course. Intensive
training is given to cadets in the camps especially in Thal Sainik Camps. Obstacle course is one such
training activity conducted that makes the NCC cadets physically fit and mentally tough. Obstacle training
increases agility, courage, patience and increases their confidence.

SUMMARY

1. The trainng in NCC is comprehensive. The basic training of regular Defence services (Army, Navy
and Air Force) is given to the students. The cadets receive training throughout the NCC tenure.
Obstacle course is one such training activity conducted for making the NCC cadets physically fit and
mentally strong. Obstacle training develops courage, patience and makes them physically fit.

2. Obstacle Course. It consists of the following obstacles.

(a) Straight Balance

(b) Clear Jump
(c) Gate Vault
(d) Zig-Zag Balance
(e) High Wall
(f) Double Ditch
(g) Right Hand Vault
(h) Left Hand Vault
(j) Ramp
(k) Straight Balance
HISTORY, GEOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY OF THE BORDER & COASTAL
AREAS

Period : Two

Type : Lecture

Conduct : ANO/CTO

Training Aids

1. Computer, Slides, Projector, Charts, Pointer, Black Board and Chalk

Time Plan

2. This Lec will be conducted in the following three parts:-

(a) Introduction - 05 Mins

(b) Part I- Types of Borders - 30 Mins

(c) Part II- Historical Borders - 25 Mins

(d) Part III- Geography and Topography - 18 Mins

(e) Conclusion - 02 Mins

Introduction

3. A nation acquires its identity through its geographical borders as we observe it

through a political map of that country. Similarly all the people residing within a
geographical border are identified as citizens of that country. Our study of history tells
us that these borders are not permanent in nature and has been changing over a
period of time. World War I and II took place because Germany wanted to rule the
world and wanted to expand its borders. On the other hand when disintegration of
erstwhile USSR took place, several small countries with their own geographical
borders emerged. India too shares its borders with Pakistan and China with ongoing
disputes and differences and past hostilities. In this background it is important to learn
about our own borders, its history, geography and topography.

PART I -Types of Borders

4. Geographical Borders.

(a) Land Borders. India shares borders with land borders

with Afghanistan,China, Bhutan, Nepal, Pakistan in the north or north-west,
and Bangladesh and Myanmar in the east. We will learn about them one by
one.
2

(i) Afghanistan. Located in Central Asia, Afghanistan shares 106

kms border with India, which presently exiss in POK.

(ii) Bangladesh. India and Bangladesh share one of the longest

borders in the world and it covers a length of 4,156 km and has a
coastline of 580 km. The Bangladesh states of Rajshahi, Dhaka,
Chittagong, Khulna, Rangpur and Sylhet, share their borders with India.

(iii) Bhutan. The Bhutan–India border is an international border

which is 699 km long, and along the Indian states of Assam (267 km),
Arunachal Pradesh (217 km), West Bengal (183 km), and Sikkim (32
km).
(iv) China. The world’s most populous country is spread over an
area of about 95,96,960 sq km. Indo-China Border of 3,488 km runs
along the Himalayan mountain range, at altitudes ranging from 9,000 ft
to 18,700 ft in the Western, Middle and Eastern sectors of the Indo-China
Border.
(v) Myanmar. Myanmar is located to the south and east of the
states of Mizoram, Manipur, Nagaland and Arunachal Pradesh in North-
East India. The Indo-Burmese border stretches over 1,643 kilometers.
In addition to the long land border, India and Myanmar also share a
maritime border along India's Andaman Islands.
(vi) Nepal. The India–Nepal border is an open international border
running between India and Nepal. The 1,751 km long border includes
the Himalayan territories as well as Indo-Gangetic Plain. The current
border was delimited after the Sugauly treaty of 1816 between Nepal
and the British India.
(vii) Pakistan. Indo-Pakistan Border (3,323 Km) runs along the
states of Gujarat, Rajasthan, Punjab, and Union Territories of Jammu &
Kashmir and Ladakh.
(b) Maritime Borders. India has 12-nautical-mile territorial maritime zone
and 200-nautical-mile (370 km; 230 mi) exclusive economic zone (EEZ) along
its coastal region. It has more than 7,000 Km maritime border shared with
seven nations, Bangladesh, Indonesia, Malaysia, Myanmar, Thailand, Sri
Lanka, Maldives and Pakistan.

(c) Aerial Borders. Aerial borders cannot be physically demarcated. It

is an imaginary line contiguous and vertically above in space to a country’s land
and maritime borders. During peacetime, the neighbouring countries have
agreement and allow passenger and cargo air flights into each other’s air
space. During peacetime, they do not permit movement of military aircraft and
if such infringement takes place, it is termed as ‘Air violation”.
3

5. Based on Demarcation.

(a) Demarcated. When there is agreement and understanding

between two countries, a geographical survey is carried out and the border is
clearly identified on ground with no dispute between the parties. Such borders
are internationally recognised and usually marked by placing boundary pillars
at regular intervals. These boundary pillars are serially numbered for their exact
location and identification.

(b) Un-demarcated. Boarders which are either not clearly defined or

accepted by political leadership of two sovereign nations can be termed as un-
demarcated boarders. These un-demarcated borders are usually the reason
for conflict or dispute between the nations because of the varying perception
and claim lines. India shares such borders with Pakistan and China which will
be covered in later chapters.

PART II - Historical Borders

6. Pre- Independence.

(a) Greater India. Greater India, is an area composed of many countries

and regions in South and Southeast Asia that were historically influenced by
Indian culture and languages. The term Greater India is used to encompass the
historical and geographic extent of all political entities of the Indian
subcontinent, and the regions which are culturally linked to India or received
significant Indian cultural influence. These countries have been transformed to
varying degrees by the acceptance and adoption of cultural and institutional
elements of India. Map depicting the same is given below.

(b) Invaders and Expeditionary Forces. India has always been a single
nation since prehistoric times as Bharatavarsha or Aryabhoomi. Indian history
tells us that our country was ravaged by a spate of foreign invaders who came
from the North-west. Porus, Changez Khan, Mohammad Bin Qaseem and
Mahmud Ghazni are the prominent raiders about whom we have already
studied in school.
4

(c) Mughal Dynasty. Mughal dynasty of Turkic-Mongol origin ruled most

of northern India from the early 16th to the mid-18th century. The
Mughal dynasty was notable for its more than two centuries of rule over much
of India. The boarders of India during their rule are given below in map.

(d) British Rule. The British came under the garb of East India Company
and established the rule by the British Crown on the Indian subcontinent from
1858 to 1947. The region under British control was commonly called India and
included areas directly administered by the United Kingdom. You are all aware
of the history of freedom struggle which finally culminated into a new country
being born on 15 Aug 1947 with its name as India. Map depicting boarders
during the British Colonial Rule is given below.

History of Coastal Areas

7. In ancient India, coastal India spans from the south west Indian coastline along
the Arabian sea from the coastline of the Gulf of Kutch in its westernmost corner and
stretches across the Gulf of Khambhat, and through the Salsette Island of Mumbai
along the Konkan. And southwards across the Raigad region and through Kanara
and further down through Mangalore and along the Malabar through Cape Comorin in
5

the southernmost region of South India with coastline along the Indian Ocean and
through the Coromandal Coast or Cholamandalam. The coastline on the South
Eastern part of the Indian Subcontinent along the Bay of Bengal through the
UtkalaKalinga region extends until the easternmost Corner of shoreline near the
Sunderbans in Coastal East India.

8. People Along Coastal India. The people along coastal India exhibit vast
diversity along an underlying commonality as a result of its coastal topography and
sea trade between west AsianMediterranean traders along its west coastline.
The region includes Gujaratis in the westernmost region, Kannadigas, Tuluvas,
Goans and Maharashtrians along the Konkan coast or the western coastline, Malayalis
in its southernmost region of South India, the Tamilians along southern
Cholamandalam coast, the Telugus and Oriya people along the South eastern coast
through UtkalaKalinga region along the Coromandal coast, and the Bengali people
along the easternmost coastline along the Bay of Bengal.
9. Thriving Sea Trade And Intermingling. A Thriving trade existed
between the Mediterranean world and Coastal Indian regions. This led to significant
intermingling between the people of Coastal India and the west Asian world,
particularly along the South West Indian Coastline along the Arabian Sea. Several
west Asian communities have also settled and become part of the diversity of coastal
south west India.
10. Heritage. The linguistic diversity of Coastal India includes languages of the
Dravidian language family including Malayalam, Tamil, Telugu, Tulu and Kannada;
languages belonging to the western zone of Indo Iranian language families including
Gujarati, Marathi, Konkani, languages belonging to the central zone of the Indo-Iranian
language families including Urdu and Persian and languages belonging to the eastern
zone of Indo Iranian language family including Oriya and Bengali.

Post-Independence History

11. Unification of Princely States and Jammu and Kashmir. The predominant
usage of the term princely state specifically refers to a semi-sovereign principality on
the Indian subcontinent during the British Raj that was not directly governed by the
British, but rather by a local ruler, subject to a form of indirect rule on some matters.
At the time of the British withdrawal, 565 princely states were officially recognized in
the Indian subcontinent, apart from thousands of zamindari estates and jagirs. In
1947, princely states, which covered 40% of the area of pre-independence India and
constituted 23% of its population were merged with India. Some of the important states
which joined the sovereignty of Indian Union are Nizams of
Hyderabad, Mysore and Travancore in the South, Indore in Central India and Jammu
and Kashmir and Sikkim in the Himalayas.
12. Various Wars the country has fought to protect Its Borders.

(a) Indo-Pak War of 1947 – 48. The First Kashmir War of 1947 – 48 was
a result of the territorial claims of India and Pakistan over Jammu & Kashmir.
As per the Indian Independence Act of 1947 – any Princely State that was
formerly a part of the British Raj had complete choice of being independent or
6

join any of the Dominions of either India or Pakistan. Maharaja Hari Singh, a
Hindu ruler of the Dogra dynasty, chose to remain independent and away from
India and Pakistan until Pakistan aggressively entered his territory in a bid to
capture it. Unable to retaliate, he sought the help of India. The then Prime
Minister made it clear that Indian troops would fight the war only if Kashmir is
declared an Indian territory. The Maharaja made his choice that he would join
India on October 2, 1948, so that his people will be saved. A “Document of
Accession” was signed on that day and Jammu & Kashmir was officially
transferred to India. This was followed by Indian troops landing in Kashmir
leading to Sino Indo Pak War 1947-48.

(b) The Sino – Indian War of 1962. The Sino-Indian war 1962: took place
from 20 October to 21 November, 1962. This border, called the Mac Mohan
Line, was demarcated by Britain and Tibet at the Simla Convention held from
1913 to 1914 between Britain (represented by Sir Henry McMahon), China, and
Tibet. China has not acknowledged the McMahon Line on the grounds that the
Chinese Kuomintang government, which was China’s government at the time,
did not sign the treaty.
(c) The Indo – Pak War of 1965. This war lasted from 08 April to 23
September 1965. It was a continuation of on-going dispute over the territories
of Jammu and Kashmir and culminated into the signing of the “Tashkant
Agreement” between the two countries.

(d) The Indo – Pak War of 1971. This war lasted from 03 December to
16 December 1971. Also known as the Liberation War of Bangladesh. On 16
December 1971 a “Document of Surrender” was signed by Pakistan and 93,000
Pakistan soldiers were taken as Prisoners of War.
(e) Kargil War of 1999. Pakistan Army occupied winter vacated
Indian posts in the high altitude area of Kargil. Indian Army launched “Operation
Vijay” as a response to the Pakistan’s Operation. Pakistan denied that its army
was involved in the operation. On 26 July 1999 – Kargil conflict officially comes
to an end and the entire territory was recaptured.

13. Insurgency and terrorism sponsored by neighbouring countries to

destabilise the Border Areas. Insurgency and terrorism are a very low cost option
of a country to destablise other nation and which can be extended over a long period
of time. The method employed is to exploit the grievances of the people from border
areas and provide them with financial support and weapons to force the other
countries to divert its Armed Forces from the Border to Internal Securities Duties. The
best examples of this are in the UT of Jammu and Kashmir and in the North-Eastern
States sponsored by our neighbours with hostile intent.
7

PART III - Geography and Topography of Border Areas

14. Desert Terrain/ Riverine Terrain/ Plains. The international border of

India and Pakistan is a mix of all type of terrain. It partially has dessert, riverine, plains
and mountainous terrain. Each type of terrain pose a different type of threat and
requires different means of surveillance. Thus forces designated to guard these have
to prepare for various type of challenges and warfare as per terrain. Desserts are vast
and open. There is lack of water, tree cover or vegetation extreme temperatures in
day and night. As a result the population density is low with very few towns and
villages. There is lack of roads and vehicles cannot move on loose sand. Similarly the
plains of Punjab and Jammu region have a number of rivers and nallahs where
movement of troops guarding the borders is difficult. These terrain impose a challenge
of effectively patrolling the border areas and increases the risk of illegal activities
across the border.

15. Mountainous Terrain. Mountainous terrain as the name suggest has

mountains of varying heights, which in case of India range from 9,000 ft to about
20,000 ft. The terrain in mountains is rugged & inhospitable and weather is inclement.
It poses a challenge for construction, development of means of transportation &
communication. Difficulty in holding ground, surveillance, logistics and requirement of
special clothing and equipment further aggravates the complexity. India shares
mountainous border with Pakistan, China, Nepal, Bhutan and Myanmar.

16. Snow Clad and Glaciated Terrain. Snow clad mountains are areas in
Greater Himalayas which experiences snowfall and has snow cover for several
months in the year. Such mountains are found in UT of J&K, Ladakh and state of
Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Sikkim and Arunachal Pradesh, The Siachen
Glacier is located in the Eastern Karakoram range of the Himalayas and has
permanent snow cover throughout the year. The Siachen Glacier is located in the UT
of Ladakh. It is also known as the highest battlefield in the world.
17. Jungle Terrain. Such a terrain has serious challenges in construction of
means of transportation and communication, and as a result, the border area remains
sparsely populated with limited economic development. Absence of roads,
communication links and other border guarding infrastructure also adversely affect
border management as they hamper the easy and rapid movement of the border
guarding forces along the border. Such terrain denies the advantage of aerial
surveillance. Densely forested areas are difficult to inhabit for the state and have an
overall decreased police and military presence.

18. Geography Of Coastal India. Coastal geography is the study of the

constantly changing region between the ocean and the land, incorporating both the
physical geography (i.e. coastal geomorphology, geology and oceanography) and the
human geography (sociology and history) of the coast. It includes understanding
coastal weathering processes, particularly wave action, sediment movement and
weather, and the ways in which humans interact with the coast. India has a coastline
of 7516-6 km which touches Nine Indian states and Two Union Territories
8

Coastal States of India

19. India has a coastline of 7516.6 km in which 5422.6 km of mainland coastline

and 1197 km of Indian islands. Indian coastline touches nine states namely Gujarat,
Maharashtra, Goa, Karnataka, Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh, Odisha, West
Bengal and two union territories-- Daman and Diu and Puducherry. The two island
territories of India are Andaman and Nicobar Islands in Bay of Bengal and
Lakshadweep Islands in the Arabian Sea.
20. The Coastal State of India are as follows:-

Sr. No Name of the State Coastal Length

(a). Gujarath 1,600km
(b) Maharastra 720km
(c) Goa 160km
(d) Karnataka 320km
(e) Kerala 580km
(f) Tamil Nadu 1076km
(g) Andhra Pradesh 974km
(h) Odisha 485km
(j) West Bengal 157km

21. Peninsular India is bounded by water on 3 sides: the Arabian Sea in the west,
the Bay of Bengal in the East and the Indian Ocean in the South. The coastal belt
comprises of a wide range of ecosystems extending from sandy beaches and
mangroves to coral reefs and rocky shores. Certain facts for remembering are as
follows:

(a) Seventh longest in the world.

(b) 1/5 of the population live along the coast.

(c) Gujarat has the longest coastline.

(d) Three of our metropolitan cities are on the coast.

9

Conclusion.

22. Today we have studied about what does the land and coastal border signify to
our country and its people. We have briefly touched upon a brief history of the country
when our borders were highly contested, wars were fought and foreign invasion took
place to control the rich resources of our country. What border we have today has
been achieved by prolonged fight for independence and its sanctity is still being
challenged by evil design of our neighbours. As proud citizens of our country we must
know about our borders and the various challenges that we face to protect its sanctity.
10

SECURITY CHALLENGES AND ROLE OF NCC CADETS IN BORDER

MANAGEMENT

Period - Two

Type - Lecture

Conduct – ANO/ CTO

Training Aids

1. Computer Slides, Projector, White Board, Easel, Marker and Duster.

Time Plan

2. This lecture will be conducted in the following parts: -

(a) Introduction - 04 Min.

(b) Aim & Scope - 02 Min.

(c) Part I - Security Challenges of Border Areas - 18 Min.

(d) Part II - Security challenges of Coastal Areas - 18 Min

(e) Part III - Security challenges of Air Force Taluks - 16 Min

(f) Part IV - Role of NCC cadets - 18 Min

(e) Conclusion - 04 Min.

Introduction

3. India has different types of land borders (14,8181 KM) viz IB/LC/AGPL/LAC
and peculiarity of Sir Creek alongwith a large coastal line inclusive of main land
(starting from Gujarat, Maharashtra, Goa, Karnataka, Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Andhra
Pradesh, Odisha and West Bengal) and islands (Andaman & Nicobar and
Lakshadweep Island). The country shares borders with Pakistan, China, Nepal,
Bhutan, Myanmar and Bangladesh.
4. Historical culture flow on either side of the border hence claims and counter
claims by neighbouring countries as such disputed areas. The terrain and ethnicity
throw a lot of challenges which need to be addressed as part of border management.
5. People living in border and coastal areas are the most important ingredient
towards secure and safe border and coastal region hence they are the center of gravity
of effective border management. NCC cadets being the son of the soil can play
contributory role towards meaningful border management.
11

Aim

6. To highlight the Security challenges & role of NCC cadets in security

management of Border Areas/Coastal Areas and Air Force Taluks.
Scope

7. The lesson will be covered in following parts:-

(a) Part I. Security challenges of border Areas.

(b) Part II. Security challenges of Coastal Areas.

(c) Part III. Security challenges of Air Force Taluks.

(b) Part IV. Role of NCC cadets.

Part I : Security Challenges of Border Areas

8. India’s borders present a geographical diversity of unique kind which have far
reaching security ramifications. Much of its borders are topographically difficult, remote
and have peculiar challenges. These are enumerated below :-
(a) Porus, undemarcated stretches and easily negotiable.

(b) Due to terrain constraints and lack of approachability it remains unguarded

at many places.
(c) Border regions have their own ethnic, cultural, religious and racial
configurations distinct from the main land and in some areas depicting an
unmistakable affinity with those of across the borders.
(d) The remoteness of local administration and its low visibility.

(e) Illegal immigration.

(f) Smuggling of arms, ammunition and narcotics substances.

(g) Lack of access to public amenities and harsh living conditions.

(h) Frequent shelling from across the border.

(j) Concrete efforts by hostile neighbours through allurements, subversion

and promotion of religious fundamentalism to generate a feeling of alienation
among the border population.
(k) Vulnerability to actions of border criminals.
12

(l) Lack of means of communication, education, medical, water etc due to

remoteness.
(m) Illegal immigration due to better living condition (Push and pull factor).

(n) Safe haven for terrorists, undergrounds/ insurgents- they have their
operating bases/launch pads.
(o) During conflict – air violation, infiltration by small teams, patrols or
irregulars.
(p) Dropping drugs/war like stores by Drones/pushing by animals.

Part II : Security Challenges of Coastal Areas

9. India has a coastline of 7516.6 km bordering the mainland and the islands in
Bay of Bengal in the East, the Indian Ocean on the South and the Arabian Sea on
the West. India faces a number of threats and challenges along the coastal areas that
originate from the sea and which are mainly sub-conventional in nature. These threats
and challenges can be categorised under five broad categories which are enunciated
in succeeding paragraphs.
10. Maritime Terrorism. The maritime terrorism features as the most potent
threat to our country. Maritime terrorism is defined as ‘the undertaking of terrorist acts
and activities within the maritime environment, using or against vessels or fixed
platforms at sea or in port, or against any one of their passengers or personnel, against
coastal facilities or settlements, including tourist resorts, port areas and port towns or
cities’. Thus, major population centres, onshore and offshore strategic installations,
commercial facilities, industrial complexes located along the coast as well as coastal
waterways can be identified as high value targets for terrorist attacks. Sea based
terrorism is not a new phenomenon.
11. Piracy And Armed Robbery. Piracy is defined as any illegal acts of violence
or detention, or any act of depredation, committed for private ends by the crew or the
passengers of a private ship or a private aircraft, and directed: from the high seas,
against another ship or aircraft, or against persons or property on board such ship or
aircraft; b. against a ship, aircraft, persons or property in a place outside the jurisdiction
of any State.
12. Smuggling And Trafficking. While the entire coast of the country is
vulnerable to clandestine landings of contraband, the Gujarat-Maharashtra coastline,
the Tamil Nadu coast, the Sunderbans in West Bengal, and the Andaman and Nicobar
Islands have been particularly prone to such activities. Geographical location, peculiar
terrain, and close trans-border ethnic ties have made these stretches conducive for
smuggling and trafficking.
13. Infiltration, Illegal Migration and the Refugee Influx. India’s land
boundaries have always been porous to infiltration by terrorists/militants and large
scale illegal migration. These large scale influxes over the decades have resulted in
widespread political turmoil in the Border States. To prevent infiltration and large scale
illegal migration, the Indian government implemented widespread security measures,
included maintaining strict vigil along the borders, the erection of fences, and the
13

thorough checking of immigrants. The elaborate security arrangements on land forced

the terrorists and illegal migrants to look towards the sea where security measures are
comparatively lax, enabling them to ‘move, hide and strike’ with relative ease.
14. Straying of Fishermen beyond the Maritime Boundary. The frequent
straying of fishermen into neighboring country waters has not only jeopardised the
safety of the fishermen but has also raised national security concerns.
(a) Fishermen who trespass into a neighbor country’s waters are invariably
arrested along with their boats.

(b) On many occasions, they have also been fired upon by security agencies
of the neighbouring country.

(c) The issue is not of an unsettled maritime boundary but the refusal of
Indian fishermen to recognize the maritime boundary between India and Sri
Lanka, especially in the Palk Bay.

(d) The straying of Indian fishermen into Bangladeshi waters happens

mainly in the Sunderbans area. The difficult terrain and the absence of the
Global Positioning System (GPS) in the fishing trawlers make it difficult for the
fishermen to ascertain maritime limits.

Part III : Security Challenges of Air Force Taluks

15. The War Time threat to an Air Force Station is the most destructive of all
situations. The danger and threat to the Air Force station is due to direct enemy action
after war had been declared. The threat is from enemy aircraft, land attack by enemy
Infantry, Artillery, missiles, and drones. The war between two countries results in all
military resources engaged in combat. The most sought-after target during such
attacks will be the aircraft and other weapon systems or the runway so that aircraft
cannot take off at all for some time.

16. The Peace time threats are those which are not directly undertaken by an
enemy country. Some of these threats are not aimed at destruction of assets directly
but are still dangerous. Some of the threats that an Air Force Station faces during
peace time both conventional and unconventional enunciated below:-

(a) Terrorism. As a nation, we have suffered at the hands of enemy

sponsored terrorists. Several attempts have been made in the past and we
lost lives during attack on Air Force Station at Pathankot. This is a serious
threat. Such attacks cannot be carried out without preparation which
includes familiarity with routes and areas. Terrorists may have had supporters
living in the local area.
14

(b) Cyber war. The destructive use of the cyber space by various methods
is a serious threat to functioning of an AF Stn.

(c) Psychological War. This is used to lower the moral of the Human
resource in an organization by spreading false information etc.

(d) Criminal activity. Theft of assets, wires, willful destruction of property

by criminals who have no regards for the Nation is always a threat. This can
also be deliberate action. In case agents of the enemy are groomed to
mix in local population , any such activity will not appear to be anti national.
Use of drones for recreational or spying purposes endanger the assets of an
Air Force Station.

(e) Information leakage. A well informed adversary is always well

prepared. Classified information of sensitive nature can give away the
preparedness levels, the training status, the fitness of equipment, weapon
status, aircraft availability, spare parts number of personnel and the war plan of
the stn and the units which are in it.

(f) Sabotage. To deliberately destroy, damage, or obstruct for political or

military benefit. Insiders can be influenced to cause deliberate damage to
aircraft etc.

(g) Local situations/civic responsibility/administration response/ civil

unrest. Public apathy is another cause of aircraft accidents around Airfields.
Poor garbage disposal, abattoirs etc attract birds which can cause loss of crores
of rs and lives. Frequent unrest in an area also affects the resource
availability and manpower movement to and from the Air Force Stn by road.
Areas which are volatile due to local political or some other mindsets are
often troublesome.

(i) Illegal construction, encroachment of Air Force land. The illegal

constructions and encroachments are a major causes of concern. Irresponsible
kite flying has damaged slow moving aircraft quite often; the safety of any flying
environment is directly affected by these activities.

(j) Illegal Migration. Illegal immigrants who are deliberately planted in

the areas around Air Force Stations.

17. The biggest two threats therefore remain Terrorists (who either influenced by
some misplaced ideology or controlled by an enemy state) or local population
(including infiltrated illegal immigrants) who by sheer apathy or greed play into the
hands of the enemy.

Part IV : Role of NCC Cadets

15

18. The enrolment of students from border & coastal districts and Air Force Taluks
in NCC will help in mitigating the present drawbacks in Border/Coastal Area
Management system and also build a healthy relationship between Border Guarding
Forces/ Maritime Forces/ Air Force personnel, the local population and the
administration. Enrolment of youth in NCC will change their outlook and they can take
up leadership roles in their localities and villages and can facilitate implementation of
govt policies. They can also serve as a link between BGF, administration and the
population. As per Para 10 of the NCC Act - No person subject to this Act shall by
virtue of being a member of the Corps be liable for active military service, but
subject there to any such person shall be liable to perform such duties and
discharge such obligations as may be prescribed. Within the parameters of this
clause various tasks that may be assigned to NCC are enumerated in succeeding
paragraphs.

19. Role of NCC Cadets in Border Area Management. The NCC cadets
enrolled in the Border Districts can perform the following tasks.
(a) Border Area Awareness Campaign NCC cadets can be utilized to
conduct Border area security awareness campaigns demonstrating
Government foot print through NCC training activities like rallies and public
engagement programs.
(b) Border Area security and Intelligence tasks. Cadets can be utilized
in enforcing the various security and intelligence gaps in the border areas. They
can be part of village Defence Committee (VDC). They can act as eyes & ears
against anti-social activities/ anti-national elements if any. They can share local
intelligence with the Border Guarding Forces.

(c) Disaster Management. NCC cadets can be employed for disaster

management assistance tasks like first aid, crowd management distribution of
food and medicines. Evacuation of villagers during Artillery shelling along
villages along Line of Control and during other war like situations.

(d) Social Service and Community Development. Social Service

and Community Development activities can be undertaken by NCC cadets by
adopting local villages and assisting in Border Area Development Programmes
(BADP). They can spread awareness about various Government schemes and
new initiatives.

20. Role of NCC Cadets in Coastal Area Management. The role of NCC Cadets
in Coastal security Management Task is elaborated in succeeding paragraphs: -
(a) Coastal Security Awareness Campaign NCC cadets can be
utilized to conduct coastal security awareness campaigns, rallies and public
engagement programs towards coastal security in all coastal villages &
fisherman villages which will beneficial to the public in general along the coast
line of country.
(c) Coastal Security. Cadets can be utilized in enforcing the various
security measures gaps in the coastal areas. They can be mobilized for
16

conducting frequent rallies/ camps and impart education to local population in

the coastal areas regarding various imminent security threats in the coastal
areas and various safety measures to be taken from time to time.
(b) Disaster Management. NCC cadets can be employed for disaster
management assistance tasks like first aid, crowd management distribution of
food and medicines.
(d) Awareness on Coastal Ecology. Cadets can also be deployed in
coastal villages to bring awareness in local populace about the coastal ecology
and make them aware of the measures or steps that can be taken to sustain
the ecology and maintain the flora and fauna of the area.
(e) Social Service and Community Development. Social Service
and Community Development activities can be undertaken by NCCcadets with
the aim to imbibe the qualities of selfless service in the community, Nation
building, dignity of labour, swatch Bharat campaign, cleanliness, importance of
self-help, protection of environment and to assist in uplifting weaker sections of
the society. Spreading awareness and implementation of various Govt run
schemes for uplifting the fishermen community e.g., Pradhan Mantri Matsya
Vikas Yogna.

20. Role of NCC Cadets in Air Force Taluks. The role of NCC Cadets in Air
Force Taluks is elaborated in succeeding paragraphs: -

(a) Information and Education. Cadets can be assigned regular roles in

creating awareness about the safety precautions the area as a responsible
society need to inculcate to prevent loss of National Assets. These will be based
on the requirements of garbage disposal in such manner that bird activity is
reduced. Regular drives in teaching school children about risk to aircrafts and
humans due to kite flying/ drone flying etc. NCC cadets can conduct Regular
Foot policing and awareness activities in areas around the Air Force Station.

(b) Air Force Taluks intelligence tasks. NCC cadets can observe
sudden changes in lifestyles of some locals. Change in ideology, anti-national
sentiments, sudden increase in wealth, spending habits, procurements of new
assets with apparently lesser means of income. Cadets can also report
discreetly in case they see some new residents who are seemingly out of place.
This can be shared with the local IAF liaison designate. NCC cadets will not be
required to further investigate etc.

(c) Awareness against encroachment and illegal migration. With more

Cadets and ex cadets in a local environment, it is expected that encroachment
of Air Force land and illegal construction around the perimeter will reduce or
stop. Their presence will also deter the illegal migrants in settling down near Air
Force Stations.
(b) Disaster Management. NCC cadets can be employed for disaster
management assistance tasks like first aid, crowd management distribution of
food and medicines.
17

Conclusion
14. Enrolment of youth in NCC from border/ coastal areas/Air Force Taluks will
definitely help in better management of these areas. It will prove to be a vital link
between the population, security forces and administration. NCC cadets will serve as
a force multiplier in security management of these areas. Once the local population
along the bordering areas is integrated in the mainstream, a certain amount of moral
responsibility would automatically come in. The realistic community participation in
India’s border management can be achieved only thereafter.
18

SECURITY SET UP AND MANAGEMENT OF BORDER & COASTAL AREAS

INCLUDING AIR FORCE STATIONS

Period - Two

Type - Lecture

Conduct – ANO/ CTO

Training Aids

1. Computer Slides, Projector, White Board, Easel, Marker and Duster.

Time Plan

2. This lecture will be conducted in the following three parts:-

(a) Introduction - 05 Min.

(b) Part I – Security Set up & management of Land Borders - 35 Min.

(c) Part II - Security Set up & management of Coastal Areas - 25 Min.

(d) Part III - Security Set up & management of Air Force Stations - 15 Min.

Introduction

3. India shares its borders with a Number of countries and almost every type of
extreme geography is present at different borders viz. deserts, fertile lands,
swampy marshes or tropical evergreen jungles. India shares its border with
Bangladesh (4,096.7 km), China (3,488 km), Pakistan (3,323 km), Nepal (1,751
km), Myanmar (1,643 km), Bhutan (699 km) and Afghanistan (106 km). It has
15,106.7 kms of land borders and a coast line of 7,516.6 kms. All states except
Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Telangana and Haryana have an
international border or a coast line. 106 districts of India’s 593 districts are border
districts in 17 states.

4. Coastal security, a major subset of an all-encompassing subject of maritime

security, has been on the centre stage, post terror attack on Mumbai on 26 Nov 08.
India, being a maritime state, has numerous interests in the maritime zones and
safeguarding these interests, has thrown up fresh challenges in the fast-deteriorating
security environment. The use of sea route by terrorists for attack at Mumbai has
highlighted the vulnerability of our coastline and the lacunae in our existing security
mechanism.
5. Security and Management of Border including maritime and Air Force
Stations becomes more important for the fact that India shares its borders with
nations such as Pakistan and China with which we still have boundary dispute
and have also fought major wars in the past. Additionally, in some countries there
is cultural radicalism, terrorism and mafia groups that are patronized by some of
19

India’s neighbouring states. There is cross border smuggling problem of drugs,

cattle, humans trafficking, fake currency, illegal migrants etc.

Part I – Security Set up & management of Land Borders

6. Different Types of Borders Given the difference in the status of the IB, LC,
AGPL, LAC etc there is a slight difference in the management of these lines.

(a) IB. International Border (IB) is the line that neighbouring countries
and the rest of the world recognises. These are well demarcated and mutually
acceptable boundary between two countries. The most common way of
demarcation is to place Border Pillars which are generally numbered and
placed at regular intervals.
(b) LC. The term Line of Control (LC or LoC) refers to the military control
line between the Indian and Pakistani controlled parts of the former princely
state of Jammu and Kashmir. It is a line which at International level does not
constitute a legally recognized international boundary. Originally known as
the Cease-fire Line, it was re-designated as the "Line of Control" following the
Shimla Agreement signed on 3 July 1972. The part of the former princely state
that is under Indian control is now known as the UT of Jammu and Kashmir and
UT of Ladakh. The Pakistan-controlled part is divided into Azad Kashmir and
Gilgit- Baltistan. The LoC is approximately 740 Kms long.

(c) AGPL. The Actual Ground Position Line (AGPL) is the line that divides
current positions of Indian and Pakistani troops in the Siachen Glacier region.
The line extends from the northernmost point of the LC (Line of Control) i.e.
Point NJ 9842 running northwards to Indira Col. AGPL is approximately 110
kilometres long. Siachen Glacier is also known as the highest battle filed of the
world.

(d) LAC. Mac Mohan Line was a broad line drawn on a map India ratified
in the Shimla Agreement (Oct 1913 to Jul 1914) by the independent State of
Tibet and Great Britain to demarcated boundary between Tibet and NE Region.
Consequently, Arunachal Pradesh State (which is administered by India) and
Aksai Chin (administered by China) have become disputed areas. Post
annexation of Tibet by China, she started reneging on the Mac Mohan Line and
her stand has remained ambiguous ever since, thus creating many areas of
disagreement and disputes. After years of negotiations India and China have
adopted a new term called Line of Actual Control (LAC) which is now a broad
demarcation line that separates Indian territory from Chinese controlled
territory of Tibet. There have been a military conflict in 1962 between the two
countries and later many border skirmishes due to the unresolved boundary
dispute over LAC. These include Sino-Indian War of 1962, the Cho La incident
in 1967, the 1987 Sino-Indian skirmish, the 2017 Doklam stand-off along Sino-
Bhutan Border and the 2020 Galwan Valley Scuffle. The LAC is approximately
3488 kilometres long.

7. Different Types of Border Management Force. Border management

involves facilitating the legitimate cross-border flow of people and trade while
20

concurrently preventing the entry of persons or goods that pose a threat to the
country or its population. In 2001 post Kargil War, Kargil Review Committee
followed by the GoM had strongly recommended the principle of “One Border One
Force” for better accountability.

8. One Border One Force and Concept. The concept is based on the principal
of making one type of force responsible for guarding particular border stretch, ensuring
that the force once deputed not to be used for law and order duties and counter
insurgencies, thus increasing its accountability and response. Accordingly at present
various parts of our borders are being manned and managed by the following forces:-

(a) Pak - IB Sect - BSF.

- LC & AGPL – Army / Combined.

(b) China (Eastern, Middle Sect, Western Sect) - ITBP.

(c) Nepal & Bhutan - SSB.

(d) Bangladesh - BSF.

(e) Myanmar - Assam Rifles.

9. Other Agencies.

(a) Customs.

(b) Local Police.

(c) Intelligence Officers from IB.

(d) Civil Administration.

(e) Youth Organisations such as NCC, Scouts, NSS etc.

Border Management

10. Creation of Department of Border Management. Department of Border

Management was created in the Ministry of Home Affairs in January, 2004 to pay
focused attention to the issues relating to management of international land and
coastal borders, strengthening of border policing & guarding, creation of infrastructure
like roads, fencing & floodlighting of borders and implementation of Border Area
Development Programme (BADP).
11. BADP. Department of Border Management under Ministry of Home
Affairs has been implementing a Border Area Development Programme (BADP)
through the State Governments. It aims to meet the special developmental needs of
the people living in remote and inaccessible areas situated near the international
border. Priority is given to those villages which are located within 0-10 Km from the
International Border and within that the villages identified by the Border Guarding
Forces (BGF) get higher priority and are known as strategic villages. Only after
21

saturation of 0-10 km villages, State Governments may take up the next set of villages
within the 0-20 Km distance.

12. Physical Means of Securing Borders. Various means of securing the

Borders are:-

(a) BOPs. To house border guarding personnel, to send regular patrols

and to interact with the nearby villages, border out posts (BOP) have been set
up all along the borders. Presently, the India-Pakistan border has 609 BOPs,
Indo-Nepal border 436 BOPs, Indo-Bhutan border 127 BOPs and the
Bangladesh border 802 BOPs. Ideal inter BOP distance is recommended to be
2.5 km.
(b) COBs. Along the Indo-Myanmar Border, Assam Rifles are
deployed in Company Operating Bases (COB) and not as per the BOP system.
The companies are deployed on all routes of ingress/egress and are
responsible to check infiltration, smuggling of arms, ammunition, drugs, fake
currency notes, etc.

(c) Integrated Check Posts (ICP). As part of efforts to improve the

infrastructure at border checkpoints, India is developing Integrated Check-
Posts (ICPs). An ICP is likely to house all regulatory agencies, such as
immigration, customs and border security. It will be a post along two
international borders which will facilitate cross border trade and movement of
people more efficiently and smoothly.

(d) Day and Ni Patrolling – On Foot/ Vehicle Mounted Patrols.

(e) Use of Electro-optical Surveillance Devices.

(f) Fencing and Floodlighting.

(g) Flag Meetings. A flag meeting is basically a meeting that is held at the
border or on the Line of Control or LAC by commanders on both sides, to
resolve local issues. A flag meeting could be held at the local or higher level on
smaller issues. These meeting are held at regular pre-arranged intervals or
there can be a special flag meeting.

Part II – Security Set up & management of Coastal Areas

13. Coastal security Organisation. The Coastal security Organisation of

the country was revamped in year 2009, post Mumbai terror attack. Various initiatives
were put in place by Government of India (GoI), both at central and state level to
ensure a vibrant coastal security organisation in order to ensure full proof security
setup, A national committee on strengthening maritime and coastal security
(NCSMCS) headed by cabinet secretary was created at GoI level. Similarly, an APEX
committee on coastal security at state levels was formulated, controlled by FOC-in-Cs
22

of all Naval commands also known as C-in-C Coastal Defence (towards coastal
security) with chief secretary of all states.
14. Various Stake Holders in Coastal Security. The sphere of activities in the
maritime environment is vast and the following agencies are the stake holders in
Coastal security of country: -
(a) Indian Navy.
(b) Coast Guard.
(c) State Marine Police.
(d) Customs.
(e) Fishers.
(f) Port authorities.
(g) Central and state Government departments.
15. This multiagency environment requires co-operation, and understanding of
each other’s strengths as well as limitations, to ensure fool proof security by optimum
exploitation of limited resources.
16. Role of Various Agencies towards coastal Security. The role of
various agencies involved in coastal security is enunciated below: -
(a) Indian Navy. The Indian Navy is responsible for overall Coastal
Defence of the Nation. The FOC-in-Cs of all commands are also designated as
C-in-C Coastal Defence for coastal security of country coastline depending
upon their Area of Operation (AOR).
(b). Indian Coast Guard. Indian Coast Guard is responsible for
Coastal Security in territorial waters including areas to be patrolled by Coastal
Police. ICG has been made responsible for coordination between Central and
State Agencies in all matters relating to Coastal Security
(c). Coastal Marine police. The State marine police is also called coastal
security group (CSG) headed by ADGP rank officer from police. ICG provides
necessary training and administrative and supportive to marine police on
regular basis. Marine police maintains a vigil on the beaches, fishing hamlets
and in inland waters along the coast of India.
(d). Regional Coastal Security Ops Centre (RCSOC). RCSOC
are set up at Ops centers of Regional Headquarters of ICG . All inputs related
to coastal security operations are analyzed at these centers for coordination
amongst all agencies involved in coastal security within territorial waters.
(e) Joint operations Centre (JOC). Joint Operation Centers(JOC)
are set up at Headquarters of all Naval Commands. The JOC is jointly manned
and operated by Navy and Coast Guard. It mainly co-ordinates coastal security
network with all stake holders.
17. Operational Philosophy. The Maritime agencies ensure security of
maritime assets in Indian EEZ with special focus to ODAs (Offshore Development
Assets) and maritime boundary areas with our maritime neighbours. The vulnerable
23

areas & points which include ODA, IMBL (international Maritime Boarder Line),
industrial hubs, tourist centers, atomic installations, Defence setup, creek areas and
island territories are considered critical areas to guard, demanding concentration of
efforts of the security agencies.
18. Tiered Security Mechanism-Zones of Responsibility. For coastal
security purpose, following a three tiered security mechanism for coastal surveillance:-
(a) Base line up to 12 NM. To be patrolled by Coastal Marine Police,
Customs, CISF and other security agencies available for coastal security.
(b) Base line up to 200 NM. To be patrolled by Indian Coast Guard
including the area for Coastal Marine Police, Customs and CISF.
(c) Beyond 200 NM. To be patrolled by Indian Navy.

19. Coastal Surveillance. Coastal surveillance is undertaken both through

surface units and air assets of Navy and Coast Guard on regular basis. Regular
coastal security exercises like ‘Sea Vigil’, ‘Trident’,‘Neptune’ etc., are conducted by
Navy and Coast Guard involving all stake holders on regular basis.
20. Coastal Surveillance Network. The Coastal Surveillance Network (CSN)
has been established at 46 sites along the Coast of India including Island territories to
monitor areas of high sensitivity and high traffic density. The coastal surveillance
network in the form of Radars, Electro Optic Sensors (EOS), Remote VHF and
Meteorology Equipment has been established on Light houses along the Mainland.

Part III – Security Set up & management of Air Force Stations

21. Components of Air Force Stations. For understanding the security set up
at an Air Force Station, let us take an example of a typical Air Force Station and the
type of units that are present in a base with aircrafts. An Air Force Station with a
runway will have one or more squadrons of aircraft (Fighter/ Transport/ Helicopter/
UAVs), it will have a fuel storage depot, weapon storage area, signals/communication
units, engineering units, logistics depot, armoury for small arms, weapon systems for
base defense, radars and other squadrons and units involved in daily support. All
bases are manned and operated by humans making them equally important targets.
24

22. Security of the Air Force Station is the overall responsibility of the Chief
Administrative Officer (CAdmO).

AOC / STN CDR

FLYING
COO C ADMO C ENG O
SQUADRO
N
ATC ET ACCOUNT EDUCATIO SIGNAL ARMAMENT
S N
FLIGHT
NAV CATERING SECURITY LOGISTICS MT
SAFETY

WORKS MEDICAL MCC REFUELLING

G
ADM TECH SQN

23. He is assisted by the Station Security Officer who has a dedicated team of
airmen under him for ensuring the proper functioning of the security setup. The
airmen belong to two different trades under Group Y (Non-Technical) namely Indian
Air Force (Police) {IAF(P)} and Indian Air Force (Security) {IAF(S)}.

24. There is also an element of the Defence Security Corps (DSC) posted to the
station to assist in the security. The strength of the DSC depends upon the size of
the station, the assets located there and the importance of the station in the overall
Air Force setup. The personnel of the DSC are retired Army soldiers who are
reemployed in this organization.

25. In addition to the above, some stations also have an element of the elite IAF
Garud Commando Special Forces.

26. The outer perimeter wall is guarded by the DSC personnel. Dedicated security
watchtowers are built at vantage points for the guards to keep a lookout for intruders.
Important places and installations inside the Air Force Station are guarded by IAF
personnel (airmen) during the night hours. Garud commandos regularly conduct night
or day patrols outside the perimeter wall. The IAF(P) carries out a check of all the
guard posts at odd hours of the night to ensure that all guards are alert and doing
their duty.

27. All personnel (officers, airmen or civilians) entering the station are checked
thoroughly at the main gate for their identity. Civilians are issued with daily passes
after noting down their details and nature of work during entry. The passes are
collected back during the exit. Thus, a record of people entering and leaving the
station is maintained.

28. The Station Security Officer maintains a close coordination with the local police
of the area and the village sarpanches. Regular meetings are held to exchange
valuable information regarding the threats to the station and movement of unknown
suspicious people.
1

CADET’S HAND BOOK (ARMY)

SPECIALISED SUBJECT
1

SD / SW (ARMY) SPECIALISED SUBJECTS

BLOCK SYLLABUS

Periods
S.No Subject
First Second Third Total
Year Year Year Periods

1 Armed Forces 3 3 3 9

2 Map Reading 9 9 6 24

3 Field Craft & Battle Craft 8 8 6 22

Introduction to Infantry Weapons

4 3 2 1 6
& Equipment

5 Military History 7 8 8 23

6 Communication 1 1 4 6

Total 31 31 28 90
1

SD/SW (ARMY) SPECIALISED SUBJECTS

INDEX

Page Number
S.No Subject
From To

1 Armed Forces 01 26

2 Map Reading 27 42

3 Field Craft & Battle Craft 43 66

4 Introduction to Infantry Weapons & Equipment 67 73

5 Military History 74 90

6 Communication 91 101
1

INDEX

Page
Ser
Chapter Lesson Year Periods Number
No
From To
Armed Forces
I 03
AF-1 Army, Police and Central Armed Police Forces 1 12
II 03
1.
2. AF-2 Modes of Entry into Army, Police and CAPF. III 03 13 26
Map Reading

3. MR-1 Introduction to Map Reading I 03 27 34

MR-2 Conduct of Map Reading I 06

II 09
4.. 35 42
III 06

Field Craft & Battle Craft

5. FC & Introduction to Field Craft and Battle Craft
I 03 43 45
BC-1
6. FC & Indication of landmark I 02
BC-2 II 02 46 47
III 02
7. FC & Observation, Camouflage & Concealment I 03
48 49
BC-3 II 03
8. FC & Fire and Move Capsule II 03
50 61
BC-4 III 03
9. BC & Knots, Lashing and Strecthers
III 01 62 66
FC-5
Introduction to Infantry Battalion and its Equipments
10. INF-1 Organisation of Infantry Battalion & its weapons I 03
II 02 67 73
III 01
Military History
11. MH-1 Biographies of Renowned Generals I 03
74 77
III 03
12. MH-2 War Heroes : Param Veer Chakra Awardees II 03 78 83
13. MH-3 Study of Battles of Indo-Pak Wars 1965, 1971, & Kargil I 02
II 02 84 88
III 02
14. MH-4 War Movies I 02
II 03 89 90
III 03
Communication
15. C-1 Introduction to Communication & Latest Trends III 03 91 97
16. C-2 Basic Communication Procedure I 01
II 01 98 101
III 01
13

CHAPTER 2 : MODES OF ENTRY TO ARMY, CAPF AND POLICE

Army

1. The Indian Army’s primary mission is to ensure the national security and defence of the Republic of
India from external threats and maintaining peace and security. It also provides aid to civil authorities in
maintaining essential services and conduct operations during Natural calamities (earthquake, flood, drought
etc.) and other disturbances such as communal riots.

Types of Commission

2. The Army offers both Permanent and Short Service Commission. Permanent Commission (PC) is
granted through the Indian Military Academy (IMA) Dehradun and Short Service Commission (SSC) is granted
through Officers Training Academy (OTA) Chennai:-
(a) Permanent Commission.

(i) NDA / AFMC - after 10+2 (Through UPSC).

(ii) Direct Entry (Through UPSC).
(iii) Engineering Graduates – TGC.
(iv) University Entry Scheme.
(v) Technical Entry Scheme 10 +2.
(vi) Army Cadet College Wing, after 10+2.
(vii) SCO / PCSL Entry from Regular Army.
(b) Short Service Commission.

(i) Non-Tech (Both Men & Women).

(ii) Tech (Both Men & Women).
(iii) NCC Special Entry (Both Men & Women).
(iv) Law Graduates (Both Men & Women).
Note. Details of eligibility criteria, duration and venue of training and other information is freely available
through newspapers or may be obtained from www.joinindianarmy.nic.in.

ENTRY SCHEMES OFFICERS (MEN AND WOMEN)

3. National Defence Academy (NDA).

Vacancies Per Course 320 (Twice a year)

Army – 208, Air Force – 70, Navy - 42
Notification Published in Jun and Dec, Notified by UPSC
Employment News and
leading Daily news Paper

Eligibility Criteria

Age 16 ½ to 19½ yrs as on first day of the month in which course is due to
commence
Qualification 12th Class of 10+2 System of Education of Equivalent for Army and with
Physics and Maths for AF/Navy
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply Online on UPSC Website as per dates given in the Notfication in
the months of Jun and Dec.
Likely SSB Date Sep to Oct for Jan Course and Jan to Apr for Jul Course
Date Commencement of Jan and Jul
Training
Training Academy NDA , Khadakwasla, Pune
Duration of Training 3 Yrs at NDA and 1 Yr at IMA
14

4. 10+2 Technical Entry Scheme (TES).

Vacancies Per Course 90 (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Notified by DG Rtg AG’s branch IHQ of MOD(Army) in May/Jun &
Employment News and leading Oct/Nov
Daily news Paper

Eligibility Criteria

Age 16 ½ to 19½ yrs as on first day of the month in which course is due
to commence
Qualification 10+2 Physics, Chemistry & Maths (aggregate 70% and above to
apply)
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Aug to Oct and Feb to Apr
Date Commencement of Training Jan and Jul
Training Academy OTA Gaya
Duration of Training 5 Yrs (1 Yr OTA GAYA & 4 Yrs CTWS) Permanent Commission
after 4 Yrs.
Phase-I- 01 Year Pre-commissioning Training at OTA Gaya & 03
Years at CME Pune/MCTE Mhow/MCEME Secunderabad
Phase-II- 01 Year Post commission training at CME Pune/MCTE
Mhow/MCEME Secunderabad

5. Indian Military Academy Direct (IMA).

Vacancies Per Course 200 (Twice a year).

Notification Published in Employment News Notified by UPSC under the aegis of CDSE in Jul and
and leading Daily news Paper Nov

Eligibility Criteria

Age 19 to 24 years
Qualification Graduation from Recognised University.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply Online on UPSC Website as per dates given in
the Notfication in the months of Jul and Nov.
Likely SSB Date Aug / Sep and Feb / Mar
Date Commencement of Training Jan and Jul
Training Academy IMA, Dehradun
Duration of Training 1 ½ Years
15

6. Officers Training Academy (Non-Technical Men).

Vacancies Per Course 175 (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Employment News Notified by UPSC under the aegis of CDSE in Jul and
and leading Daily news Paper Nov

Eligibility Criteria

Age 19 to 25 yrs
Qualification Graduation from Recognised University.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply Online on UPSC Website as per dates given in the
Notfication in the months of Jul and Nov.
Likely SSB Date Nov / Dec and May / Jun
Date Commencement of Training Oct and Apr
Training Academy OTA Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

7. Judge Advocate General (JAG) Men.

Vacancies Per Course 10(As Notified)(Twice a year)

Notification Published in Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in Jul/Aug
Employment News and leading and Jan/Feb
Daily news Paper

Eligibility Criteria

Age 21 to 27 years
Qualification Graduate with LLB with 55% marks. Eligible for Registration with Bar
Council of India / State.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg www.joinindianarmy.nic.in
as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Dec / Jan and Jul / Aug
Date Commencement of Apr and Oct
Training
Training Academy OTA, Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

8. NCC (Spl) Entry Men.

Vacancies Per Course 50 (Twice a Year)

Notification Published in Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in Jun and Dec
Employment News and
leading Daily news Paper

Eligibility Criteria

Age 19 to 25 years
Qualification Graduate with 50% Aggregate marks, Two Years’ service in NCC
Senior Div Army with minimum 'B' Grade in 'C' Certificate Exam.
Marital Status Un Married
16

How to Apply Apply offline as Notified in the Notification through NCC Dte
Likely SSB Date Dec / Jan and Jun / July
Date Commencement of Apr and Oct
Training
Training Academy OTA, Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

9. University Entry Scheme (UES).

Vacancies Per Course 60 (As Notified) (Once a Year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in
News and leading Daily news Paper Jun/Jul

Eligibility Criteria

Age 18 to 24 years
Qualification Pre Final year students of Notified Engineering Streams
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Nov to Feb
Date Commencement of Training Jul
Training Academy IMA, Dehradun
Duration of Training One Year

10. Technical Graduate Course (TGC) Engineers.

Vacancies Per Course 60 (As Notified) (Twice a Year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in
News and leading Daily news Paper Mar/Apr and Sep/Oct.

Eligibility Criteria

Age 20 to 27 years
Qualification BE / B Tech in notified streams of Engineering
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Mar / Apr and Sep / Oct
Date Commencement of Training Jan and Jul
Training Academy IMA, Dehradun
Duration of Training One Year
17

11. Short Service Commission Tech (Men).

Vacancies Per Course 100 (As Notified) (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in
News and leading Daily news Paper Jun / Jul and Dec/Jan

Eligibility Criteria

Age between 20 to 27 years

Qualification Engineering Degree in notified stream
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Dec-Jan and Jun-Jul
Date Commencement of Training Apr and Oct
Training Academy OTA, Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

12. Army Education Corps (AEC) Men.

Vacancies Per Course 20 (As Notified) (Twice a Year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in
News and leading Daily news Paper Mar/Apr and Sep/Oct

Eligibility Criteria

Age 23 to 27 years
Qualification MA / MSc in 1st or 2nd division in notified subjects from
recognised university.
Marital Status Married and Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Mar / Apr and Sep / Oct
Date Commencement of Training Jan and Jul
Training Academy IMA, Dehradun
Duration of Training One Year

13. Army Cadet College (ACC).

Vacancies Per Course 75 (Twice in a Year)

Tentative Month of Notified by MP Directorate / AGs Br through Units in Mar and Aug
Publication of Notification

Eligibility Criteria

Age 20 to 27 years , minimum service of two years one can apply

Qualification 10+2 Pattern Class with 12th pass or Equivalent. Should have qualified
ACC written test
Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Sep to Nov for Jan Course Mar to May for Jul Course
Training Academy ACC Wing at IMA, Dehradun
18

Duration of Training Four Years (Three Years in ACC Wing & One Year at IMA)
14. Permanent Commission (PC SL).

Vacancies Per Course 100 (Once in a Year)

Tentative Month of Notified by MP Dte / AGs Br through Units in Apr and Jul
Publication of Notification

Eligibility Criteria

Age Maximum age 42 years, 45 years for Engineers & 45 years for IOB
Minimum service 10 years
Qualification Matric & Above
Marital Status Unmarried / Married Serving JCOs / NCOs excluding Sepoys
Likely Date of SSB Sep and Oct for Jul Course
Training Academy AEC Centre & College, Pachmarhi & IMA, Dehradun
Duration of Training Eight Weeks at AEC Centre & College, Pachmarhi & Four Weeks at
IMA

15. Special Commissioned Officer (SCO).

Vacancies Per Course 100 (Twice in a Year)

Tentative Month of Publication of Notified by MP Directorate / AGs Br through Units in Apr and Jul
Notification

Eligibility Criteria

Age Between 30 to 35 years. minimum service of five years can apply

Qualification Matric with One Year Diploma or above

Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Jul/Aug for Jan Course & Nov/Dec for Jul Course
Training Academy OTA, Gaya
Duration of Training Eight Weeks at AEC Centre & College, Pachmarhi & One Year at
OTA, Gaya

16. Territorial Army (TA).

Vacancies Per Course Notified by Line Directorate (Twice in a Year)

Tentative Month of Publication of Notified by TA Directorate
Notification

Eligibility Criteria

Age 18 to 42 years
Qualification Graduate from a recognised university
Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Aug / Sep & May / Jun
Training Recruit Training. 30 days under TA Battalion.
Annual Training Camp. Two calendar month in each
training year.
Post Commission Training. Three month in IMA within
two years of commissioning.
19

17. Remount & Veterinary Corps (RVC).

Vacancies Per Course Notified by Line Directorate

Tentative Month of Publication of Notification Nov / Dec , Notified by RVC
Directorate

Eligibility Criteria

Age 21- 32 years

Qualification BVSc & AH
Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Sep / Oct
Training Academy RVC, Meerut
Duration of Training Three months

18. Army Medical Corps (Non-Technical).

Vacancies Per Course Notified by Line Directorate

Tentative Month of Publication of Notification Notified by AMC Directorate

Eligibility Criteria

Age Max 42 years

Qualification Minimum Matric
Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Nov / Dec
Training Academy AMC Centre & College.
Duration of Training Three months

19. Army Postal Service (APS).

Vacancies Per Course Notified by Line Directorate

Tentative Month of Publication of Notified by APS Directorate
Notification

Eligibility Criteria

Age Max 45 years

Qualification Minimum Matric
Marital Status Unmarried / Married
Likely Date of SSB Sep /Oct

WOMEN ENTRY SCHEMES

20. Short Service Commission (Non-Technical) Women.

Vacancies Per Course 12 (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Employment News Notified by UPSC under the aegis of CDSE in July and
and leading Daily news Paper Nov
20

Eligibility Criteria

Age 19 to 25 years
Qualification Graduation from Recognized University.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply Online on UPSC Website as per dates given in
the Notfication in the months of Jul and Nov.
Likely SSB Date Jun / July and Nov / Dec
Date Commencement of Training Oct and Apr
Training Academy OTA Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

21. NCC Special Entry Scheme (Women).

Vacancies Per Course Four (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in Jun and
Employment News and leading Dec
Daily news Paper

Eligibility Criteria

Age 19 to 25 years
Qualification Graduate with 50% Aggregate marks, Two Years service in NCC
Senior Div Army with minimum 'B' Grade in 'C' Certificate Exam.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online as Notified in the Notification through NCC Dte.
Likely SSB Date Dec / Jan and Jun / July
Date Commencement of Training Apr and Oct
Training Academy OTA, Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

22. Short Service Commission for Women (SSCW) JAG.

Vacancies Per Course Four (As Notified) (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in
News and leading Daily news Paper Jul/Aug and Jan/Feb.

Eligibility Criteria

Age 21 to 27 years
Qualification Graduate with LLB with 55% marks. Eligible for Registration
with Bar Council of India / State.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.
Likely SSB Date Dec / Jan and Jun / Jul
Date Commencement of Training Apr and Oct
Training Academy OTA, Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks
21

23. Short Service Commission (Technical) Women.

Vacancies Per Course 20 (As Notified) (Twice a year)

Notification Published in Employment Notified by Directorate General Recruiting / AG Branch in Jun
News and leading Daily news Paper / Jul and Dec/Jan

Eligibility Criteria

Age 20 to 27 years
Qualification Engineering Degree in notified stream.
Marital Status Un Married
How to Apply Apply online on Official website of DG Rtg
www.joinindianarmy.nic.in as Notified in the Notification.

Likely SSB Date Dec-Jan and Jun-July.

Date Commencement of Training Apr & Oct
Training Academy OTA Chennai
Duration of Training 49 Weeks

JCOS & OTHER RANKS

24. Educational Qualification and Age Criteria.

Ser. No Category Education Age

(1) Soldier (General Cl 10th /Matric pass with Min 45% mks in aggregate and 17 ½ - 21
Duty) (All Arms) Min 33% in each subject. Yrs
(2) Soldier Technical (a) Sol Tech 10+2/Intermediate Exam pass in Science 17 ½ - 23
(Technical Arms, with Physics, Chemistry, Maths and English with min 50% Yrs
Artillery, Army Air marks in aggregate and min 40% marks in each subject.
Defence) (b)Sol Tech (Aviation & Ammunition
Examiner)10+2/Intermediate Exam pass in Science with
Physics, Chemistry, Maths and English with min 50%
marks in aggregate and min 40% marks in each subject.

(3) Soldier Clerk / Store 10+2/Intermediate Examination Pass in any stream (Arts, 17 ½ - 23
Keeper Technical Commerce, Science) with min 60% marks in aggregate Yrs
(All Arms) and min 50% in each subject. Securing 50% in English
and Maths/Accounts/Book keeping in Class 12th is
mandatory.
(4) Soldier Nursing 10+2/Intermediate Exam pass in Science with Physics, 17 ½ - 23
Assistant (Army Chemistry, Biology and English with min 50% marks in Yrs
Medical Corps) aggregate and min 40% in each subject.
(5) Sepoy Pharma 10+2 or equivalent exam passed with Physics, Chemistry, 19 - 25 Yrs
(Army Medical Biology and English, qualified in D Pharma with minimum
Corps) 55% marks in aggregate and registered with State
Pharmacy Council/Pharmacy Council of India. Individual
qualified in B Pharma with minimum 50% marks and
registered with State Pharmacy Council/Pharmacy Council
of India will also be eligible.
22

(6) Soldier Nursing 10+2/Intermediate Exam pass in Science with Physics, 17 ½ - 23

Assistant Veterinary Chemistry, Biology and English with min 50% marks in Yrs
(Remount Veterinary aggregate and min 40% in each subject.
Corps)
(7) Soldier Tradesmen i) 10th Simple Pass. 17 ½ - 23
(All Arms except ii) No stipulation in aggregate percentage but should have Yrs
Syce, Mess Keeper scored min 33% in each subject.
and House Keeper )
(8) Soldier Tradesmen i) 8th Simple Pass. 17 ½ - 23
(Syce, Mess Keeper ii) No stipulation in aggregate percentage but should have Yrs
and House Keeper) scored min 33% in each subject.

(9) Survey Automated BA/BSc with Maths. Must have also passed 20-25 Yrs
Cartographer 12thclass(10+2) or equivalent with Maths and Science as
(Engineers) main subjects.
(10) Junior As per the Notification. 25-34 Yrs
Commissioned
Officer Religious
Teacher (All Arms)
(11) Junior Diploma in Hotel Management and Catering Technology. 21-27 Yrs
Commissioned
Officer Catering
(Army Service
Corps)
(12) Havildar Education Group X - MA / MSc / MCA or BA / BSc / BCA / BSc (IT) 20-25 Yrs
(Army Education with B Ed Group Y - BSc/BA/BCA/B Sc (IT) (w/o B Ed.)
Corps)
(13) Soldier (General Minimum education qualification is Matric /10th/SSLC or 17 ½ - 21
Duty) Women equivalent with 45% marks in aggregate and minimum Yrs
Military police 33% marks in each subject studied at matric/10th/SSLC #
level, without mentioning any specific subjects.
(Note: # Upper Age limit will be relaxable upto 30 yrs of
age (as on date of joining training) in respect of widows of
Defence personnel who have died in harness.)

POLICE ORGANISATIONS AND OTHER CENTRAL ARMED POLICE FORCES

Entry into Police Services as an Officer

25. A career in Police or Law Enforcement Service holds huge prospects for courageous and dedicated
candidates. The constant increase in crime rates, and the resulting security conscious society, has increased
the demand for police jobs in India and across the world. Indian Police Services (IPS) is the premier and apex
police service of the country. The Indian Police Service (IPS) was formed in the year of 1948 under the cadre
Ministry of Home Affairs.

26. There are two ways of getting into Indian Police Services: -

(a) Passing All India Civil Services Examination conducted by All India UPSC Civil Services
Examinations.
(b) Promotions from State Cadre Police Services.

27. A candidate recruited in the IPS has to undergo a tough schedule of training at the police Academy,
and within 4 to 5 years one can expect to be a Superintendent of police or Deputy Commissioner of Police.
An IPS officer in due course of time may expect to rise to the levels of Director General of Police in a State or
Directorate General of any Central Para Military Forces or Other investigating / law enforcement agencies.
After IPS, comes the State Police Service (SPS), The Policing is a State subject and all States and Union
territories has its own police forces headed by a Directorate General of Police. The recruitment to SPS is also
on the same pattern as that of IPS. The only difference is that the recruitment of SPS is made by the state
23

public service commission concerned, through usually a combined competitive examination for state civil
services. However in case of union territories, recruitment of SPS is also made by Union Public Service
Commission through the civil services examinations as one of the Group ‘B’ services. The candidates selected
for State Police Services are usually posted as Deputy Superintendent of Police (Deputy SP) or Assistant
Commissioner of Police. On prescribed satisfactory service in the SPS, the officers are nominated for the IPS.
Central Armed Police Forces Cadre and Personnel

28. The Central Armed Police Forces have their own officers and personnel to these forces are recruited
directly as well as obtained from respective departments. Recruitment is conducted mainly in three modes.

(a) Gazetted Officers. Officers in CAPFs are recruited through Central Armed Police Forces
(Assistant Commandants) Examination conducted by UPSC. They are appointed as Assistant
Commandants and are Gazetted Officers generally referred as DAGOs (Directly Appointed Gazetted
Officers). DEGOs (Departmental Entry Gazetted Officers) are those who have been promoted through
departmental exams conducted internally for Subordinate Officers.

(b) Subordinate Officers. Sub Inspectors are recruited through competitive examination
conducted by Staff Selection Commission and they are referred as DASOs (Directly Appointed
Subordinate Officers). DESOs (Departmental Entry Subordinate Officers) are those who have been
promoted through departmental exams conducted internally for Constables, Head Constables and
Assistant Sub Inspectors.

(c) Constables. Constables are recruited through competitive examination conducted by Staff
Selection Commission. Apart from above modes, CAPFs conduct recruitment for specialized posts
such as Engineers, Doctors etc. among DAGOs and Wireless operators, Technicians, Nursing Staff
etc amongst subordinate officers and constables directly under their own authority.

Assistant Commandant

29. Out of total vacancies of Assistant Commandants in CAPF, 50% are filled by Direct Recruitment
(including 10% from SSCO), 33% by promotion from Inspector to AC & 17% by limited Departmental
Competitive examination conducted by CAPFs.

Assistant Commandant (Technical)

30. Minimum qualifications is BSc (Physics, Chemistry & Mathematics) and above with Electronics stream
are deputed for appointment in the rank of Assistant Commandant (Technical) form the executive posts, after
they undergo Battalion Signal Officers Course. These officers later on work in higher posts in hierarchy, apart
from performing General duties in various ranks, since these Officers are also part of General Cadre of
Officers.

31. Eligibility Criteria for Entries into Police & CAPF.

Enrolment
Rank Age Educational Qualification Relaxation Physical Standards
Criteria
33% of SI Relaxable by
(GD) are Relaxable Height -170 5 cms for
filled by for Cms candidates
Direct SC/ST/OBC from Hill
recruitment in areas
20 to (Including accordance Chest - 80- 77-82 cms for
Degree of a recognized
Inspector 25 10% from with the 85 Cms STs
University or equivalent
years ESM), 50% instructions
by issued by
promotion, the Govt Weight -
17% by from time to Proportionate -do-
limited time. to height
Departmental
Matric with 3-year Diploma Relaxable Height Gen-
Assistant 18 to
in Radio and TV technology for 170 Cms Tribal/Adivasi-
Sub 25
/ Electronics / Tele- SC/ST/OBC 162.5 Cms
Inspector years
Communications / Computer in
24

Radio / Electrical / Mechanical / accordance Chest - 80- 77-82Cms for

Mechanic Engineering / Domestic with the 85 Cms STs
appliance from an Institution instructions
recognized by State/Central issued by
Government or 10+2 or the Govt
Intermediate or equivalent from time to Weight -
with Physics, Chemistry and time. Proportionate -do-
Mathematics, having 50% to height
marks in Physics, Chemistry
and Mathematics from a
recognized Board
Relaxable Relaxable by
for Height -170 5 Cms for
Matric or equivalent plus two
SC/ST/OBC Cms candidates
years ITI certificate in Radio
in from Hill
and TV/ Electronics or
Head 18 to accordance areas
Intermediate or 10+2 or
Constable 23 with the Chest - 80- 77-82Cms for
equivalent with Physics,
(Operator) years instructions 85 Cms STs
Chemistry and Mathematics
issued by
from a recognized Board of Weight -
the Govt
Education Proportionate -do-
from time to
time. to height
Matric or equivalent plus two Relaxable by
Relaxable
years ITI certificate in Height -170 5 Cms for
for
engine/fitter/Diesel Cms candidates
SC/ST/OBC
Mechanic/Automobile/Motor from Hill
in
Mechanic from an Institution areas
Head 18 to accordance
recognized by State/Central Chest - 80- 77-82Cms for
Constable 23 with the
Government or equivalent or 85 Cms STs
(Fitter) years instructions
10+2 or Intermediate or its
issued by
equivalent with Physics, Weight -
the Govt
Chemistry and Mathematics Proportionate -do-
from time to
from a recognized Board of to height
time.
Education
Relaxable Relaxable by
Height (cms)
for 5 Cms for
Male -170
SC/ST/OBC candidates
Female – 157
in from Hill
18 to accordance areas
Matriculation/10th / 12th class
Constable 23 with the Chest - 80- 77-82Cms for
pass
years instructions 85 Cms STs
issued by
the Govt Weight -
from time to Proportionate -do-
time. to height

32. The aspirants seeking employment into the Police & CAPF must go through their respective websites
of Police & CAPF to ascertain the latest enrolment conditions which are notified from time to time.

CONCLUSION

33. Career prospectus into armed forces, police, other Police Investigation agencies, law enforcement
agencies, Central Para Military Forces and State Police organizations are controlled and recruited by their
respective head of departments by online registrations. A candidate if desirous mandatorily has to register
individual online after entering his criteria. As and when the vacancies are allotted by UPSC, Central Staff
Selection Commission, State Public Service commission or any other Government agencies, intimation to
individual is given via Email or in website. Service in Police organization and Central Para Military Forces is
also a better career options to serve the country
25

SUMMARY

1. The Indian Army has seven Commands ie. Northern, Western, Central, Southern, South Western,
Eastern and Training Command.

2. The Navy is organised into three Commands i.e Western Naval Command, Eastern Naval Command
and Southern Naval Command.

3. The Air Force is organized into seven commands i.e Western Air Command, Central Air Command,
Eastern Air Command, South Western Air Command, Southern Air Command. Training Command and
Maintenance Command.

4. The Combat Commands of Indian Army comprises Corps, Division and Brigades. These are
commanded by an Officer of the rank of Lieutenant General, Major General and Brigadier respectively.

5. There are three major categories of army based on their role:-

(a) Fighting arms - Armour, Infantry and Meachanised Infantry.

(b) Supporting Arms- Artillery, Engineers, Army Aviation, Army Air Defence and Signals.
(c) Supporting Services – Army Service Corps, Army Medical Corps, Army Ordnance Corps,
Corps of Electronic and Mechanical Engineers etc.

6. Field Marshal is an honorary rank given to a General for his invaluable services rendered to our
country.

7. Admiral of the Fleet is an honorary rank given to an admiral for his invaluable services and will continue
to serve the rest of his term with the honorary rank.

8. Marshal of the Air Force is an honorary rank given to an Air Chief Marshal for his invaluable services.

9. Indian Armed Forces render honours and awards to the personnel excelling during peace and war.

10. Entry into Police Services as an Officer.

(a) Passing All India Civil Services Examination conducted by All India UPSC Civil Services
Examinations.
(b) Promotions from State Cadre Police Services.

11. The other Police organizations are as under:-

(a) Border Security Force.

(b) Central Industrial Security Force.
(c) Central Reserve Police Force.
(d) Indo-Tibetan Border Police.
(e) National Security Guards.
(f) Special Protection Group.
(g) Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB).
(h) Central Bureau of Investigation.
(j) Indian Income-tax Department.
(k) Directorate of Revenue Intelligence.
(l) Central Economic Intelligence Bureau.
(m) Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence.
(n) National Investigation Agency.
(o) Narcotics Control Bureau.
(p) Bureau of Police Research and Development (BPRD).
(q) National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB).
(r) Central Forensic Science Laboratory.
(s) National Institute of Criminology and Forensic Sciences.
(t) State & Union Territory Police.
26

12. Other Central Investigation and Intelligence Agencies are as under:-

(a) Central Bureau of Investigation.

(b) Indian Income-tax Department.
(c) Directorate of Revenue Intelligence.
(d) Central Economic Intelligence Bureau.
(e) Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence.
(f) National Investigation Agency.
(g) Narcotics Control Bureau.
(h) Bureau of Police Research and Development (BPRD).
(i) National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB).
(j) Central Forensic Science Laboratory.
(k) National Institute of Criminology and Forensic Sciences.
(l) State Police.
(m) Reserved State armed police forces & their Role.
(n) Criminal Investigation Department.
(o) Traffic police.

13. Central Armed Police Forces Cadre and Personnel.

(a) Gazetted Officers.

(b) Subordinate Officers.
(c) Constables.
35

CHAPTER II : CONDUCT OF MAP READING

TYPES OF BEARING AND USE OF SERVICE PROTRACTOR

Bearing and Its Conversion Methods

1. Types of Bearing. The clock wise angle formed by a straight line joining two points and direction of
NORTH, is called the bearing between the two points. A bearing is always measured clockwise. They are three
types as given below:-

(a) Grid Bearing. Measured on the map

from the Grid North by the help of a
protractor.
(b) Magnetic Bearing. Measured from
Magnetic North by the compass.
(c) True Bearing. Calculated by finding
out the relation of True NORTH and Grid
NORTH or Magnetic NORTH.

2. To Convert a Magnetic Bearing to a Grid

Bearing. Suppose the bearing of a certain point P is measured with a compass and is found to be 1600. To
convert this Magnetic Bearing to a True Bearing, follow under mentioned steps:-
(a) First find out the Magnetic Variation of the Area. Magnetic Variation is given on the Top Right
corner of each Map.
(b) Suppose 50 is the Magnetic Variation of the area. Now subtract this Magnetic Variation to the
Magnetic Bearing.
(c) The resultant is the Grid Bearing i.e. 1550

3. To Convert Grid Bearing to Magnetic Bearing.

(a) Measure the Grid Bearing of an object on the map with help of the service protractor from your
own position.
(b) Suppose the Grid Bearing of the object is 1500.
(c) Now, find out the Magnetic Variation of the area with the help of Map (Magnetic Variation is
given on the Top right corner of the map). Suppose Magnetic Variation of the area is 6 0.
(d) Now, add this Magnetic Variation to the Grid Bearing.
(e) The resultant will be the Magnetic Bearing of the object i.e. 1560.

4. Back Bearing. It is bearing taken opposite of original position of

object. The rule is that if the bearing is less than 1800 add 1800 and if bearing
is more than 1800 then subtract 1800. For example:-
(a) If forward bearing of an object is 700 then its back bearing will be 1800 +
700 = 2500.
(b) If forward bearing of an object is 240 then its back bearing will be 240 0-
1800= 600.

Service Protractor and its Uses

5. The service protractor "A" Mark IV is an instrument used for plotting and measuring bearing on the
map. It is an essential link between the compass and the map. With the help of the protractor the magnetic
bearings have been converted to grid bearing and transferred to the map.

Description

6. The protractor is made of

cardboard or ivories (flexible material)
and it measures 6 inches long and 2
inches wide.

Scale of Protractors

7. The main purpose of the protractor is to measure angles and bearings as described in the preceding
36

paragraphs. The protractor also shows on both its faces a number of the more common map scales. The
respective scale lines are drawn out and divided into primary and secondary divisions in exactly the same way
as at the bottom of the map.

Measuring a Bearing

8. The angle can be measured by drawing a line from the graduation to the point zero on the protractor.
The required angle will be the gap between this line and the line joining the zero.

Uses of Protractor

9. The service protractor is an essential item of Map Reading. With its help one can:-

(a) Plot and measure bearing on paper or on a map. For bearing between 0 and 180 degrees
their Zero edge must be on the LEFT and for 180 degrees -360 degrees it must be on the RIGHT.
(b) Measure distance in inches / cm correct up to l/100th
(c) Measure distance in yards, meters or miles on a map by using the appropriate scale
(d) For using the diagonal scale one must use an intermediate agent. Mark off the distance to be
measured on the straight edge of a paper or by means of a divider and then put the paper or divider
on the diagonal scale and measure.

Prismatic Compass & Its Use and GPS

10. The magnetic compass an instrument containing a magnetized pointer which shows the direction of
magnetic north and bearings from it. The magnetic compass is used extensively in ships, aircraft and the
various branches of the army to find and maintain direction. The Prismatic Compass is an accurate and
reliable instrument of great value except during a "magnetic storm" or when subject to strong local magnetic
field e.g. in polar regions. With the prismatic compass one can measure magnetic bearing on the ground.

Types of Compass and Acquiring A Bearing

11. Types of Compass and Taking Bearing. There are two types of prismatic compass, the dry and
liquid filled. Liquid type is easier to use though it is less sensitive.

12. Description. Various parts are shown below:-

13. How to Take a Bearing

(a) Open the lid of compass.

(b) Turn the prism casing over.
(c) Put your thumb through the ring.
(d) Put your forefinger underneath the
compass & hold it to horizontal level.
(e) Bring the prism up to the eye.
(f) See through the prism via hairline to
object.
(g) Read the bearing.
37

Navigation by compass and GPS

14. Navigation by Compass. Sometimes it may be necessary to march by night or in thick jungle
area in the direction of a certain point; since the point may not be visible in darkness or thick vegetation. In
such a situation follow the steps mentioned below:-

(a) Calculate the bearing from the Map i.e Grid

Bearing
(b) Convert it to the magnetic bearing and
cater for the compass error to arrive at a figure (say
250 degree), the compass must now be set to this
figure to march on it.
(c) Unscrew the clamping screw
(d) Rotate the milled vane to 25 till it comes
exactly on the “lubber line”
(e) Tighten the clamping screw
(f) Compass is now set for 250 degree
(g) To obtain the direction of march, open the
lid fully and keep the compass on the palm.
(h) Now turn left or right till arrow head comes under the direction mark
(i) Direction of march is given by the direction in which tongue is pointing.

15. Compass Error. Sometimes due to the presence of impurities in the material of which a compass is
made or other reasons, the magnetic needle may not point toward the magnetic NORTH but a little to the
EAST or WEST of it. This deviation of the magnetic needle in the compass from the magnetic NORTH is
termed compass error.

16. Global Positioning System. Global Positioning System (GPS) refers to a system of satellites and
receivers that allows people and devices to pin point their precise location on the earth. The first GPS satellite
was launched in 1974. GPS is funded and controlled by the United States, Department of Defence. Present
technology provides very handy and accurate navigation. GPS is used by:-

(a) Commonly used in day to day life by general public like.

(b) Commonly used in day to day life by general public like for travelling purposes.
(c) Fishermen and hikers to navigate.
(d) Armed Forces, inbuilt its equipment and in uses in battlefields.

SETTING OF A MAP, FINDING NORTH AND OWN POSITION

Map Setting by Various Methods

17. Setting of Map. A map is said to be set or oriented when it is placed such that it corresponds
directly with the ground i.e. when true NORTH on the map points to true NORTH on the ground. There are
two methods of setting a map - by compass and by objects on the ground.

Setting by Compass

18. Draw a line showing magnetic NORTH from a point on a grid line.
Open the compass and lay it flat on the map over the above drawn diagram,
which will show the magnetic variation so that the hair line on the window lies
along the magnetic NORTH line on the diagram. Then turn both the map and
the compass till the needle points along the hair line. The map is now set,
since the magnetic NORTH line on the map is pointing in the direction of
magnetic NORTH as indicated by the compass needle.

19. Finding North and own Position Without Compass. The position of NORTH can be discovered
by one of the following methods :-

(a) Equal Altitude Method.

(i) Take a fairly large piece of paper or card board and spread it flat on the ground. In
the centre fix a pencil or piece of wood perpendicular to the ground. It can be done with the
38

help of a coin fixed at the base of pencil or wood with sealing wax or by directly pushing it in
the ground.

(ii) Wait till after mid-day until the sun has moved around sufficiently to throw another
shadow as indicated by the dotted line AD i.e. of the same.

(b) By Stars. In the Northern hemisphere, the Pole star indicates the position of True North to
within 2 degree. It is a bright star and it can be found by protruding a line from Great Bear. The pole
star will be found slightly off this line on the side remote from the remaining stars of the Great Bear.

20. Methods of Finding own Position on Map.

(a) By resection method or Compass method.

(b) By Inspection method.

21. Resection with Compass Method.

(a) Recognise three prominent features (A, B, C) on

map and on the ground as well. These three prominent
features must not be more than 180 or less than 30 apart.
They should be as far as possible and clearly visible. The
bearing of these points be taken and converted into Grid
bearings.
(b) Then, on the map the back bearings from these
points must be plotted, and the point of intersection will
be the required position.
(c) In order to do an accurate resection, three or more objects are necessary. But in that case if
the three rays do not intersect at the same point, a triangle of error is obtained. The centre of triangle
is the point of your own position.

22. By Inspection Method. By inspections is meant a careful and detailed study of the ground and
features both on the map and the ground and features on the map and on the ground. The method consists
of:-
(a) Setting the map.
(b) Recognition of general area of own position on the map.
(c) A close study of the ground details.

MAP TO GROUNG, GROUND TO MAP

Map to Ground

23. To find out the details of map on ground is known as map to ground. Following methods are used to
identify objects from map to ground:-

(a) Bearing and Distance Method. With the help of bearing and distance, find out own
position. Find out the distance of the object to be identified on ground with the help of a scale on the
map. Using service protractor, find out the bearing of the object and convert it into magnetic bearing.
Set the magnetic bearing on compass and look for the object in the given bearing. Estimating the
distance on ground the object will be identified.

(b) Direction and Distance Method. Draw a line on the map between own position and
object to be identified. Calculate its distance and using any of the following methods find the direction
of the object:-

(i) With the help of a sight rule find the ground direction of the object.

(ii) With the help of two points on the map estimate the ground direction.

(iii) Place a foot ruler /pencil at own position and align it with line of the map.

(iv) Place a pin each at own position and at the object on the map. Align both pins and
find general direction.
39

(c) By Estimation Method. In this method measuring bearing, distance and direction, object is
identified with the help of other details in the proximity of the object.
Ground to Map

24. To find out an object indicated on ground on the map is called ground to map.

GOOGLE MAPS & APPLICATIONS

Google Maps

25. Google Maps is a web mapping service developed by Google. It offers satellite imagery, aerial
photography, street maps, 360° panoramic views of streets (Street View), real-time traffic conditions, and route
planning for traveling by foot, car, bicycle and air (in beta), or public transportation. Google Maps' satellite
view is a "top-down" or "birds eye" view; most of the high-resolution imagery of cities is aerial photography
taken from aircraft flying, while most other imagery is from satellites. Google Maps used a variant of the
Mercator projection, and therefore could not accurately show areas around the poles.

Use of Goggle Maps & Applications

26. Directions and Transit. Google Maps provide a

route planner, allowing users to find available directions through
driving, public transportation, walking, or biking. Screen shot of
Google Maps with traffic option enabled traffic conditions. Google
offering traffic data as a coloured overlay on top of roads and
motorways to represent the speed of traffic. Crowd sourcing is used
to obtain the GPS-determined locations of a large number of
cellphone users, from which live traffic maps are produced.

Business Listings

27. Google collates business listings from multiple on-line and off-line sources. To reduce
duplication in the index, Google's algorithm combines listings automatically based on address, phone number,
or geo code, but sometimes information for separate businesses will be inadvertently merged with each other,
resulting in listings inaccurately incorporating elements from multiple businesses. Google allows business
owners to verify their own business data through Google My Business, and has also recruited volunteers to
check and correct ground truth data.

Indoor Maps

28. In March 2011, indoor maps were added to Google Maps, giving users the ability to navigate
themselves within buildings such as airports, museums, shopping malls, big-box stores, universities, transit
stations, and other public spaces (including underground facilities).

Google Local Guides

29. Google Local Guides is a program launched by Google

Maps to enable its users to contribute to Google Maps and
provide them additional perks and benefits for the work. The
program is partially a successor to Google Map Maker as
features from the former program became integrated into the
website and app. The program consists of adding reviews,
photos, basic information, videos and correcting information such
as wheelchair accessibility.
40

Mobile App

30. Google Maps is available as a mobile app for the Android and
iOS mobile operating systems. The Android app was first released in
September 2008, though the GPS-localization feature had been in
testing on cellphones since 2007.Up until iOS 6, the built-in maps
application on the iOS operating system was powered by Google
Maps. However, with the announcement of iOS 6 in June 2012, Apple
announced that they had created their own Apple Maps mapping
service, which officially replaced Google Maps when iOS 6 was
released on September 19, 2012. However, at launch, Apple Maps
received significant criticism from users due to inaccuracies, errors
and bugs.

Features

31. The Google Maps apps for iOS and Android have many of
the same features, including turn-by-turn navigation, street view, and
public transit information. Google Maps announced its new offline
functionality, but with various limitations downloaded area cannot
exceed 120,000 square kilo meters and require considerable amount of storage space. In January 2017,
Google added a feature exclusively to Android that will, in some U.S. cities, indicate the level of difficulty in
finding available parking spots, and on both Android and iOS, the app can, as of an April 2017 update,
remember where users parked. In August 2017, Google Maps for Android was updated with new functionality
to actively help the user in finding parking lots and garages close to a destination. In December 2017, Google
added a new two-wheeler mode to its Android app, designed for users in India, allowing for more accessibility
in traffic conditions.

Applications

32. Here are eight off-the-beaten-path Google apps that'll help you do all sorts of interesting things with
your Android device. And yes, they're all free. (Some, but not all, are also available for iOS.)

(a) Google Handwriting. Input ever feel like

scribbling something out on your smartphone's display?
Google Handwriting Input gives you a blank slate for writing
with your finger or a stylus and then converts your illegible
chicken scratch into actual send able text. It works
surprisingly well, and it can even handle e- mails (if you for
some reason are inspired to draw those). The best part about
Handwriting Input is that it works, hand-in-hand with Google's
regular, fully-featured G-board keyboard. Once you install and activate the app on your phone, you'll
see a new globe-like icon in G-board's bottom row.

(b) Trusted Contacts. This so-new-it-still-has-that-new-app-smell tool is one of those things

that's so practical, you'll wonder why your phone hasn't always had it. Trusted Contacts lets you
establish location-sharing relationships with your friends, family members, or anyone else you know
and love (or maybe just kind sort like). Once both people have installed the app and approved the
relationship, either person has the ability to request the other's location at any time. If the recipient
doesn't respond after five minutes, his last known location will automatically be sent. And it works
even if his phone is off or out of range. Take this mobile device management course from Plural
Sight and learn how to secure devices in your company without
degrading the user experience. Peace of mind has never been
easier.

(c) Google Trips. Organizing travel can be a pain but if you're

already using Gmail, Google's new-ish Google Trips app makes
everything super simple. Trips automatically finds and imports all
your travel info as it arrives in your inbox travel reservations, hotel
reservations, and any other related confirmations and bundles it all
together into neatly organized trip-based portfolios. It even adds
in extra little goodies like suggestions for nearby attractions, popular
41

(and customizable) day plans, and restaurant recommendations. Once your data's pulled over,
everything works offline.

(d) Google Arts & Culture. Google Arts &

Culture lets you explore national parks and monuments,
zoom up close into famous works of art, and even take
virtual tours of entire museums right from your mobile
device. The app views of fascinating things from around
the world, and it's something you really have to experience
for yourself.

(e) Chrome Remote Desktop. Chrome Remote

Desktop is one of Google's most powerful cross-platforms
tools and yet it doesn't get nearly enough attention. The
app makes it dead-simple to remotely access any desktop
computer from your Android phone. All you do is install the
companion desktop Chrome extension, set up a PIN, and
that's it: You can pull up your desktop on demand and
access files, open programs, or do anything else you need
from the palm of your hand.

(f) Google Opinion Rewards. You answer a handful of questions about a recent shopping
experience or your thoughts on some type of merchandise, and then the app puts a credit on your
Play Store account. It might be for 10 cents or it might be for a dollar. Either way, it takes practically
no time to do, and the credits add up fast meaning your next app purchase or movie rental can be on
the house.

(g) Android Auto. Google revamped its Android Auto app a few months ago and made
it into something anyone who drives should have standing by. The new Auto app is basically a "car
mode" for your phone an interface that's optimized for driving, with large buttons for commonly used
commands and simplified access to the sort of stuff you might need while behind the wheel.(And yes,
long time Android fans, that should sound familiar.)

(h) Wallpapers This last selection is actually the app that controls wallpaper picking for
Google's new Pixel phone but if you have any other device, you can think of it as an upgrade to your
system's built-in wallpaper picker. The aptly named Wallpapers makes finding a background for your
home screen a fun adventure, with options for selecting stunning images from sources like Google
Earth or the photographer-favored galleries of Google. The best part is that all of Wallpapers'
categories Earth, Landscapes, Cityscapes, and so on include a "Daily wallpaper" option that'll
automatically change your background to a different purity image every single day.

CONCLUSION

33. Map reading plays very major role in services as well as in governance system. These days digital
maps and artificial intelligence has taken over majority usage thereby making such task easy and user friendly
along with information technology. Setting of map and finding own position is the essence of the map reading
training.It is important for the cadets to understand the methods and the procedure to find objects from map to
ground and from ground to map. With the help of satellites and information technology companies like Google
have taken over mapping system by using artificial intelligence making life faster and user friendly connecting
Smart Phones with applications for map reading, navigation, tracking system, traffic and basic usage of our
daily life.
42

SUMMARY

1. Map is the geographical representation of land on a paper.

2. Scale is a proportion of two points on map and two points on the ground.

3. Relief is applied to the shape of the ground in a vertical plane.

4. Contour is an imaginary line following surface of the ground at a certain level.

5. Gradient is the slope of the ground expressed as the angle the ground makes with the
horizontal.

6. Cardinal Points are the four major directions North, South, East and West.

7. There are three types of North, True North is the direction of North pole. Magnetic North is the
direction which a magnetic needle points, Grid North is the direction of the North South grid lines on a
map-point.

8. Magnetic Variation is the difference between True North and Magnetic North. It depends on
time and place.

9. Grid Convergence is the angular difference between Grid North and True North.

10. Bearing: The clock wise angle formed by a straight line joining two points and direction of North.

11. The service protractor “A” Mark IV is an instrument used for plotting and measuring bearing on
the map.

12. Setting of Map: A map is said to be set or oriented when it is placed such that it corresponds
directly with the ground. There are two methods of setting a map- by compass and by objects on the
ground.

13. Methods to find own position on map are- by resection, by map spotting or by bearing and
distance.

14. Types of navigation: Navigation during day and Night navigation.

15. Methods are used to identify objects from map to ground.

(a) Bearing and Distance Method.
(b) Direction and Distance Method.
(c) By Estimation Method.

16. To find out an object indicated on ground on the map is called ground to map.

17. Use of Goggle Maps & Applications Directions and Transit. Business Listings.
(a) Indoor Maps
(b) Google Local Guides
(c) Mobile App
(d) Applications.

(i) Google Handwriting.

(j) Trusted Contacts.
(k) Google Trips.
(l) Google Arts & Culture.
(m) Chrome Remote Desktop.
(n) Google Opinion Rewards.
(o) Android Auto.
(p) Wallpapers
46

CHAPTER II – INDICATION OF LANDMARKS AND TARGETS

Introduction

1. Landmarks and other objects on the ground or a battle field may be either unclear due to climatic
conditions or other reasons. Every effort should, therefore be made to indicate their location and size carefully
and accurately. To ensure quick and accurate indication by commanders and recognition by individual
soldiers a standard procedure has been laid down in the Army.

Definitions

2. Landmarks. An object, which is important on the ground and which is used in verbal orders to
explain the ground in front.

3. Target. It is an object having a technical significance which is indicated with a view to bring
down fire on it.

4. Reference Point. An important and unmistakable object, with the help of which you can indicate
other land marks or targets. A reference point should be specific.

Types of Ground

5. Broken Ground It is uneven and is generally scattered with nullahs, bump sand fields in the
ground. It is suitable for move of infantry.

6. Flat and Open Ground. It is even ground with little cover e.g. bushes, hedges and other
foliage. It is not suitable for move of Infantry by day.

7. High Ground. Ground far above the general level of the area e.g. hill. It facilitates control of
area around it by observation or fire.

8. Dead Ground. Ground that is hidden from an observer’s view. It cannot be covered by flat
path weapons.

9. Though an open ground is easy to travel, it is dangerous to do so in the locality of the enemy. Whether
moving or taking fire position in an open area one is exposed to enemy from view and fire. Broken ground
when correctly used affords protection from flat path weapons. It does not afford cover from air or protection
from high path weapons. Dead ground does not afford cover from high path weapons.

10. Procedure Of Description. The normal method of scanning and describing ground is by dividing
it as follows:-
(a) Fore Ground up to 300 yards.
(b) Middle Distance from 300 yards to 500 yards.
(c) Distance beyond 500 yards.

Indication Of Landmarks

11. General Line of Direction. Start by giving the

general line of direction by pointing out a centrally located,
if possible, prominent land mark, e.g. No 1 section 500,
RED HOUSE, class Red House and line beyond General
Line of Direction (GLD).

12. Boundaries. After giving general line of direction give LEFT and RIGHT boundaries of your area.
Divide the ground into foreground, middle and distance. Having done so start from LEFT to RIGHT
systematically in a clockwise direction and describe the ground.

13. Sequence of description. While describing the ground bounded by particular arc after giving
the boundaries start from LEFT to RIGHT. If the ground all around is to be described, start after general line
of direction to the right and finish at general line of direction by completing the indication all around.
47

Methods of Indication Targets

14. Easy Targets. Can be indicated by the following methods:-

(a) Indication by Description. A noticeable target can often be described directly. For
example “No. 1 Section BRIDGE”. Here BRIDGE is so noticeable that nobody can make a mistake in
recognizing it.

(b) Indication by Direction or Range or Both. In slightly less obvious cases other aids
should be used e.g. direction or range or both. An example of each is given below:-

(i) Indication by Direction :No 1 Section BAEN BAGHICHA.

(ii) Indication by Range :No 1 Section 600 BAGHICHA.
(iii) Direction and Range :When indicating a landmark, indicate direction first and then
range e.g. BAEN-600, BAGHICHA.

15. Difficult Targets The targets which cannot be indicated by the methods given above are
termed difficult targets. The methods to indicate these are explained by Direction Method as given below:-

(a) The general line of direction.

(b) A known reference point.
(c) Another landmark.

16. Unless otherwise stated all directions are taken to be with reference to the general line of direction.
The following direction will be used:-

Direction Measuring

Slight Left/Right Approximately 10 degrees.

Quarter Left/Right Approximately 22 ½ degrees.

Half Left/Right Approximately 45 degrees.

Three Quarter Left/Right Approximately 67 ½degrees.

Full Left/Right Approximately 90 degrees.

CONCLUSION

17. To achieve success in war it is very important that the target is clearly understood and recognized by
the troops. By using the methods of indicating the target the cadets can easily indicate and identify the target.
50

CHAPTER IV : FIRE AND MOVE CAPSULE

1. The primary aim of infantry is to close in with the enemy & destroy him. The aim of getting close is
achieved by making skilful use of ground. A clever enemy will however, deny you the use of such ground
which you may need. When such a cover is denied by the enemy, we may have to movement in open. Once
we are forced to movement in open, a part of our force will have to fire on en position & force him to keep his
head down. This would render the en incapable of bringing down aimed fire at us while we are on the
movement. This process of keeping one element on the ground to give covering fire, while the other element
is on movement, is called fire & movement. This is the basic tactics of all infantry and mechanised ops. To
understand the fire and move as capsule cadets has to understand basics nuances.

Field Signals

2. Whenever someone wants to convey his message one has to raise his voice. In olden days smoke,
sound of drum was the mode to convey messages from one village to another. In Army, different methods
are used to convey messages. Today, you will learn one of these methods called Field Signals.

SIGNALS WITH HAND AND WEAPONS

3. Signals with Hands.

Ser Name Of Illustrations

Signals With Hand
No Signal

Right arm fully extended above head and waved

(a) Deploy from side to side, palm open.

Right arm swung from rear to front in “under arm

(b) Advance
blowing” fashion.

(c) Halt Right arm raised to full extent above head.

(d) Turn About Right arm raised and bent above head.
51

Change Right arm raised to front in line with shoulder. Body

(e)
Direction then turned in required direction.

(f) Close Right hand place on top of head, elbow to the right.

Right arm swung from rear to front above the

(g) Follow me
shoulder in “over arm bowling” fashion.

Enemy Both hands open, palm inwards at waist level, with

(h)
Approaching inwards scooping motion.

Enemy LMG
(i) Right hand thumb down signal.
firing
52

Punching motion with Right or Left hand according

(j) Attack
to direction of attack.

Closed to Close sign followed by both hands clasped in front

(k)
Rendezvous of body at waist level.

Infantry
Both hands crossed in front of body at the waist,
(l) obstacle
palm open downwards.
ahead

4. Signals with Weapons.

Name Of
Ser No Signals with Weapons Illustrations
Signal

Enemy in Rifle held above the head parallel to the small

(a)
Sight number muzzle in the direction of the enemy.

Enemy in
Sight in As per (a) above, but arm moved up and several
(b)
large times.
number
53

(c) Advance Both arms raised to form the letter U

5. Signals with Whistle.

Ser
Name Of Signal Signals With Hand
No
(a) Cautionary Blast
A short blast to draw attention to a signal or order about to be given.

(b) The Alarm Blast

A succession of alternate long and short whistle blasts.

(c) Enemy Aircraft

A succession of short blasts.

(d) Enemy Aircraft

departed Two long blasts repeated at interval of five seconds.

Field Signals As Means Of Giving Orders

6. Field signals are alternate means of giving orders and to control troops when voice control is not
possible. Control over troops deployed can be done better by field signals than by voice control. There are
various occasions when voice control is not possible. They are:-

(a) Battle Noises. In war, due to firing and vehicle movement very high noise will be
produced, so it may not be possible for a Commander to give voice message.

(b) Need for Silence. There are certain operations which, by design are carried out in
utmost silence, eg:-

(i) Ambush.
(ii) Patrolling.
(iii) Raid.
(iv) Cordon.

(c) Intervening Distances are Too Large. When Infantry takes the battle field they
come across many obstacles in ground such as the ditch, rivers, and mountains. Under such
circumstances we will have the only choice left with us is field signals for communication.

7. Methods to Attract Attention Of Troops. Before any field signal is executed, the commander
has to attract the attention of troops. Methods to attract attention of troops are :-

(a) A Short Blast of Whistle.

(b) A Bird Call.
(c) Whistle by Mouth.
(d) Clicks(By using tongue).
(e) Clicks by Fingers.
54

8. Other Methods of Communication. Besides field signals there are various other means of
communication in the Army which are as follows:-

(a) Dispatch Runners.

(b) Dispatch Rider.
(c) Radio Sets.

9. Field Signals By Day. Some of the visual signals used during the day are flags and mercury coated
mirrors. Flags are very effectively used by Navy on board a ship by following ways:-

(a) Flags: (Red, Green and White flags).

(b) Mercury coated mirrors.
(c) Smoke.
(d) Miscellaneous: Various signals can be improvised and pre-arranged as under:-

(i) Clothes superficially hung out to dry.

(ii) Hurricane lamp, kept in the window.
(iii) Flashing of torch is used as Morse Code.
(iv) Applying various colours / signs on forehead and arms.

10. Field Signals By Night. Some of the field signals that can be used at night are:-
(a) Pre decided signals on a walkie talkie.
(b) Click by fingers.
(c) Clicks by using tongue.
(d) Whistle by the mouth.
(e) Use of rope.
(f) Use of colour light.
(g) Use of blacked out torch.
(h) Firing of weapon.

11. The fighting efficiency of a unit/sub unit depends on sound communication system which helps
commanders at all levels to exercise command and control effectively. Every commander must influence the
battle by his personal touch which is achieved by good signal communications. Field signals become a part
of movement of a good section/platoon commander. At section/platoon level, the commander directly
influences the battle by the use of field signals. Victory in battle will come to that section/platoon whose men
are familiar in the use of field signals.

SECTION FORMATION

12. Introduction. Various formations are used when troops come in contact with the enemy and the
type of formation adopted is entirely dependent on the following four basic factors:-

(a) Degree of control required to be exercised by the Section Commander.

(b) Type of ground.
(c) Necessity of bringing down maximum fire with minimum delay.
(d) Task.

13. A Section is the smallest sub unit of an Infantry Battalion and is capable of undertaking independent
task. It consists of ten persons who are organized in Rifle group and Support Group. Different types of
formations adopted by a section are as under:
55

Single File Formation

File Formation

Arrow Head Formation

56

Spear Head Formation

Diamond Formation

Extended Line Formation

Scout

14. Now you have seen section formation, a word about the scouts. Scouts are the eyes and ears of the
section. Scouts always work in pairs. They work ahead of the leading section and advance from bound to
bound. As scouts, one must always be alert.

15. You have so far learnt the organisation of a section and the various formations adopted by a section
in battle. Remember, a section is organised into the Rifle Group and Fire Support Group to facilitate fire and
move, the basic of all tactics. As for the section formations, each formation has its peculiar advantages and
disadvantages. Remember, need for command and control and the necessity of developing the maximum
fire quickly, will determine the formation you as a section commander must adopt.
57

FIRE CONTROL ORDERS

16. By opening of fire indiscriminately, too early or at too great a range, the defender’s position will be
disclosed prematurely which will mean wasting of ammunition without advantage. This means Section
Commander should be able to control the fire of his section by exercising good fire discipline.

17. It is the duty of the commander to ensure that the enemy is engaged effectively by bringing down the
correct volume of fire at the most effective range by using the most appropriate weapon(s). Also in the battle,
all personnel of a section / platoon may not be able to observe the enemy and even if they can, they may either
not open fire thinking that others would do so or all of them may open fire resulting in wastage of ammunition.

18. It is also the duty of a commander to assess the effect of fire on the en and then either stop the fire,
or re-adjust it or add the fire of additional weapons to make it effective. Therefore, the commander ensures
effective fire and judicious expenditure of ammunition.

Importance Of Fire Discipline And Fire Control Orders

19. Fire discipline is a battle winning factor which will stand you in good stead, especially in situations
where surprise is of paramount importance. Indisciplined firing starts with an individual and spreads like wild
fire. Should the troops have confidence of correct, accurate and effective fire orders, they may not indulge in
opening of premature/indiscriminate firing, thereby giving away position or wasting ammunition. Fire discipline
and fire control orders are very important in all operations of war.

20. Defence. In defence, if fire is opened up prematurely, it will give away the defender's location
allowing the enemy to change his plan and surprise the defender subsequently. Moreover, fire opened up at
long ranges, is rarely effective and results in leaving the defender with less ammunition for the eventual attack
by the enemy. Therefore good fire discipline and correct fire orders, assumes added significance in the
following cases:-

(a) During hours of poor visibility/darkness when men are jittery and tend to fire at imaginary
targets.

(b) When enemy patrols try to draw fire from the defender in order to find his disposition.

21. Important Terms. Certain terms connected with fire control orders are:-

(a) Fire Unit. Any number of men firing under a commander, usually a section. The personal
responsibility for giving them the executive order to fire is the fire unit commander.

(b) Fire Direction Orders. These are the orders which the fire unit commander receives from
his superior, telling him when, at what target, and with what intensity to open fire. A section
commander will receive fire direction orders from his Platoon commander. They may include key
ranges and any specific direction about withholding of fire.

(c) Fire Control Orders. These are the orders given by the fire unit commander to direct and
cont the fire of his fire unit.Emphasis should be on control and surprise. These orders are the final
and complete instructions after all factors have beenconsidered and before fire is actually opened.

(d) Arc of Fire. This denotes the area of ground for which the fire unit is responsible and within
which it will engage targets. An arc of fire must not be confused with a field of fire, which is the
area over which it can fire effectively.

22. Points for Section Commander. There are certain factors which must be remembered before
giving fire control orders.

(a) Indication. No fire order can be effective unless the target is clearly indicated and can be
easily recognised by the men of the fire unit.

(b) Range. Do the range, visibility and vulnerability of the target justify fire at all? Would it be
better to wait and get a more vulnerable target or achieve more/complete surprise?
58

(c) Best Weapons to Use. What is the best weapon or weapons to use? Although the LMG is
the main weapon of the section, the target may be more suitable for rifle fire only or possibly for a
combination of weapons, eg a LMG and rifle grenade.

(d) Rate of Fire. Should the fire be in single round or in bursts? Should it be rapid or at the normal
rate? Rapid rate is justified only on a few occasions, when it allows the max effect to be gained from
surprise and volume of fire or when an especially vulnerable target presents itself or to cover move of
troops in the final stages of an assault.

23. Method of Giving the Orders. Having decided to open fire, there is then the need to give
orders. The four main rules which must be adhered to are: -
(a) The orders should be given clearly, calmly and concisely.
(b) It should be given loudly so as to be heard above the noises of the battle.
(c) It must be given as an order, to be obeyed as such.
(d) It should be given with adequate pauses, so that those being addressed may have the time
to take the correct action. For example there must be time for sight adjustment after the range is given.

Sequence of Fire Control Orders

24. Fire control orders must be given in the laid down sequence so as to avoid confusion and
misunderstanding. For ease of remembering the sequence for giving fire control orders, remember the catch
word `GRIT'.
(a) G The Group of the section which is addressed, i.e the LMG group, the rifle group or the
whole section. An order starting 'No 1 Section indicates that the whole section will fire, `LMG Group'
or 'Rifle Group' means that group only is to fire.

(b) R The range to the target should be given next. It is to ensure accuracy of fire and to
draw attention on a limited area of ground (Instructor to explain why range has to be given before
indicating the target).

(c) I The indication of the target by the simplest form of indication.

(d) T The type of fire to be emp. i.e open fire at once, or on further orders, or when the
opportunity arises.

Types of Fire Control Orders

25. There are four types of fire control orders as under :-

(a) Delayed Fire Control Orders. These orders are given as an early warning when enemy is
seen approaching at a longer range so that necessary preparations are made by the troops to open
fire, as soon as the enemy appears within the effective range of weapons. Delayed fire control orders
are executed in two manners:-
(i) When the initiative to open fire is left to the man eg:-

"No 1 Sec - 800 - JUNGLE se dushman ka ek sec adv kar raha hai. Jab mar ke ilake men aye
to FIRE".
(ii) When initiative to open fire is with fire unit commander. Eg

“No 1 Sec - 800 - JUNGLE se dushman ka ek sec adv kar raha hai– mere agale hukam ka
intizar karo".

(b) Full Fire Control Orders. As the name suggests these are orders complete in all respects.
These fire control orders are given when fire is to be brought down immediately on a target within the
effective range of weapons. There are two types of full fire control orders.

(i) Distributed Area Target. This is when the enemy presents itself over an area. e.g.

“No 1 Sec - 200 - JHARI - DAINE tin baje DARKHT –tak dushman ki position. LMG Group
char burst, rifle group tin tin round FIRE”.
(ii) Pin Point Target. This is when enemy presents itself atone.
place only. e.g.
59

“Rif Gp 300 AkelaDarkhat, Darkhat ke niche dushman ka sniper, Rfn No 1 - tin round „FIRE”.

(c) Opportunity Fire Control Orders. These orders are given when the target is not
continuously seen by everyone in the section or when the enemy has taken cover, eg:-

“No 1 Sec 400 tuti futi zamin me dusman chhupa hua hai, nazar ane per FIRE”.

(d) Brief Fire Control Orders. These are given when time is not available to give out a full fire
order. In this only essential details are given. This type of order is normally given when enemy appears
at close range and surprises us. eg
"LMG group sights down enemy running left to right - FIRE (Instructor to explain significance of the
phrase sights down”.

26. Fire Control Orders are necessary to achieve the following:-

(a) Maintain fire discipline.

(b) Conserve and expend ammunition and use it judiciously and effectively.
(c) Not to disclose own position prematurely at long ranges, as chances of enemy escaping are
more and they would have taken away information of your dispositions, which is not desirable.
(d) Engage targets with speed.
(e) Maintain surprise.

FIRE AND MOVEMENT

27. When to use Fire and Movement Tactics. Fire & movement tactics may be used in following
circumstances: -

(a) The enemy has opened SA fire which is effective.

(b) When own troops have seen the en first - within 400 to 700 meters.

(c) When the en is known or suspected to be in a certain area, then fire & movement tactics may
be adopted when the troops reach within the effective range of en weapons/observation. (Instructor to
explain as to what could be the effective range of enemy’s personal weapon)

(d) To cross obstacles by day or by night, e.g. nullahs /rivers.

28. Basic Considerations. There are five basic considerations for fire & movement. These are
as under:-

(a) No movement on exposed ground without covering fire. The Advantages of

covering fire are obvious, but this does not mean that fire will be brought down continuously when
you are moving. Whenever you have ground providing you cover, you must use it. Whenever you
have to move in open, fire must be brought down on the en in small bursts to keep his head down.

(b) Control by the Commander. The sec can remain a viable force only when it is under the
control of its commander. Otherwise, it is likely that the required fire support will not be brought down
at the required place & time. In a section, control is ex by voice command & hand signals. As a rule,
sec commander must keep his section within range of voice or visible control.

(c) The angle of covering fire from direct firing weapons should be as wide as possible w/o loss
of control or time. It is to ensure that own troops are not coming under effective fire of own fire sp. It
also ensures that the fire support is provided till as late as possible so that assault troops are able to
close in with the en.

(d) Full use of Available Cover. Full use should be made of cover provided by the ground. Various
types of cover have already been taught to the cadets.

(e) Optimum use of all Available Weapons. All available weapons should be used for
producing covering fire.

29. Appreciation of Ground and Cover. In battle, fire & movement is applied according to the type of
ground over which we are operating. In open country, the problem is to find cover; in close country, there is
60

difficulty in finding positions with good observation & field of fire. Skillful use of ground can help achieve
surprise & save lives. It is therefore required to develop an eye for ground. Ground should be considered from
the enemies’ point of view & it should be appreciated for the following:-

(a) Fire positions.

(b) Observation positions.
(c) Cover from fire.
(d) Cover from view.
(e) Obstacles.

(Instructor to explain that while movement, sec commander & every member of the sec is responsible to
continuously look for nearest cover which he may have to take once en opens effective fire. He is also
responsible to appreciate various fire positions & types of cover being provided by that particular cover).

30. Types of Cover. Cover from view is often not cover from fire, especially if the movement has
been seen by the enemy. Concealment from enemy air and ground observation is the chief means of gaining
surprise. Some of the main types of cover are:-

(a) Undulating ground which is the least obvious form of cover; when skillfully used, it protects
from direct fire and gives no ranging marks to the enemy.

(b) Sunken roads, beds of streams and ditches which give good cover from view and often
from fire as well. However, the reis always a danger that the enemy may pay special attention to them;
they may be mined or booby-trapped and precautions must be taken. If the roads or ditches are
straight, the enemy will be able to fire down the min enfilade.

(c) Hedges and bushes give cover from view but not from fire. In open country they may make
Standing crops give cover from view but movement through them can generally be detected.

(d) Woods which give cover to men and vehicles from enemy air and ground observation.
They give some protection from small arm fire but HE bombs and shells will explode in the branches
of trees and will cause heavy casualties unless troops are dug in and have overhead protection.

(e) Buildings and walls afford concealment and protection from small arms. Fire and shell splinters.
When isolated they make good ranging marks for the enemy.

31. Dead Ground. Ground which a soldier cannot see from his position is called dead ground.
Platoon and section commanders should be able to recognize ground which is likely to be dead to the enemy.
Ground can only be described as dead in relation to the position of an observer. Troops under cover or in dead
ground are safe from enemy observed fire but not from indirect fire. These areas are always likely to be selected
by the enemy as defensive fire tasks for his artillery and mortars. Dead ground is also safe from detection by
battle field surveillance radars, by battle field surveillance radars, as these have line of sight limitations.

32. Common Mistakes. The wrong use of ground may lead to casualties and loss of surprise; some
common mistakes are:-

(a) Carelessness by troops while making a reconnaissance, such as unfolding a map in the
open or not using a covered approach to an Observation Post.

(b) Unnecessary movement in a position overlooked by the enemy.

(c) Using conspicuous landmarks such as isolated trees, bushes or cottages.

(d) Halting troops near road or track junctions or other mapped features which are always
registered as targets by the enemy.
(e) Bad track discipline.
(f) Failure to guard against enemy air observation.

33. Maps and Air Photographs. Maps and air photographs should be used together to obtain the best
picture of the ground. The two aids are complementary as is shown by listing the advantages and limitation
of air photographs :-
61

(a) Advantage.
(i) Are more up-to-date.
(ii) Gives more detail.
(iii) Show the size and shape of features accurately.
(iv) Allow gradient to be seen in relief with a stereoscope.

(b) Limitations.

(i) Complete geographical cover almost impossible.

(ii) Expensive to produce.
(iii) Scales vary.
(iv) Details of heights not given.

34. Selection of Fire Positions and Fire Control. The ideal fire position should:-

(a) Provide cover from fire.

(b) Provide cover from view.
(c) Afford a good view of the ground to be watched or target to be engaged.
(d) Provide room in which to use the weapon freely.
(e) Have a covered approach.
(f) Be easy to advance from.

Fire Control

35. There is a big distinction between fire control in attack and in defence. In attack men should be allowed
a great deal of latitude in opening fire. Speed and immediate fire effect is what is required. With a well
concealed enemy it will often be necessary to “neutralise” an area by fire since few definite targets will be
visible. In defence, the vital factor in fire control is that early opening of fire may give away positions to the
enemy and jeopardize concealment. Normally, a section commander will lay down a line in front of his section
post beyond which fire will not be opened without his orders. This is particularly important where a long field
of fire is available. In any case fire will normally be opened on the orders of the section commander.

Movement

36. Movement in the face of the enemy should be covered by fire. This does not mean that it is impossible
to move unless a heavy weight of fire is brought down on the enemy. An important part of an attack is the
movement towards the objective, supporting fire is one of the aids to that movement. A knowledge of how to
move and how to use ground for movement is essential to enable troops to close with the enemy with minimum
casualties, undetected in the zone of arc of battle field surveillance radars.

37. Usually, troops advancing by day in action will move at a brisk walking pace until they make contact;
in the final stages of the assault, they will double. They may have to double or crawl at other times; for example
if attacking troops move into enemy defensive fire, it is usually best to double forward and through it; to lie
down is often dangerous as well as useless. Doubling and crawling are both tiring however, and should only
be used in short spells in critical situations particularly for crossing open ground in full view of the enemy. The
commander must himself decide on his pace from his personal knowledge of the state of fitness of his men.
In general the aim must always be to keep movement determinedly towards the enemy at the best possible
speed.

CONCLUSION

38. Fire & Move is the basic skill of tactics. Its training provided to all the officers and jawans. The basic
aim is to enable one detachment of soldiers to move while the enemy is pinned down by the effective fire of
the other temporarily static body of soldiers. It is the most effective and safest method to move during
operations or when in contact with the enemy.
62

CHAPTER V : KNOTS, LASHINGS AND STRETCHERS

1. The ability to join two pieces of natural material together, and so increase their length, gives man
the ability to make full use of many natural materials found locally. Knot tying is a useful exercise to obtain
better coordination between eyes and fingers.

Knots

2. A brief description of the use to which the knot may be put is given in this lesson. The diagrams will
explain how the knot is tied. The letter "F" means the free or untied end of the rope, and the letter "S" means
the standing or secured end.

3. Knots for Rope ends or for Grips on Thin Rope.

Ser
Type of Knot Sample
No
(a)
Thumb Knot. To make a stop on a rope end, to prevent the end
from fraying or to stop the rope slipping through a sheave, etc.

(b)
Overhand Knot. Over hand knot may be put to the same use as the
thumb knot. It makes a better grip knot, and is easy to undo.

(c)
Figure Eight. This knot is used as the thumb knot. It is easy to
undo, and more ornamental.

4. Knots for Joining Ropes.

Ser
Type of Knot Sample
No
(a) Reef Knot. To securely join two ropes of equal thickness together.
Notice the difference in position of the free and standing ends
between this and the thief knot.

(b) Thief Knot To tie two ropes of equal thickness together so that they
will appear to be tied with a reef knot, and will be retied with a true
reef knot. This knot was often used by sailors to tie their sea chests,
hence the name.

(c) Fisherman’s Knot. For joining two springy materials together;

suitable for wire, fishing gut or vines. Two thumb knots (one on each
rope)pulled tight. The knots lock together.
63

5. Knots to Make Loops in Rope.

Ser
Type of Knot Sample
No
(a) Bowline. To form a loop that will not slip on a rope end.

6. Knots for Fastening Ropes.

Ser
Type of Knot Sample
No.
(a) Clove Hitch. For securing a rope to as par. This hitch, if pulled taut,
will not slip up or down on a smooth surface. A useful start for lashings.

Lashings

7. The methods employed to tie with ropes, poles or any rope to a stationary object to securely hold it in
place is known as lashing.
(a) Square Lashing. To join poles at right angles.
(b) Frapping Turns. These are turns that go round the lashing
and pull it tight.

8. Stretchers. A stretcher, litter, or pram is an apparatus used for moving patients who require
medical care. A basic type (cot or litter) must be carried by two or more people. A wheeled stretcher
(known as a gurney, trolley, bed or cart) is often equipped with variable height frames, wheels, tracks, or
skids.

9. Basic stretchers.

(a) Simple stretchers are the most rudimentary type. They are
lightweight and portable, made of canvas or other synthetic
material suspended between two poles or tubular aluminum
frame. Many are stored as disaster supplies and are often former
military equipment.

(b) The scoop stretcher is used for lifting patients, for instance from the ground onto an
ambulance stretcher or onto a spinal board. The two ends of the stretcher can be detached from
each other, splitting the stretcher into two longitudinal halves. To load a patient, one or both ends
of the stretcher are detached, the halves placed under the patient from either side and fastened
back together.

(c) The litter, also known as a rescue basket or Stokes basket, is designed to be used where
there are obstacles to movement or other hazards: for example, in confined spaces, on slopes,
in wooded terrain. Typically, it is shaped to accommodate an adult in a face up position and it is
used in search and rescue operations. The person is strapped into the basket, making safe
evacuation possible. The litter has raised sides and often includes a removable head/torso cover
64

for patient protection. After the person is secured in the litter, the litter may be wheeled, carried
by hand, mounted on an ATV, towed behind skis, snowmobile, or horse, lifted or lowered on high
angle ropes, or hoisted by helicopter.

(d) A Reeves Sleeve, SKED, or "flexible stretcher" is a flexible stretcher that is often
supported longitudinally by wooden or plastic planks. It is a kind of tarpaulin with handles. It is
primarily used to move a patient through confined spaces, e.g., a narrow hallway, or to lift obese
patients. Reeves stretchers have six handholds, allowing multiple rescuers to assist extrication.

(e) The WauK board is also designed for use in small spaces. The patient is secured to the
board with straps. It has two wheels and a foldable footrest at one end, allowing the patient to be
moved by one person, much as with a hand truck for moving cargo. It can also be used at a variety
of angles, making it easier to traverse obstacles, such as tight stairwells.

10. Wheeled stretchers. For ambulances, a collapsible wheeled

stretcher, or gurney, is a type of stretcher on a variable-height wheeled frame.
Normally, an integral lug on the stretcher locks into a sprung latch within the
ambulance in order to prevent movement during transport, often referred to as
antlers due to their shape. It is usually covered with a disposable sheet and
cleaned after each patient in order to prevent the spread of infection. Its key
value is to facilitate moving the patient and sheet onto a fixed bed or table on
arrival at the emergency department. Both types may have straps to secure
the patient.

11. Other types of stretchers. The Nimier stretcher

(brancard Nimier) was a type of stretcher used by the French army
during World War I. The casualty was placed on their back, but in a
"seated position", (that is, the thighs were perpendicular to the
abdomen). Thus, the stretcher was shorter and could turn in the
trenches. This type of stretcher is rarely seen today.

CONCLUSION

12. Knots, lashings and stretchers are very useful and become very handy for cadets during camps. They
can make use of knots for joining or tying 2 to 3 different ropes together and make use of it during rope climbing,
rappelling, slithering and other such adventure activities. Similarly, lashings can be used for joining 2 or 3 things
together to make a structure that can useful in camps. For evacuation of any injured or causality stretchers are
important to be known and used.
65

.SUMMARY

1. Field Craft is an aspect of military training which relates to the conduct of a soldier in face of the enemy.
It’s an art of using the ground and the weapon available to the best of one’s own advantages.

2. Methods of Judging Distance.

(a) Unit of Measure.

(b) Appearance Method.
(c) Section Average.
(d) Key Range.
(e) Halving.
(f) Bracketing.

3. Types of Ground.

(a) Broken Ground.

(b) Flat and Open Ground.
(c) High Ground.
(d) Dead Ground.

4. Landmarks. .An object, which is prominent on the ground and which is used in verbal orders to
explain the ground in front.

5. Target. It is an object having a tactical significance which is indicated with a view to bring down fire
on it.

6. Reference Point. .A prominent and unmistakable object, with the help ofwhich you can indicate
other land marks or targets. A reference point should be specific. Things are seen due to
(a) Shape.
(b) Shine.
(c) Shadow.
(d) Spacing.
(e) Smoke.
(f) Sound.
(g) Movement.

7. Camouflage. The various measures include.

(h) Use of Disruptive Pattern Clothing and Local Vegetation.
(i) Camouflage of Face.
(j) Camouflage of Equipment.
(k) Helmet.
(l) Use of Hessian Cloth.
(m) Use of Camouflage Net.
(n) Camouflage of Packs.
(o) Camouflage of LMG.
(p) Camouflage of Rifle.

8. There are two types of cover:-

(a) Cover from Fire. This implies that the concealed person is protected both from view
and fire of weapon.
(b) Cover from View. In this type of cover, a person is concealed only from view or from
being seen not from fire.

9. Field Signals is one of the ways of passing of message with the help of Predetermined codes and
signals.

(a) Signals with hand.

(b) Signals with Weapons.
(c) Signals with Whistle.
66

10. Field signals are alternate means of giving orders and control troops when voice control is not possible
like:-

(a) Battle Noises.

(b) Need for silence.
(c) Intervening distances are too large.

11. The Field signals used during day are different form ones used at Night. These could be:-

(a) Other Methods of Communication.

(b) Radio.
(c) Dispatch Rider.
(d) Runners.

12. Basic Considerations for Fire and Movement.

(a) No movement on exposed ground without covering fire.
(b) Control by the commander.
(c) The angle of covering fire from direct firing weapons should be as wide as possible w/o loss
of control or time.
(d) Full use of available cover.
(e) Optimum use of all available weapons.

13. The ideal fire position should: -

(a) Provide cover from fire.
(b) Provide cover from view.
(c) Afford a good view of the ground to be watched or target to be engaged.
(d) Provide room in which to use the weapon freely.
(e) Have a covered approach.
(f) Be easy to advance from.

14. The various section formations are :-

(a) Single file.
(b) File.
(c) Arrow Head.
(d) Diamond.
(e) Spear Head.
(f) Extended Line

15. Knots are ability to join two pieces of material/rope together. Important types of knots are:-
(a) Thumb Knot.
(b) Overhand Knot.
(c) Figure Eight Knot.
(d) Thief Knot.

16. Lashing. The method employed to tie with ropes, poles, or any rope to a stationary object to
securely hold it in place is known as Square Lashing and Frapping Turns.

17. Stretchers. For evacuation of any injured or causality stretchers are important to be known and
used.
67

ORGANISATION OF AN INFANTRY BATTALION AND ITS WEAPONS

1. Introduction. The infantry battalion is the most

important organisation of the army. It is trained and
equipped to face any adverse situation. It can fight an
enemy independently or as part of a larger force. It has the
sustenance power and motivation to fight till the end. The
Infantry Battalion is a balanced force which can withstand
any difficult situation both in offensive, defensive, as well as
in special operations against the enemy. The support
weapons available with the Battalion can contain the plan of
the enemy by causing maximum damage both in fortified
fire positions and Armoured protected tanks/personal
carriers.. Infantry battalion has inherent fire power capability
at long ranges in terms of battalion support weapons. The
two important infantry battalion support weapons are 81mm
Mortor and Anti Tank guided missile.

ORGANISATIONOF INFANTRY BATTALION

2. The infantry battalion is the most important organisation of the army. It is trained and equipped to
face any adverse situation. It can fight an enemy independently or as part of a larger force. It has the
sustenance power and motivation to fight till the end.

Capabilities

3. The capabilities of Infantry Battalion are as under:-

(a) Self Reliance. The Infantry is equipped, trained and organized to fight with the
enemy without any outside support. It can fight itself for a long time.

(b) Ability to Hold Ground. The Infantry Battalion can hold ground effectively with or
without outside support.

(c) Adaptability. An infantry battalion is highly adaptable and can operate over any
type of ground, by day or by night and under any difficult climatic conditions. The infantry battalion
can be readily shifted by land, sea or air to the battle field.

(d) Mobility. Infantry battalion has a high degree of mobility. It can go through almost all
kinds of obstacles.
68

(e) Vulnerability. In battle, an infantry battalion becomes vulnerable in front of tanks,

artillery, small arms, air attack and anti-personnel mines.

Employability

4. The basic role of infantry battalion is to close in with and destroy or capture the enemy and to hold
ground. Fire and movement is the basis of infantry tactics. Infantry battalion from section up wards is based
on this principle. Infantry battalion and its sub-units are trained to operate in the face of the enemy
opposition without entirely depending on support from other arms, by skillful use of ground, weapons, and
above all the infantrymen with their sheer courage, determination and velour.

Company Support Weapons

5. The company support weapons are 7.62mm Dragunov Sniper Rifle, 7.62mm Medium Machine Gun,
30 mm Medium Grenade Launcher, and Anti material Rifles. They are used both in defensive and offensive
operations.

6. 7.62 mm Dragunov Sniper Rifle.

(a) Caliber - 7.62mm.

(b) Range - 800 Mtr.
(c) Range with telescope sight - 1300 Mtr.
(d) Weight - 4.3 Kg.
(e) Magazine capacity - 10 Rounds.
(f) Ammunition fired.
(i) Armor Piercing.
(ii) Sniper Balls.
(iii) Steel Core.
(iv) Tracer.
(v) Incendiary.

7. 7.62 mm Medium Machine Gun.

(a) Weight.

(i) Gun - 14.2 Kg.

(ii) Tripod - 10.2Kg.

(b) Effective Battle Range - 1800m.

(c) Traverse - 360 degree.
(d) No. of rounds in belt -235 Rounds.

(e) Rate of Fire.

(i) Normal - 100 rounds per min.

(ii) Rapid - 200 rounds per min.
(iii) Cyclic - 500-1000 rounds per min.
(Adjustable by setting of gas
regulator).

(f) Length of Service Burst - 20 rounds.

(g) Sustained Fire - Being air-cooled can maintain
normal rate of fire indefinitely
However barrel should be changed
after firing four belts.

(h) Beaten Zone.

Range Beaten Zone

(i) 560m 110m x 1m.

(ii) 600m 100m x 1m.
69

(iii) 1200m 65m x 3m.

(iv) 1800m 50m x 4m.
(i) Trajectory -When the sight is fixed up to
600m bullets do not rise above
1.2m (4 ft).
(j) Night Firing -It is possible to fire the gun at
night using passive night sight.

8. 30mm Automatic Grenade Launcher.

(a) Weight

(i) Launcher - 18 kg.

(ii) Mount - 12 kg.
(iii) Sight - 1 kg (without case); 3.5 kg (with case).
(iv) Gun Box - 14.5 kg (with 29 grenades in one belt).
(v) Sight with case - 3.5 kg.
(b) Range -800 to1700 m (With and without sight).

(c) Rate of Fire

(i) Normal - 50grenades/Min.

(ii) Rapid 100grenades/Min.
(iii) Cyclic 350 to 400grenades/Min.

(d) Flexibility. It can be mounted on a vehicle or helicopter. It can fire in low angle as well
as in high angle. It has crest clearance capability. Flexibility is mainly due to:-

(i) Controlled Elevation - 67 degrees.

(ii) Controlled Depression - 14 degrees.
(iii) Free Traverse - 260 degrees.

(e) Effect of Fire. It fires a fragmentation type of grenade which can be fired in a single
shot or burst mode. The killing area of a grenade is 7 m all around from the point of burst.

(f) Limitations. It has the following limitations:-

(i) Due to sustained fire small parts get damaged.

(ii) Barrel needs to be cooled after firing 80 to 90 grenades.
(iii) It gives out flash and blast on firing.

9. 84 mm Rocket Launcher.

(a) Caliber– 84 mm.

(b) Weight– 16 kg with mount and telescopic sight.
(c) Length – 1065 mm.
(d) Traverse– No traverse of its own.
(e) Range.
(i) HEAT - 400m (moving targets) and 500 m (stationery targets).
(ii) HE - 1000m (killing area 10 m).
(iii) Smoke - 1300 m (width 15 m).
(iv) Illumination – 2100 m (area of 400- 500 m diameter for 30 seconds).
(f) Rate of fire Maximum sustained 06 rounds per minute.
(g) Types of ammunition Heat, HE, Smoke, Illumination.
(h) Armor Penetration 400 mm (Heat).
(i) Back Blast Area 15 m.
70

BATTALION SUPPORT WEAPONS

81MM Mortars

10. Characteristics of 81mm Mortars.

(a) Caliber - 81 mm.

(b) Weight - 40.6 kg (without sight).
4.7 kg (sight without case).
(c) Range

(i) Minimum – 68mts (from safety point of view 90 m ).

(ii) Maximum – 5200 m.

(d) Rate of Fire (per minute).

(i) Slow – 6-8 rounds.

(ii) Normal – 9-11 rounds.
(iii) Rapid – 12- 20 rounds.

(e) Muzzle Velocity – 305 m/sec (maximum).

(f) Elevation Limit –45 degrees to 85 degrees (g).
(g) Safety Distance – Flanking 200 m, Overhead 250 m.

11. Anti Tank Guided Missile (ATGM)

(a) Minimum Range - 75m.

(b) Maximum Range - 2500m.
(c) Rate of Fire - 03 missiles per minute.
(d) Hit Probability - 90% to 96%.
(e) Accuracy - 60 cm around point of aim, at maximum range.
(f) Generation - Second.
(g) Launcher Mount

(i) Traverse - 360 degrees.

(ii) Elevation - 8degrees + 20 degrees.
(iii) Magnification - 10 times.
(h) Guidance - Semi automatic optically tracked Wire guided.
(i) Penetration - At 90 degrees angle of.
(j) Impact 460mm - At 60 degrees angle of impact 230mm.

12. Visit To Nearby Infantry / Fighting Arms Unit. Cadets will be taken on a visit to any nearest
Infantry Battalion to show the support weapons on ground where ever possible. In the absence of Infantry
Battalion a short video can be screened showing the Infantry Battalion and company support weapons for
better understanding of the cadets.

CHARACTERISTICS OF 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE, AMMUNITION, FIRE POWER,

STRIPPING,ASSEMBLING & CLEANING

13. The 5.56mmINSAS Rifle is produced by the Indian Ordinance Factory Board and is being used by
the Indian army. It is the personal service weapon of a soldier. It is lighter than the AK47 and easy to handle.

14. Characteristics, Ammunition and Fire Power.

(a) Calibre - 5.56 mm.

(b) Length of Rifle without bayonet - 960 mm.
(c) Length of Rifle with bayonet - 1110 mm.
(d) Length of barrel - 464 mm.
(e) Weight
71

(i) Fixed butt with empty magazine - 3.6 kg.

(ii) Fixed butt with loaded magazine - 3.69 kg.
(iii) Full magazine - 90 gm.
(iv) Bayonet - 305 gm.

(f) Effective range - 400 m.

(g) Sight Radius - 470 mm.
(h) Principle of Operation - Gas Operated.
(i) Penetration - 3 mm at 700m.
(j) Mode of fire - Single Shot and Three Round Burst.
(k) Rate of Fire
(a) Normal - 60 rounds.
(b) TRB (Three Round Burst) - 90 rounds/min.
(c) Intense - 150 rounds/min.
(d) Cyclic - 600 to 650 rounds/min.

15. Type of Ammunition.

(a) Ball Round.

(b) Tracer Round.
(c) Blank Round.
(d) High Density (HD) Cartridge.

16. Stripping. 5.56mm INSAS rifle is the personnel weapon of a soldier. It is responsibility of the
soldier to take care of his weapon. Stripping, assembling and cleaning of this weapon is very easy. If a soldier
maintains the weapon properly, it will produce good result.

17. Removing Magazine. Hold the magazine with left hand and press them magazine catch to the front
with thumb and then remove them again.

18. Stripping Assembly Cover. Cock the rifle and keep the change lever on ‘S’. Press lever locking
retainer with left hand and press the retainer to the front with right hand thumb. When retainer moves to the
front, it is free from locking retainer. Now lift the assembly opening cover and move to the front.

19. Stripping of Piston Extension Assembly. While pressing retainer make the recoil spring
assembly free from the guide and move it out.

20. Stripping of Piston Extension Assembly. Hold rear portion of piston extension and while
pressing it down ward, remove it from the rifle.

21. Stripping of Breech Block. .Hold piston extension switch left hand, turning it upside down and
with the right hand slide out the breech block from the recess.

22. Stripping of Firing Pin. Remove locking pin with the help of drift. Firing pin will come out.

23. Stripping of Extractor. Drift tool is used for stripping of the extractor. Press the extract or
with the left hand thumb. Then press access pin with pointed portion of the drift. Access pin will come out.
Now remove the extractor and spring from its recess.

24. Stripping of Gas Plug and Projector Sight. With the help of drift, remove the pin fixing gas plug
and while pressing gas plug remove the gas block. Now the projector sight will also get removed.

25. Stripping of Hand Guard.The front edge of hand guard is in the cup near the gas block. Straighten
the pin locking and remove it with the help of drift. Shifting the cup towards gas block, remove the hand
guard.

26. Stripping of Magazine. While pressing retainer dimple remove bottom plate. Remove
retainer spring and the platform.

27. Assembling. Assembling of the rifle is carried out in reverse sequence of stripping as under:-

(a) Assembling of magazine.

72

(b) Assembling of extractor and firing pin.

(c) Assembling of hand guard.
(d) Assembling of piston extension and breech block.
(e) To insert piston extension assembly in gas cylinder and bracket.
(f) To insert recoil spring assembly in piston extension.
(g) To insert piston extension assembly and recoil spring in body housing.
(h) To close cover assembly and loading of retainer.
(i) Fix magazine.

28. Cleaning. Items required for cleaning are as under :-

(a) Oil bottle with oil.
(b) Brush cleaning bore.
(c) Pull through.
(d) Road cleaning barrel.
(e) Tool adjusting sight/rear sight.
(f) Tool removing repair case.
(g) Chindi.
(h) Drift.

29. Rifle parts to be oiled are as under:-

(a) Complete breach box less its face.

(b) Magazine Catch.
(c) Trigger mechanism.
(d) Rifle spring Assembly.

30. Rifle parts not to be oiled are as under:-

(a) Barrel.
(b) Cylinder.
(c) Gas plug.
(d) Piston extension assembly.
(e) Magazine platform site.

31. Strip the rifle and clean its parts. Clean bore with pull through and chindi. Oil the bore and clean the
cylinder gas. Clean cylinder with pull through and chindi. Gas affected parts like breech block, piston,
extension and firing pin to be cleaned carefully so that gas fouling is completely removed. After cleaning, the
parts should be oiled with a piece of cloth. Do not rub hard outer surface of the rifle with soaked oil.

CONCLUSION

32. The rifleman of an infantry is capable of closing with the enemy and neutralise him with his personnel
weapon. However with the presence of company support weapons his punch increases. The company
support weapons give additional effective strength to the Infantry Rifle Company both in defensive well as
offensive operations The fire power with the Infantry Battalion as its support weapons in the form of 81 mm
mortar and anti tank missile makes its formidable force to deal with enemy. It provides the fire support as well
as metal support to the troops fighting on ground.
73

SUMMARY

1. 5.56 INSAS Rifle is the personal weapon of Indian Army. INSAS Rifle is 25% lighter and has 70%
less recoil as compared to 7.62mm SLR. INSAS Rifle is lighter, compact and easy to fire. (INSAS-Indian
Small Arms System).

(a) Types of ammunition used:-

(b) Ball round.
(c) Tracer round.
(d) Blank round.
(e) High Density cartridge.

2. Infantry Battalion is basic fighting unit of Indian Army. It can fight an opponent independently or
as part of a larger force. The strength of an Infantry Battalion is 20 officers, 42 JCOs, 794 other ranks.

(a) Section is the smallest fighting unit of a Battalion.

(b) Capabilities are:-
(i) Self-reliance.
(ii) Ability to hold ground.
(iii) Adaptability.
(iv) Mobility.

3. Characteristics of company support weapons:-

(a) 7.62 mm Dragunov Sniper Rifle.
(b) 7.62 mm Medium Machine Gun.
(c) 30 mm Medium Grenade Launcher.
(d) 84 mm Rocket Launcher.

4. Characteristics of infantry battalion support weapons should be known by the cadets.

5. The infantry battalion support weapons causes’ maximum casualty to the enemy.

6. Used both in offensive, defensive and special operations against the enemy.

7. Types of infantry battalion support weapons – 81 mm mortar and Anti-tank guided missile.

8. Characteristics of 81 mm mortar and anti-tank guided missiles – weight, range, rate of fire, muzzle
velocity, elevation etc.
74

CHAPTER I : BIOGRAPHIES OF RENOWNED GENERALS

Introduction

1. Military History is a humanities discipline, within the scope of general historical recording of armed
conflicts in the history of humanity, and its impact on the societies, their cultures, economies and changing
national and international relationships. The essential subjects of military history study are the causes of
war, the social and cultural foundations, military doctrine on each side, the logistics, leadership, technology,
strategy, and tactics used, and how these changed over time. Thus it is a dynamic discipline.
Importance / Necessity of Studying Military History

2. History of the World is Largely a History of Warfare. Military history is a valuable field of study to
both professional soldiers and civilians. As historian John Keegan said, “The written history of the world is
largely a history of warfare.” Yet one may argue if someone is not preparing for war, what is the point of
studying the military past? War is such a dominant feature of human history that most modern nation-states
and the nation-state system itself came into existence either through or because of war.
3. All Civilisations have Wars in their Culture. All civilizations have war in their cultures and "the
states within which we live today came into existence largely through conquest, civil strife or struggles for
independence. Consider the United States, a nation forged by the Revolutionary War, re-forged by the Civil
War, and expanded through wars with Native Americans, Mexico and Spain. The study of history, politics
and culture over the last millennia of human history would be impossible without a study of military history.
Without military history, placing these massive changes in their proper context would be impossible.
4. From War Arise Greatest Leaders in History. Maximum leaders in history have arisen from this
conflict / strive. To name a few – Abraham Lincoln of USA, Winston Churchill of Great Britain and Mrs. Indira
Gandhi of India, are best remembered for their contribution in wars. These figures in history "understood the
use of violence and did not hesitate to use it for their ends."
5. Study of Military History Affects the Future of Civilisations. More importantly, most voters lack
any military experience, yet elect leaders-with predominantly the same lack of experience to control the most
powerful armies in the world. These leaders will determine if and how their countries will wage wars. These
decisions will affect the future of civilizations. Military history fills in the gap where personal experience is
sorely lacking. As warfare continues to influence our world today, we who study military history must continue
to learn, and to teach, the lessons demonstrated in history.
6. Study of Military History Develops Leadership Qualities. With study of Military History we
come across many leaders with various leadership qualities. Study of military history helps us to know and
develop the leadership qualities and learn about leadership traits. These include Alertness, Courage,
Dependability, Endurance, Initiative, Integrity, Judgement, Justice, Knowledge, Loyalty, Sense of Humour,
Truthfulness, Espirit-de-Corps, Maturity, Humility and Patience

7. Study of Military History is a Must for Political and Military Commanders. Applying Past
Lessons help us to plan for the future. History can also show how certain plans/moves led to victory or defeat.
Military and Civil leaders can strategize based on the history to develop more concrete techniques to win the
battles in future. In addition, history has also taught us that it is important to have the support of our home front
prior to sending our soldiers to war, especially for extended periods. We must also understand the ideology
of our enemy. Taking the time to learn the mind set and thought process of an enemy does provide us with
the adequate tools to properly prepare ourselves for current and future wars. Soldiers can learn strategy,
operational art, tactics, techniques, battle procedures/drills, logistic and management aspects, leadership
qualities and styles from military history.

BIOGRAPHY OF FIELD MARSHAL KODANDERA MADAPPA CARIAPPA, OBE

8. Field Marshal Kodandera “Kipper" Madappa Cariappa, OBE (28 January 1899 – 15th May 1993) was the first
Indian Chief of Army Staff of the Indian Army and led the Indian forces on the Western Front during the Indo-
Pakistan War of 1947-48. He is among only two Indian Army officers to hold the highest rank of Field Marshal
(the other being Field Marshal Sam Bahadur Manekshaw). His distinguished military career spanned almost
three decades, at the highest point of which, he was appointed as the Commander-in-Chief of the Indian
Military in 1949.

9. Early Life and Military Career. Cariappa was born at Shanivarsante in Kodagu (Coorg)
which is currently in Karnataka. In 1919, he joined the first batch of KCIOs (King's Commissioned Indian
Officers) at The Daly College at Indore and was commissioned into the Carnatic Infantry at Bombay as a
75

Temporary Second Lieutenant. In 1927, Cariappa was promoted to Captain. He saw active service with the
37 (Prince of Wales) Dogra in Mesopotamia (present-day Iraq) and was later posted to the 2nd Queen
Victoria's Own Rajput Light Infantry, which became his permanent regimental home. He was the first Indian
officer to undergo the course at Staff College, Quetta in 1933. He was promoted to the rank of Major in 1938.

10. Cariappa served in Iraq, Syria and Iran from 1941–1942 and then in Burma in 1943-1944. He spent
many of his soldiering years in Waziristan. He earned his 'Mentioned in Despatches' as DAA and QMG of
General (later Field Marshal) Slim's 10th Division. He was the first Indian Officer to be given command of a
unit in 1942. By 1944, Cariappa was a Temporary Lieutenant-Colonel. After command, he volunteered to serve
in 26 Division engaged in clearing the Japanese from Burma, where he was decorated with an “Officer of the
Order of the British Empire.” In 1946, he was promoted as the Brigadier of the Frontier Brigade Group. Post-
Independence, Cariappa was appointed as the Deputy Chief of the General Staff with the rank of Major
General. On promotion as Lieutenant General, he became the Eastern Army Commander.

11. On outbreak of war with Pakistan in 1947, he was moved as General Officer Commanding-in-Chief,
Western Command and directed operations for the recapture of Zojila, Drass and Kargil and re-established a
linkup with Leh. In all this, he showed tremendous energy in moving troops, against considerable odds and
finally ensuring success. On 15 January 1949 Cariappa was appointed as the first Indian Commander-in-
Chief of the Indian Army. Cariappa was then instrumental in turning an Imperial Army into a National Army.

Higher Commands and Offices

12. After his retirement from Indian Army in 1953, he served as the high commissioner to Australia and
New Zealand till 1956. He was conferred with 'Order of the Chief Commander of the Legion Of Merit' by
USA, Harry S. Truman. As a token of gratitude of the nation for the exemplary service rendered by him, the
Government of India conferred Cariappa with the rank of Field Marshal on 14th January 1986 at the age of 87.

BIOGRAPHY OF FIELD MARSHAL SAM MANEKSHAW, MC

13. Field Marshal Sam Hormusji Framji Jamshedji Manekshaw, MC (3 April 1914 – 27 June 2008),
popularly known as Sam Bahadur ("Sam the Brave"), was an Indian military leader. He was the first Indian
Army officer to be promoted to the five-star rank of Field Marshal.

14. Though Manekshaw initially thought of pursuing his career as a doctor, he later joined the first batch
of the Indian Military Academy (IMA) when it was established in 1932. Right from his days at IMA, he proved
to be witty and humorous in nature. He was first attached to the 2nd Battalion of Royal Scots, and then later
posted to the 4th Battalion of 12th Frontier Force Regiment, commonly known as the 54th Sikhs. Following
partition, he later reassigned to the 16th Punjab Regiment, before being posted to the 3rd Battalion, 5th Gorkha
Rifles, for a brief period later he adopted 8th Gorkha Rifles. His distinguished military career spanned four
decades and five wars, beginning with service in the British Indian Army in World War II. During action in World
War II, he was awarded the Military Cross for gallantry.

15. Manekshaw rose to become the 8th Chief of Army Staff of the Indian Army in 1969 and under his
command, Indian forces conducted victorious campaign against Pakistan in the Indo-Pakistani War of 1971
that led to the liberation of Bangladesh in December 1971. Later, he was awarded the Padma Bhushan and
the Padma Vibhushan for his services to the Indian nation.

16. Early Life and Education. Manekshaw was born on 3 April 1914 in Amritsar, Punjab to Parsi
parents, Hormusji Manekshaw, a doctor, and his wife Hilla, who moved to Punjab from the city of Valsad on
the coastal Gujarat. Sam's father served in the British Indian Army as a Captain in the medical services and
also participated in World War I. .Hormusji and Hilla had six children of which Sam was the fifth one. Fali,
Cilla, Jan and Sehroo preceded Sam and Sam was followed Jemi, who later joined the air force as a doctor
and was the first Indian to be awarded the air surgeon's wings from Pensacola, United States. After
completing his schooling in Punjab and Sherwood College, Nainital, and achieving a distinction in the School
Certificate of the Cambridge Board at the age of 15, he asked his father to send him to London to become a
gynaecologist. But his father refused to send him to London stating that he was not old enough.

17. In an act of rebellion against his father's refusal, Manekshaw took the entrance examination for
enrollment into the Indian Military Academy and was one of the fifteen cadets to be selected through open
competition. He stood sixth in the order of merit. Just before taking over as the Chief of the Army Staff, at a
function on 5 June 1969 to mark the centenary of Sherwood College, Manekshaw recalled that his years at
the college had prepared him for war as they had taught him to live alone and independently, to fight without
relent, tolerate hunger for long periods and to hate his enemy.
76

18. Military Career. Manekshaw's military career spanned four decades, from the British era and
World War II, to the three wars against Pakistan and China after India's independence in 1947. He held several
regimental, staff and command assignments. Manekshaw went on to become the 8 th chief of the army staff,
led the Indian Army successfully in a war with Pakistan and became India's first field marshal after
independence. On commissioning, as per the practices of that time, Manekshaw was first attached to the 2nd
Battalion, The Royal Scots, a British battalion, and was later posted to the 4th Battalion, 12th Frontier Force
Regiment, commonly known as the 54th Sikhs. Manekshaw was later reassigned to the 16th Punjab Regiment,
before being posted to the 3rd Battalion, 5th Gorkha Rifles, and then adopted 8th Gorkha Rifle after partition
and went on to become the Colonel of the Regiment of 8th Gorkha Rifle.

19. World War II. During World War II, the then-Captain Manekshaw saw action in Burma in the 1942
campaign on the Sittang River with the 4th Battalion, 12 Frontier Force Regiment,and had the rare distinction
of being honoured for his bravery on the battlefield. During the fighting around Pagoda Hill, a key position on
the left of the Sittang bridgehead, he led his company in a counter-attack against the invading Japanese Army
and despite suffering 50% casualties the company managed to achieve its objective. After capturing the hill,
Manekshaw was hit by a burst of Light Machine Gun fire and was severely wounded in the stomach. Observing
the battle, Major General David Cowan, the then commander of the 17th Infantry Division, spotted Manekshaw
holding on to life and, having witnessed his valour in the face of stiff resistance, rushed over to him. Fearing
that Manekshaw would die, the general pinned his own Military Cross ribbon to Manekshaw saying, "A dead
person cannot be awarded a Military Cross. The official recommendation for the MC states that the success
of the attack was largely due to the excellent leadership and bearing of Captain Manekshaw. This award was
made official with the publication of the notification in a supplement to the London Gazette on 21 April 1942
(dated 23 April 1942).

20. Chief of the Army Staff. Then Chief of the Army Staff (COAS) General P P Kumar Mangalam
was due to retire in June 1969. Though Manekshaw was the senior-most commander in army, then Defence
Minister Sardar Swaran Singh was in favour of Lt Gen Harbaksh Singh, who had played a key role as the
GOC-in-C of Western Command during the1965 Indo-Pak war. Putting the rumours of Harbaksh Singh taking
charge as the COAS to an end, Manekshaw was appointed as the 8th Chief of the Army Staff on 8 June 1969.
As the Chief of the Army Staff, he developed the Indian Army into an efficient instrument of war. During his
tenure as COAS, he was instrumental in stopping the implementation of reservations for scheduled castes and
scheduled tribes in the army.

21. Indo-Pakistan War of 1971. Towards the end of April 1971, Indira Gandhi, the Prime Minister of
India, during a cabinet meeting, asked Manekshaw if he was prepared to go to war with Pakistan. In response,
Manekshaw told her that his single armoured division and two infantry divisions were deployed elsewhere, that
only 13 of his 189 tanks were fit to fight, and that they would be competing for rail carriage with the grain
harvest at that point of time. He also pointed out that the Himalayan passes would soon open up, with the
forthcoming monsoon in East Pakistan, which would result in heavy flooding. When Indira Gandhi asked the
cabinet to leave the room and the chief to stay, he offered to resign. She declined to accept it, but sought his
advice. He then said he could guarantee victory if she would allow him to prepare for the conflict on his terms,
and set a date for it. These were acceded to by the Prime Minister.

22. Under Manekshaw's direction, the army launched several preparatory operations in East Pakistan
including training and equipping the Mukti Bahini (a local group of freedom fighters), and about three brigades
from the regular Bangladesh troops were trained. As an additional measure, 75,000 guerrillas were trained
and equipped with arms and ammunition. These forces were used to harass the Pakistani army stationed in
East Pakistan sporadically in the lead up to the war.

23. The war started on 3 December 1971, when Pakistani aircraft bombed Indian Air Force bases in the
western sector. Manekshaw instructed Lt Gen J F R Jacob, Chief of Staff Eastern Command, to inform the
Indian prime minister that orders were being issued for the movement of troops from Eastern Command. The
following day, the navy and the air force also initiated full-scale operations on both eastern and western fronts.
The veto used by the Russians against the United States' proposal to implement a cease-fire in the United
Nations proved decisive in securing India's victory. Manekshaw addressed the Pakistani troops three times
via radio messages on the subject of surrender, assuring them that they would receive honourable treatment
from the Indian troops. The messages were broadcast on the 9th, 11th and 15 December. The last two
messages were delivered as replies to the messages from Maj Gen Rao Farman Ali and Lt Gen Amir Abdullah
Khan Niazi. These messages from the Pakistani commanders to their troops were to have a devastating
effect on their side, subsequently leading to their defeat.

24. Though on 11 December, Ali messaged the United Nations requesting for a cease-fire, it was not
authorized by the President Yahya Khan and the fighting continued. Following several discussions and
77

consultations, and subsequent attacks by the Indian forces, Yahya decided to stop the war in order to save
the lives of the Pakistani soldiers. The actual decision to surrender was taken by Niazi on 15 December and
was conveyed to Manekshaw through the United States Consul General in Dhaka (then Dacca) via
Washington. But Manekshaw replied that he would stop the war only if the Pakistani troops surrendered to
their Indian counterparts by 9:00 a.m. on 16 December. Later the deadline was extended to 3:00 p.m. of the
same day on Niazi's request. The Instrument of Surrender was formally signed on 16 December 1971.

25. Promotion to Field Marshal. After the end of the war, Indira Gandhi decided to promote
Manekshaw to the rank of Field Marshal and subsequently appoint him as the Chief of the Defence Staff
(CDS). However, after several objections from the bureaucracy and the commanders of the navy and the air
force, the latter was dropped. Though Manekshaw was to retire in June 1972, his term was extended by a
period of six months. On 3 December 1973, Manekshaw was conferred with the rank of Field Marshal at a
ceremony held at Rashtrapati Bhavan.

MARSHAL OF THE AIR FORCE : ARJAN SINGH

26. Marshal of the Indian Air Force Arjan Singh, DFC was born on 15 April 1919. He is the only officer of
the Indian Air Force to be promoted to five-star rank, equal to a Field Marshal, to which he was promoted in
2002. He was born in the Punjab town of Lyallpur, British India, into Aulakh family.

27. Early Life and Career. Arjan Singh was born on 15 April 1919 in Lyallpur in the Punjab in
what was then British India. He was educated at Montgomery, India (now in Pakistan). He entered the RAF
College Cranwell in 1938 and was commissioned as a Pilot Officer in December 1939. As a distinguished
graduate of the RAF College, Singh's portrait is found on the walls of the College's west staircase. Air Marshal
Arjan Singh led No.1 Squadron, Indian Air Force into command during the Arakan Campaign in 1944. He
was awarded the Distinguished Flying Cross (DFC) in 1944, and commanded the Indian Air Force Exhibition
Flight in 1945.

28. Career and Commands Held. He was Chief of the Air Staff (CAS), from 1 August 1964 to
15 July 1969, and was awarded the Padma Vibhushan in 1965. He also became the first Air Chief Marshal
of the Indian Air Force when, in recognition of the Air Force contribution in the 1965 war, the rank of the Chief
of Air Staff was upgraded to that of Air Chief Marshal. After he retired in 1969 at the age of 50, he was appointed
the Indian Ambassador to Switzerland in 1971. He concurrently served as the Ambassador to the Vatican.
He was appointed High Commissioner to Kenya in 1974. He was member of the Minorities Commission,
Government of India from 1975-1981. He was Lt. Governor of Delhi from Dec 1989 - Dec 1990 and was
made Marshal of the Air Force in January, 2002. He expired on 16th Sep 2017.

29. Career Highlights.

(a) 1938-Entered RAF College Cranwell as a Flight Cadet.

(b) 1939-Commissioned in Royal Air Force as a Pilot Officer.
(c) 1945-Awarded Distinguished Flying Cross.
(d) 1964-Chief of Air Staff (Air Marshal).
(e) 1965-Chief of Air Staff rank upgraded to Air Chief Marshal.
(f) 1965-Awarded Padma Vibhushan.
(g) 1969-Retired from Indian Air Force.
(h) 1971-Ambassador to Switzerland.
(i) 1974-High Commissioner to Kenya.
(j) 2002-Marshal of the Air Force.

CONCLUSION

30. Today the Indian Military is the third largest in the world. As India is planning to emerge as a regional
super power, it is mandatory for its civilian and military leaders to learn from military history to be ready to meet
future challenges. We can learn a lot from the biographies of Field Marshal Cariappa, Field Marshal Sam
Manekshaw and Marshal of the Air Force Arjan Singh. Therefore, it is important for all cadets to study the
biographies of Field Marshal Cariappa and Field Marshal Sam Manekshaw. The Leadership qualities
displayed by them worth emulating in every walks of life.
84

CHAPTER III : STUDY OF BATTLES OF INDO-PAK WAR 1965, 1971, OPREATION MEGHDOOT AND
KARGIL

Introduction

1. The partition of the subcontinent c a m e into effect on15 August 1947, when India gained
independence. Pakistan declared independence a day earlier. At the time of independence the old Indian
Army stood divided between Pakistan and India. Instead of large scale celebrations, riots and mass killing
between Hindus and Muslims in Punjab and Bengal intensified. It also led to acute suffering and misery of
the displaced people, a part from colossal loss of precious human lives and destruction of property due to
communal riots and retribution.

2. Taking advantage of communal strife, in Oct 1947 Pakistani troops soon crossed over into Kashmir to
participate into an undeclared war with India. The tribal' volunteers'
along with Pakistani regulars had by then overrun large tracts of
Jammu province and the Valley, which shared a porous border with
Pakistan. It was when they had reached Badgaon, on the suburbs
of Srinagar that the Maharaja of J&K signed the Instrument of
Accession and put in a bid for India’s military assistance. Indian
Army then swung into action to save J&K.

3. Despite the accession of the state, a part of Kashmir, known

as Pakistan Occupied Kashmir, remains under the illegal occupation
of Pakistan, and this has remained a contentious issue between
both nations. Since 1947-1948 war, India and Pakistan have
fought the following wars: -
(a) 1965War.
(b) 1971 War.
(c) 1999 Kargil War.
(d) Proxy war since1988 till date.

INDO-PAKISTANI WAR 1965

4. The Indo-Pakistan war of 1965 was a culmination of skirmishes that took place between April 1965
and September 1965 between Pakistan and India. The conflict began following Pakistan’s Operation
Gibraltar, which was designed to infiltrate forces into Jammu and Kashmir to participate in insurgency against
Indian rule. In retaliation, India reacted swiftly and launched a counter attack and a second confrontation with
Pakistan took place in 1965, largely over Kashmir. Pakistani President Ayub Khan launc h ed Operation
Gibraltar in August1 9 6 5 , duri ng w h i c h s ev era l Pakistani paramilitary troops infiltrated into Indian-
administered Kashmir and attempted to ignite an anti-India agitation in Jammu and Kashmir. Pakistani leaders
believed that India, which was still recovering from the disastrous Sino-Indian War, would be unable to deal
with a military thrust and a Kashmiri rebellion. Pakistan launched O peration Grand Slam on 1 September,
invading India’s Chamb- Jaurian sector.

5. Offensive on Pakistan. Initially, the Indian Army met with considerable resistance in the
northern sector. After launching prolonged artillery barrages against Pakistan, India was able to capture three
important mountain positions in Kashmir. By 9 September, the Indian Army had made considerable in-roads
into Pakistan. India had its largest haul of Pakistani tanks when the offensive of Pakistan's 1stArmoured
Division was blunted at the Battle of Asal Uttar, which took place on 10 September near Khemkaran in Punjab.
Another tank battle of the war came in the form of the Battle of Chawinda, the largest tank battle in history
after World War II. Pakistan's defeat at the Battle of Asal Uttar and Dograi hastened the end of the conflict.

6. Battle of Dograi. To relieve pressure at Chamb–Jaurian Sector in J&K, 15 Infantry Division

launched offensive in Lahore sector. 3 JAT of 54 Infantry Brigade crossed Ichogil canal and captured the
town ship of Dograi and was just 13 miles from Lahore on 23 September 1965. On23 September 1965 cease
fire was announced. A decision to return back to pre-war positions was taken following the Tashkent
Declaration.

INDO-PAKISTAN WAR 1971

7. An independence mov ement broke out in East Pakistan which was brutally crushed by Pakistani
forces. Due to large-scale atrocities against them, thousands of Bengalis took refuge in neighbouring India
85

causing major refugee crisis. In early 1971, India declared its full-support for the Bengali rebels, known as
Mukti Bahini, and Indian agents were extensively involved in covert operations to aid them. Wary of India's
growing involvement in the Bengali rebellion, the Pakistan Air Force (PAF) launched a preemptive strike on
10 Indian air bases at Srinagar, Jammu, Pathankot, Amritsar, Agra, Adampur, Jodhpur, Jaisalmer, Uttarlai and
Sirsa at 1745 hours on 3 December. This aerial offensive, however, failed to accomplish its stated objectives
and gave India its excuse to declare a full-scale war against Pakistan the same day. By midnight, the Indian
Army, accompanied by Indian Air Force, launched a major three-pronged assault into East Pakistan. The
Indian Army won several battles on the eastern front including the decisive of Battle of Hilli, which was the only
front where the Pakistani Army was able to build up considerable resistance. India's massive early gains was
largely attributed to the speed and flexibility with which Indian armoured divisions moved across East Pakistan.

8. Battle of Longewala. Pakistan launched a counter-attack against India on the western front. On 4
December 1971, ‘A’ company of the 23rd Battalion of India's Punjab Regiment detected and intercepted the
movement of the 51st Infantry Brigade of the Pakistani Army near Ramgarh, Rajasthan. The battle of
Longewala ensured during which the A company, though being out numbered, thwarted the Pakistani advance
until the Indian Air Force directed its fighters to engage the Pakistani tanks. By the time the battle had ended,
38 Pakistani tanks and 100 armoured vehicles were either destroyed or abandoned. About 200 Pakistani
troops were killed in action during the battle while only 2 Indian soldiers lost their lives. Pakistan suffered
another major defeat on the western front during the Battle of Basantar which was fought from 4 December to
16 December. By the end of the battle, about 66 Pakistani tanks were destroyed and 40 more were captured.
In return, Pakistani forces were able to destroy only 11 Indian tanks. By 16 December, Pakistan had lost size
able territory on both eastern and western fronts.

9. Surrender o f Pakistan Army in Dhaka. Under t h e c o m m a n d o f Lt General J S Arora,

the ‘3 Corps’ of the Indian Army, which had invaded East Pakistan, entered Dhaka and forced Pakistani forces
to surrender on 16 Dec 1971, one day after the Battle of Basantar. After Pakistan's Lt General AAK. Niazi
signed the Instrument of Surrender, India took more than 90,000 Pakistani prisoners of war.

OPREATION MEGHDOOT : SIACHEN GLACIER

Introduction
10. The Siachen Glacier became a
bone of contention following a vague
demarcation of territories in the Karachi
Agreement of July 1949 which did not
exactly specify who had authority over the
Siachen Glacier area. Indian interpretation
was that Pakistan territory extended only
Saltoro Ridge based on the Simla
agreement where the territorial line's route
after the last demarcated Point NJ9842 was
"thence North to the glaciers." Pakistan
interpretation was that their territory
continued northeast from Point NJ9842 to
the Karakoram Pass. As a result, both
nations claimed the barren heights and the Siachen Glacier. In the 1970s and early 1980s, Pakistan permitted
expeditions to climb the peaks in the Siachen region from the Pakistani side, perhaps in an attempt to reinforce
their claim on the area as these expeditions received permits obtained from the Government of Pakistan and
in many cases a liaison officer from the Pakistan army accompanied the teams.

11. In 1978, the Indian Army also allowed mountaineering expeditions to the glacier, approaching from its
side. The most notable one was the one launched by Colonel Narinder "Bull" Kumar of the Indian Army, who
led an expedition to Teram Kangri, along with medical officer Captain AVS Gupta. The first air landing on the
glacier was carried out on 6 October 1978 when two casualties were evacuated from the Advance Base Camp
in a Chetak helicopter. Contention over the glacier was aggravated by these expeditions, through both sides
asserting their claims.
86

12. Notably, when Pakistan gave

permission to a Japanese expedition to
scale an important peak (Rimo I) in 1984, it
further fueled the suspicion of the Indian
Government of Pakistani attempts to
legitimize their claim. The peak, located
east of the Siachen Glacier, also overlooks
the north western areas of the Aksai Chin
area which is occupied by China but
claimed by India. The Indian military
believed that such an expedition could
further a link for a trade route from the north
eastern (Chinese) to the southwestern
(Pakistani) side of the Karakoram Range
and eventually provide a strategic,
advantage to the Pakistani Armed Forces.

13. Back Ground. The Indian

military decided to deploy troops from
Northern Ladakh region as well as some
paramilitary forces to the glacier area.
Most of the troops had been acclimatized
to the extremities of the glacier through a
training expedition to Antarctica in 1982
before eventually launching the operation
to occupy complete glacier. In 1983,
Pakistani generals decided to stake their
claim through troop deployments to the
Siachen glacier. After analysing the Indian
Army's mountaineering expeditions, they
feared that India might capture key ridges and passes near the glacier, and decided to send their own troops
first. Islamabad ordered Arctic-weather gear from a London supplier, unaware that the same supplier provided
outfits to the Indians. The Indians were informed about this development and initiated their own plan, providing
them with a head start.

14. Operation Meghdoot. The Indian Army planned an operation to control the glacier by 13 April 1984,
to pre empt the Pakistani Army by about 4 days, as intelligence had reported that the Pakistani operation
planned to occupy the glacier by 17 April. Named for the divine cloud messenger, Meghaduta, from the 4th
century AD Sanskrit play by Kalidasa, Operation Meghdoot was led by Lieutenant General Prem Nath Hoon.
The task of occupying the Saltoro ridge was given to 26 Sector, commanded by Brigadier Vijay Channa, who
was tasked with launching the operation between April 10 and 30. He chose April 13, supposedly an unlucky
date, because it was the Vaisakhi day, when the Pakistanis would be least expecting the Indians to launch an
operation.

15. Preparations for Operation Meghdoot started with the airlift of Indian Army soldiers by the Indian Air
Force. The Air Force used Il-76, An-12 and An-32 to transport stores and troops as well to airdrop supplies to
high altitude airfields. From there Mi-17, Mi-8 and own helicopters carried provisions and personnel to the
east of the hitherto unscaled peaks.
87

The first phase of the operation began in

March 1984 with the march on foot to the
eastern base of the glacier. A full
battalion of the Kumaon Regiment and
units from the Ladakh Scouts, marched
with full battle packs through an ice-
bound Zoji La pass for days. The units
under the command of Lieutenant-
Colonel (later Brigadier) D. K. Khanna
were moved on foot to avoid detection of
large troop movements by Pakistani
radars.

16. The first unit to establish position

on the heights of the glacier was led by
Major (later Lieutenant-Colonel) R. S.
Sandhu. The next unit led by Captain
Sanjay Kulkarni secured Bilafond La.
The remaining forward deployment units
then marched and climbed for four days
under the command of Captain PV Yadav to secure the remaining heights of the Saltoro Ridge. By April 13,
approximately 300 Indian troops were dug into the critical peaks and passes of the glacier. By the time
Pakistan troops managed to get into the immediate area, they found that the Indian troops had controlled all
three major mountain passes of Sia La, Bilafond La, and by 1987 Gyong La and all the commanding heights
of the Saltoro Ridge west of the Siachen Glacier. Handicapped by the altitude and the limited time, Pakistan
could only manage to control the Saltoro Ridge's western slopes and foothills despite the fact that Pakistan
possessed more ground accessible routes to the area, unlike Indian access which was largely reliant on air
drops for supplies due to the steeper eastern side of the glacier. In his memoirs, former Pakistani president,
General Pervez Musharraf states that Pakistan lost 985.71 sq mi (2,553.0 km2) of territory. Time magazine
also states that the Indian advance captured 985.71 sq mi (2,553.0 km2) of territory claimed by Pakistan.
Camps were soon converted to permanent posts by both countries. The number of casualties on both sides
during this particular operation has been large.

17. Aftermath and Current Situation. There are divergent views on the strategic value of the
operation. Some view it as a futile capture of non-strategic land which antagonized relations between India
and Pakistan. Others consider the operation to be a "daring" success by the Indian Military and ensured that
the Indian military held tactical high ground on the strategic Saltoro Ridge just west of the glacier, albeit at a
high cost. The Indian Army currently controls all of the 70 kilo metres (43 mi) long Siachen Glacier and all of
its tributary glaciers, as well as the three main passes of the Saltoro Ridge immediately west of the glacier, Sia
La, Bilafond La, and Gyong La, thus holding onto the tactical advantage of high ground. The operation and the
continued cost of maintaining logistics to the area is a major drain on both militaries. Pakistan launched an
all out assault in 1987 and again in 1989 to capture the ridge and passes held by India. The first assault was
headed by then-Brigadier-General Pervez Musharraf (later President of Pakistan) and initially managed to
capture a few high points before being pushed back. Later the same year, Pakistan lost at least one major
Pakistani post, the "Quaid", which came under Indian control as Bana Post, in recognition of Bana Singh who
launched a daring daylight attack, codenamed Operation Rajiv, after climbing 1,500 ft (460 m) of ice cliff.
Bana Singh was awarded the Param Vir Chakra (PVC), the highest gallantry award of India for the assault that
captured the post. Bana Post is the highest battlefield post in the world today at a height of 22,143 feet (6,749
m) above sea level. The second assault in 1989 was also unsuccessful as the ground positions did not
change. The loss of most of the Siachen area and the subsequent unsuccessful military forays prompted
Benazir Bhutto to taunt Zia ul Haq that he should wear a burqa as he had lost his manliness.

KARGIL CONFLICT- 1999

18. In 1998, India carried out nuclear tests and a few days later, Pakistan responded by more nuclear
tests giving both countries nuclear deterrence capability, although India had exploded three hydrogen bombs
which Pakistan lacks. Diplomatic tension ceased after the Lahore Summit was held in 1999.The sense of
optimism was short-lived, however, since mid-1999 Pakistani paramilitary forces and Kashmiri insurgents
captured deserted, but strategic, Himalayan heights in the Kargil district of India. These had been vacated by
the Indian army during the onset of the inhospitable winter and were supposed to reoccupy in spring. Once
the scale of the Pakistani incursion was realised, the Indian Army quickly mobilized about 200,000 troops and
Operation Vijay was launched.
88

19. However, since the heights were under Pakistani control, India was in a clear strategic
disadvantage. From their observation posts, the Pakistani forces had a clear line-of-sight to bring down
indirect artillery fire on NH 1A, inflicting heavy casualties on the Indians. Thus, the Indian Army's first priority
was to recapture peaks that were in the immediate vicinity of NH1A. This resulted in Indian troops first
targeting theTiger Hill and Tololing complex in Dras.

20. Battle of Tololing. The Battle of Tololing, was one of the pivotal battles in the kargil war between
Indian Armed forces and troops from Northern Light Infantry who were aided by other Pakistan irregulars in
1999. Tololing is a dominating feature overlooking Srinagar-Leh (NH1D) and was vital link. The terrain was
such that frontal attacks had to be launched which resulted in heavy causalities. The three week assault
finally culminated with India taking control of the peak and changing the course of the war. 23 Indian soldiers
were killed in the final assault, resulting in one of the costliest battle of the entire war. Other assaults, slowly
tilted the combat in India's favour. Never the less, some of the posts put up s t i f f resistance, including Tiger
Hill (Point5140) that fell only later in the war.

21. The Indian Army mounted some direct frontal ground assaults which were slow and took a heavy toll
given the steep ascent that had to be made on peaks as high as 18,000 feet (5,500m). Two months into the
conflict, Indian troops had slowly retaken most of the ridges they had lost; according to official count, an
estimated 75%–80% of the intruded area and nearly all high ground was back under Indian control. On 4 July
1999, Pakistan’s Prime Minister Sharif agreed to withdraw Pakistani troops under US pressure and the fighting
came to a gradual halt, but some Pakistani forces remained in positions on the Indian side of the LOC.

22. The Indian Army launched its final attacks in the last week of July; as soon as the Drass sub sector
had been cleared of Pakistani forces, the fighting ceased on 26 July. 26 July has since been marked as ‘Kargil
Vijay Diwas’ (Kargil Victory Day) in India. By the end of the war,India had resumed control of all territory south
and east of the Line of Control, as was established in July 1972 as per the Shimla Accord.

CONCLUSION

23. Wars with Pakistan has been a regular affair in the long history of both countries along with conflicts
with china. This is a compulsive and existential necessity for the Pakistani State controlled by their military.
The sacrifices made by the Indian Army to safeguard the sovereignty and integrity of the nation are great, for
which the whole nation is proud of its achievements.
89

CHAPTER IV : WAR MOVIES

1. Introduction. Battles are fought in the wilderness and away from limelight, however ferocious and
destructive they may be. Historians have always tried to piece together those little but significant actions by
individuals and groups bringing out their valour and courage for the consumption of future generations. Here
we will see three visual documentaries on Indo – Pak wars of 1965, 1971 and 1999 to gain further insight on
the subject.

Documentary on Indo – Pak War 1965

2. Screening of documentary on Indo – Pak war 1965.

Documentary on Indo – Pak War 1971

3. Screening of documentary on Indo – Pak war 1971.

Documentary on Kargil Conflict 1999

4. Screening of documentary on Indo – Pak Kargil Conflict, 1999.

CONCLUSION

5. The study of the Indo-Pak War brings out the sacrifices made by the Armed Forces of India. It is
heartening to see the role of Armed Forces in maintaining the sovereignty and integrity of our nation. One must
salute the war heroes and all those who have laid down their lives for the motherland.
90

SUMMARY

1. Field Marshal KM Cariappa, OBE was the first native Indian Chief of Army Staff of the Indian Army.
He is only among three Indian Army officers to hold the highest rank of Field Marshal. He was appointed as
the Commander-in-Chief of the Indian Military in 1949, received the rank of Field Marshal On 14th January
1986 at the age of 87.

2. The Param Vir Chakra (PVC) is India’s highest military decoration award for highest degree of valour
or self-sacrifice in the presence of enemy. The PVC was established on 26 January 1950 by the President of
India. The medal was designed by Mrs Savitri Khanolkar.

3. CHM Piru Singh Shekhawat, PVC on 17 July 1948, Company Havildar Major Singh was posthumously
was awarded the India's highest military decoration, the Param Vir Chakra..

4. Maj Shaitan Singh, PVC was awarded ParamVir Chakra, the highest wartime gallantry medal,
posthumously, for his outstanding leadership during ‘Battle of Rejang La’.

5. Captain Vikram Batra, PVC was posthumously awarded with the ParamVir Chakra for his actions
during the 1999 Kargil Conflict. He led one of the toughest operations in mountain warfare in Indian history.

6. India has fought four wars with Pakistan so far, 1947-48 War,1965 War,1971 War and Kargil Conflict

7. War of 1965.

(a) Pakistan launched Operation Gibraltar to support insurgency in J&K against Indian rule.
(b) In retaliation India launched Operation Grand Slam in western sector against Pakistan.
(c) The famous battles of 1965 war include Battle of Asal-Uttar, Battle of Dograi etc.
(d) Battle of Chawinda was the largest tank battle in the history after World War II.

8. War of 1971.

(a) In early1971,India declared its full-support for the Bengali rebels ,Known as Mukti Bahini.
(b) Battle of Longewala was fought on 4 December 1971.
(c) On16 December 1971, more than 90000 Pakistani soldiers surrendered at Dhaka.

9. Operation Meghdoot, Siachen Glacier The Siachen Glacier became a bone of contention
following a vague demarcation of territories in the Karachi Agreement of 1949, the boundary demarcated as
Actual Ground Position Line beyond point NJ 9842 and both India and Pakistan occupying positions on both
sides.

10. Kargil Conflict 1999 was fought on the heights of Kargil and Drass in 1999. In mid-1999 Pakistani
paramilitary forces and Kashmiri insurgents captured deserted, but strategic, Himalayan heights in the Kargil
district of India. Indian forces painstakingly recaptured all posts one after another in a bloody conflict.
Operation Vijay was declared success on 26 July1999.
91

CHAPTER I : INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION AND LATEST TRENDS

1. Communication is the easy transmission of thoughts and ideas from one individual to another and
vice-a-versa and reception and understanding of others ideas in the original form. Various forms of
communications are sign language, voice, written script, line transmission, radio wave, space wave and highly
complex digital communication. In modern battlefield, activities of the army have become very complex and
require frequent communication between commanders and troops to achieve the desired results. Importance
of communications is becoming a major ingredient of modern warfare.

2. Line Communication The invention of telephone by Graham Bell revolutionized the world of
communications as individuals were able to speak directly to each other. This is the basic means of signal
communications for a force which is static. A telephone is by far the best means of signal communication
between individuals following are advantages and disadvantages given below: -

(a) Advantages.

(i) Reliable and practically free from electrical interference.

(ii) Relatively secure.
(iii) Number of circuits and message carrying capacity is more but limited only by
availability of material and manpower.
(b) Disadvantages.

(iv) Vulnerable to physical interference and enemy interception along the entire length of
the route.
(v) Takes time to construct.
(vi) Inflexible once it is laid.
(vii) Expensive in men and material

RADIO COMMUNICATION

3. Radio Communication. Radio is the technology of using radio waves to carry information
such as sound, by systematically modulating properties of electromagnetic energy waves. The information in
the waves can be extracted when radio waves strike an electrical conductor and transformed back into its
original form. Radio communication requires the use of both transmitting and receiving equipment. The
transmitting equipment, which includes a radio transmitter and transmitting antenna, is installed at the point
from which messages are transmitted. The receiving equipment, which includes a radio receiver and receiving
antenna, is installed at the point at which messages are received

4. Wave. A wave can be described as a disturbance that travels through a medium from one location
to another location. Types of waves can broadly be divided in two parts :-

(b) Mechanical Waves. A mechanical wave is a wave that is an oscillation of matter, and
therefore transfers energy through a medium.

(c) Electromagnetic Waves. Electromagnetic waves are waves which can travel through
the vacuum of outer space.

(d) Propagation of Wave. The mode of propagation of electromagnetic waves (EMW) from
transmitter to receiver depends upon the frequency employed. These can be of following types :-

(i) Sky Wave Propagation.

(ii) Space Wave Propagation
(iii) Ground Wave Propagation.
(iv) Tropospheric Scatter.

5. Radio Communication involves Net Radio and Radio Relay.

Net Radio
92

6. Net radio is the basic means of signal communication for any mobile force. Efficiency of net radio
communication is appreciably affected by factors such as weather, terrain, power output of the set, state of
training of operators and equipment maintenance. It provides facilities for the following :-
(a) Radio Telephony – Simple one way voice communication, depending on the type of
equipment available.
(b) Radio telegraphy for transmission of message and key conversations.
(c) Tele printers over radio transmission.

7. Advantages.
(a) Vulnerable only at terminal and is therefore reasonably protected from enemy action except
by a direct hit.
(b) Flexible hence can be rapidly re-arranged in the event of regrouping.
(c) Rapid in establishing communication.
(d) Works on the move although range obtained will be much less than when stationary.
(e) Economical in personnel and equipment.

8. Disadvantages.
(a) Inherently insecure and susceptible to enemy interception which necessitates the use of
codes and ciphers with a consequent delay in clearing traffic and overall increase in operating
personnel.
(b) Net radio being inherently insecure demands a considerable degree of security consciousness
on the part of the users. This means adherence to standard procedure and security codes.

Radio Relay

9. Radio relay implies that a series of radio transmitters and receivers normally spaced between 20-
35 Kms apart and are used to provide point signal communication.

10. Advantages.
(a) Replace line with considerable economy of manpower and stores.
(b) It can be operated over area where for reasons of ground or enemy activity use of line may
not be possible.
(c) Provides greater flexibility than line.
(d) Quick to set up and move except in mountainous country.
(e) By its ability to employ multichannel equipment radio relay provides more tele-printer circuits
over one link than can normally be provided over the average field cable. Thus it has much greater
traffic handling capacity.
11. Disadvantages.
(a) Liable to interception and hence insecure. Has relatively greater security than net radio,
depending upon the sitting and direction of the beams.
(b) Liable to interference from enemy jamming although not as much as in the case of net radio.
(c) Terrain between stations must be reasonably suitable to get a ‘quasi optical path’, this
presents difficulty in sitting.
(d) Location of terminal and intermediate stations may not suit tactical layout and may,
therefore, create additional protection requirements.
(e) It cannot work on the move.
(f) Slightly more expensive in men and material than in the case of net radio.
(g) Needs critical sitting.

CHARACTERISTICS OF WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY (MOBILE, WI-FI ETC.)

12. Features of Wi-Fi Technology. Wireless operations permit services, such as a long-range
communications, which are impossible or impractical to
implement with the use of wires. Information is transferred
in this manner over both short and long distances.

13. The following list summarizes some of the

benefits of a Wi-Fi network

(a) Unmatched mobility and elasticity.

Wi-Fi, is allowing the new intensity of
connectivity without giving up functions. Wi-Fi
introduced various types of utilities such music
93

streamers that transmit your music to speakers without any wire you can also play music from the
remote computer or any other attached to the network. The most important now you can play online
radio. Wifi technology system is rather remarkable, you can download songs, send an email and
transfer files expediently at sky-scraping speed and you can move your computer easily because your
WiFi network has no cable to disrupt your work so we can say that it is quite easy, helpful and most of
all expedient.

(b) Fortress Technology Wi-Fi providing secure wireless solutions support the growth and
release of a prototype mobile ad hoc wireless network for use in the wireless strategic skirmish.

(c) Support an Entire Age Bracket. Wi-Fi technology has several advantages, it
supports an entire age bracket and create as connection between components on the same network
and have the ability to transfer data between the devices and enable different kinds of devices such
as game, MP3 player, PDA’s and much more!

(d) Convenient and Available Everywhere. Wi-Fi is a convenient technology and where
the network range station exists you are online during travel; you can equip with a Wi-Fi network and
get connected. You will automatically connect to the internet if you are near a hotspot. These days
WiFi exist everywhere with all its wonders.

(e) Faster and Secure With Wi-Fi, you can get a high speed of internet because it is very
fast than DSL and Cable connection you can establish a Wi-Fi network in small space now you don’t
need any professional installation just connect to a power outlet with an Ethernet cord, and start
browsing. Wi-Fi security system for Threats makes it more renewable and its tool protect your VPN
and secure web page. You can easily configure the device to take better performance. The standard
devices, embedded systems, and network security make it more powerful.

(f) Wi-Fi with no limitation You can use a “Wi-Fi” network with no limitation because it
can connect you worldwide. You can easily cater to your requirements with Wi-Fi networking
applications because the power consumption is not very high as compared to another bandwidth
networks. The future of wireless internet network communications is bright.

(g) Extension of Wi-Fi Technology It is because of this wireless technology that so many
other advancements could take place. Have you even thought of your TV to be supported by WI-FI?
Well if you didn’t, start thinking now. There are smart TV’s in a market that connects to the internet.
Having the internet on TV makes it possible to watch you tube videos, Net Flix and so much more.
Read more about Wi-Fi TV technology on World Wide Web for more information

(h) Cost Reduction. As mentioned above, the absence of wires and cables brings down cost.

(i) Flexibility. Extended access, cost reductions, and mobility create opportunities for new
applications as well as the possibility of creative new solutions for legacy applications.

TERMINAL EQUIPMENT AND LIMITATIONS OF WI-FI

14. Mobile Telephones. One of the best-known examples of

wireless technology is the mobile phone, also known as a cellular phone,
with more than 4.6 billion mobile cellular subscriptions worldwide as of the
end of 2010.These wireless phones use radio waves from signal-
transmission towers to enable their users to make phone calls from many
locations worldwide.

15. Wireless Data Communications. Wireless data

communications are an essential component of mobile computing. The
various available technologies differ in local availability, coverage range
and performance, and in some circumstances, users must be able to
employ multiple connection types and switch between them.

16. Wi-Fi technology is not perfect and has many flaws that limit its use as follows:

(a) Security. Because wireless transmissions can pass through walls, security is an issue.

(b) Wireless Reception. Varies from area to area, even within your own apartment. It's not
94

always guaranteed that you'll have a connection to the Internet.

(c) Interference. Call quality is greatly influenced by the environment, is particularly sensitive to
electromagnetic radiation generated by other household appliances.

(d) Compatibility Issue. Despite the global standardization, many devices from different
manufacturers are not fully compatible, which in turn affects the speed of communication

CHARACTERISTICS OF WALKIE / TALKIE

17. A Walkie/Talkie (formally known as a hand held transceiver) are a hand-held, portable, two-way
radio transceiver. Its development during the Second World War is credited to Donald L. Hings, radio
engineer Alfred J.Gross, and engineering teams at Motorola. Where a phone's ear piece is only loud enough
to be heard by the user, a walkie-talkie's built-in speaker can be heard by the user and those in the user’s
immediate vicinity. Hand-held transceivers may be used to communicate between each other, or to vehicle-
mounted or base station.

18. Radio set GP338 Motorola. Defence organizations use hand held radios for a variety of
purposes. Radio Set Gp338 Motorola can communicate on a variety of bands and modulation schemes.

19. Facilities / Features

(a) FACILITIES.
(i) It is portable and light in weight.
(ii) Can be operated easily.
(iii) It can be operated in VHF/UHF and 2 way simplex mode.
(iv) 128 channel of this radio set can be preset into 8 zone.
(v) Option of selective call facilities available.
(vi) Call alert can be given to receiver station.
(vii) Can select required zone.
(viii) Start/stop facilities of scan operation available.
(ix) Add/Delete from scan list facilities available.

(b) Weight and Measure. Weight and measure of this radio set is as follows:
(i) Dimension with Nickel Metal-Hydride high capacity battery-137x57.5x37.5mm.
(ii) Weight with Nickel Metal-Hydride high capacity battery-420gm.

(c) Frequency Range. Frequency of this radio set is as under:-

(i) 136 MHz to 174 MHz on VHF mode.
(ii) 403 MHz to 470 MHz on UHF mode.

(d) Communication Range. Communication range of this radio set is 4 to 5 Km and 20 to

40 Km with repeater.

(e) Power Supply. Power supply can be provided to this radio set by the high capacity
7.2 volt batteries.

(f) Battery Charging Time. 1 hour for high capacity 7.2 volt batteries.
(i) Power output (HF) 1 to 5W
att.
(ii) Power output (UHF) 1 to 4
Watt.

20. WALKIE/TALKIE. This radio set has

been divided into four portions.

(a) Top Panel. Contains On/Off

Volume Knob, Channel Selector Knob, Top
Button and Antenna
95

(b) Side Button. Name and

functions of the large control on side
panel is Press to Talk Switch and
Right Side Accessory Mount.

(c) Front Panel. There are a

total of six buttons i.e. Exit Key, Up
Key, and Menu Select Key. Front
Panel Key Pad. This is an
alphanumeric keypad. There are 10
keys on this pad from 0 to 9. One key
star and one extract key. LCD
Display. This is a 14-character LCD
display window and 14 types of
indicators are displayed.

(d) Back Panel. The battery is fixed on this back panel of radio.

LATEST TRENDS AND DEVELOPMENT IN COMMUNICATION

Tropo Scatter, Modem, Fax, and Telex

21. Tropo scatter. The lower layer of the atmosphere below 15

Km height is called tropospheric region. Communication carried out
in this layer use the principle of tropo scatter. In this system micro
waves are transmitted in the Ultra High Frequency (UHF) and Super
High Frequency (SHF) band to achieve Radio Communication over
the horizon covering a range between 70 Km to 1000 Km.

22. MODEM (Modular-Demodulator). This device is

used to convert computer generated output (Digital signals) that
can be transmitted on a telephone line. Modems are required at
both the sending and receiving computers.

23. Fax. This is common short form of FACSIMILE which is

one of the memory type electronic mail and message systems with
the following advantages:-

(a) Can transmit graphics as well as

Alpha numeric information (letters and numbers).

(b) Reduce time and eliminates transmission error.

(c) Use any transmission medium eg. Telephone, line, micro radio wave.
96

24. Telex. This is the abbreviated form of TELE PRINTER

EXCHANGE. As cable is used in this type of communication devices to
connect two such instruments it restricts its range of operation.
(a) Advantage.
(i) Re-generative repeaters in a network can increase
range; however voice signal cannot be re-generated.
(ii) Can be used over a telephone network.
(iii) Can receive messages when unattended.
(iv) Message is recorded in a printer form.

(b) Disadvantages.
(i) The Equipment is costlier than a telephone set.
(ii) Key in error due to the need for a human operator
to send-receive message.
(iii) Lack of privacy since any one can read the printed output.

25. Satellite. Satellites are used for many purposes. Common types include military and civilian
Earth observation satellites, communications satellites, navigation satellites, weather satellites, and space
telescopes. Space stations and human spacecraft in orbit are also satellites. Satellite orbits vary greatly,
depending on the purpose of the satellite, and are classified in a number of ways. Well-known (overlapping)
classes include low Earth orbit, polar orbit, and geostationary orbit.

26. Optical Fibre Communication Computer System. Hollow tubes made of corning glass with an
outer protective coating of rubber/plastic etc. are what constitute optical fibers. These fibers are very delicate
and small in diameter.

(a) Advantages.

(i) It has wide band width carrying different types of information from low speed voice
signal to high speed computer data.
(ii) Less power requirement.
(iii) Small cable size.
(iv) No electromagnetic interference.
(b) Disadvantages.

(i) Expensive in terms of equipment and manufacturing.

(ii) Requirement of experts to run the system

27. Computer System. Strictly speaking a computer is any calculating device. The name is derived
from a Latin word “Computer” meaning to reckon or compute. However, the term computer has come to mean
a special type of calculating machine having certain characteristics.

28. Internet. It provides an instant, trouble free and cheap means of communications. Internet is
therefore a collection of individual data networks connected together in such a way that data can be exchanged
back and forth between networks widely separated.. Electronic Mail, Web- Browsing and Voice Mail are the
main facilities of internet.

29. Cell Phone. Cellular radio network was first introduced in 1980. It provides a mobile subscriber
access to the global telephone network. It is a rapidly expanding technology with high rates of obsolescence.

30. Multimedia. It is a computer technology that displays information using a combination of full motion
video animation, sound graphics and text with high degree of user interaction.

31. Video-Conferencing Systems. These provide the full benefits of face to face communication
with sound, graphics and simultaneous transmission of data. The system enables people widely separated
geographically to inter- act without having to meet at one place.

Videophone. It is a system that enables us to transmit an image via digital tele network, making visual
contact has been made possible over great distances, apart from transferring speech. Facilities provided by
videophone are:
(a) Can transmit speech as well as colour video.
(b) Conduct of video conferences.
97

(c) Called subscriber is seen on the monitor.

(d) High quality of voice.
(e) Speed of sending/ receiving can be adjusted by the user.
(f) Map over-lays can be transmitted.

Information Technology

32. Information Technology or IT for short, refers to the creation, gathering, processing, storage,
presentation and dissemination of information, and also the processes and devices that enable all this to be
done. IT stands firmly on the hardware and software of a computer and the telecommunications infrastructure.
What has made the big difference in recent years is not the fact that individual computers have dramatically
improved in their capabilities, but that all those information islands are being connected by digital highways
made possible through the use of the telecommunications infrastructure by the computers, which, largely
explains why the internet and the WWW have begun to play such a significant role in our use of computers.

CONCLUSION

33. Today the technology has advanced in all spheres

of life. Even the defence forces are well poised to exploit
the state-of-art modern communication techniques for
meeting the requirements of the Indian Army in the 21st
century. Some of the areas where the army is already in
the process of exploiting are the Cellular Radio (both GSM
& CDMA), WLL, mobile trunked radio, mobile satellite
systems, OFC and so on. Therefore, it is very important to
be well versed with the latest trends in information
technology to gain maximum advantage from the same
98

CHAPTER II : BASIC RADIO TELEPHONY (RT) PROCEDURE

Introduction

1. The procedure is laid out to communicate on the Radio so as to make the conversation secure and
successful, which is referred to as “Radio Telephony”. This procedure is very important to avoid utter confusion
over radio and is generally used by defence forces, air traffic controllers, maritime operators and amateur radio
operators. Various advantages/disadvantages of RT procedure and radio communications are as under:-
(a) Advantages.
(i) Easy to establish.
(ii) Flexible.
(iii) Transmissions to more than one station.
(b) Disadvantages.
(i) Easier to intercept.
(ii) Liable to atmospheric interference and interference from other stations.
(iii) Liable to be jammed.
(iv) Skilled operators required.

2. Need for Standard Procedure. Standard procedure in RT needed to attain speed,

uniformity, security and prevents misunderstanding & confusion by use of code signs, link signs etc. which
hides identity of an operator and that of a unit.

3. Principles of Radio Telephony Procedure. BASS defines the Principles of RT procedure.

(a) B – Brevity.
(b) A – Accuracy.
(c) S – Security.
(d) S – Speed.

4. Types of Radio Telephony Communication.

(c) RT Conversation. .This is normal conversation between radio operators, which is not
registered.

(d) Unregistered ( UR) Message. The only record taken will be in radio operator’s logs of the
sender and receiver.

(e) Formal Message. It is written down and signed by the originator will be written on a
message form (IAFU-4009).

5. Definitions

(a) Radio Net. Stations working on same frequency in order to communicate with each other
comprise a Radio Net.

(b) Control Station. Station serving as the senior HQ in the Radio Net. It is responsible
for establishment of communications and maintains radio discipline on the net.

(c) Link Sign. It is secret group of letters or combination of letters and figures, allotted to a
station on radio net, for concealing the identity of the communicating station. Link signs are changed
daily or even earlier if required.

(d) Code Sign. It is three-letter group allotted to HQ/formation or unit to conceal their identity.
These are changed daily.

(e) Long Message. Message that lasts for more than half a minute generally consists
of more than thirty groups.

(f) Short Message. A short message lasts for half a minute or less.

(g) Phonetic Alphabet. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie.

99

(h) Standard Phrases. Use of standard procedure ensures that exact meaning of a sender
is conveyed to the receiver in minimum time.

(i) Code Word. A code word is a single word used to provide security cover for reference to
a classified matter.

(j) Nicknames. A nick name consists of two separate words that do not bear any relationship
to each other i.e. PAHAD BANDAR. Nick names have very little security value and are used for
convenience.

6. Radio Telephony Procedure. Standard phrases used in RT procedure are as under:-

(a) Over. My transmission has ended

and I expect to hear a further transmission
from you on this subject. Other stations will not
transmit.

(b) Out. My transmission has ended

and I do not expect you to make a further
transmission on the subject. Other stations
may transmit.

(c) Wait Out. You have finished for the time being and will call you later. Other stations may
transmit.

(d) Wait. Pause for a few seconds follows. Other stations will not transmit.

(e) Out to You. I have finished with you and am about to call another station. No reply is
expected from you. Other stations will not transmit.

(f) Roger. Message received and understood.

(g) Wilco. Message received, understood and will be complied with.

7. Types of Calls Calls can be categorised as under:-

(a) Single Call. A call when only one station on a net is addressed by anyone station of
the net.

(b) Multiple Calls. A call when two or more but not all stations on the net are addressed. The
pro word “and” will be inserted between the last two call signs e.g. `A1 for A2 and A3'.

(c) Net Call. A call used to address all stations on a net e.g. “All stations Alpha”.

(d) Net Call with Exceptions. A call used to address all stations on the net except a few.
Here a net call is made and stations not called are specified e.g. “all stations Alpha except ABC 3”.

8. Establishment of Communication. Preliminary instructions are issued by Control. They are not
sent by radio unless in dire emergency. On establishment of communications, signal strength will always be
checked and confirmed. Link signs will not be abbreviated in bad weather conditions. If a station has not come
up during establishment of communication but comes up little later, communication will be again established.
Signal communication will always be established in the following situations: -

(a) After change of frequency.

(b) Bad weather.
(c) After move.
(d) After lifting of radio silence.
(e) After change of link sign.

9. Documentation. Documentation forms a very important aspect of RT procedure. All

events need to be documented for future reference in case of a query.
100

10. Rules on Security. Security over radio is an important issue in defence forces hence there is a
need to adopt these procedures and follow certain golden rules.

(a) Think before you speak.

(b) Use correct procedure.
(c) Avoid use of jargon.
(d) Use official codes only.
(e) Substitute clear names by code signs.
(f) Be brief.

PRACTICE

11. The cadets will be given adequate practice on RT procedure.

CONCLUSION

12. Proper Radio Telephony procedure is essential to establish communication both during war and peace
time. There are certain advantages and disadvantages of RT procedure. The messages can be intercepted
by enemy and the complete information can be retrieved especially during field conditions. Considering the
same one must follow all the rules of security while communicating.
101

SUMMARY

1. Line. This is the basic means of signal communications for a force which is static.

2. Radio Communication. Radio communication involves Net Radio and Radio Relay. Net radio is the
basic means of signal communication for any mobile force.

3. Radio Relay. Radio relay implies that a series of radio transmitters and receivers normally
spaced between 20-35 Km apart and are used to provide point signal.

4. Wireless. Wireless operations permit services, such as a long-range communications, that are
impossible or impractical to implement with the use of wires.

5. Mobile Telephones. These wireless phones use radio waves from signal-transmission towers to
enable their users to make phone calls from many locations worldwide.

6. Wireless Data Communications. Wireless data communications are an essential component of

mobile computing. The various available technologies differ in local availability, coverage range and performance.

7. Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi is a wireless local area network that enables portable computing devices to connect easily
to the Internet. Wi-Fi has become the de facto standard for access in private homes, within offices, and at public
hotspots. Cellular data service offers coverage within a range of 10-15 miles from the nearest cell site.

8. A walkie-talkie is a hand-held, portable, two-way radio transceiver.

9. Radio Telephony. The procedure laid out to communicate on the Radio so as to make the
conversation secure and successful, which is referred to as “Radio Telephony”.

10. Principles of Radio Telephony Procedure.

(a) B – Bravity.
(b) A – Accuracy.
(c) S – Security.
(d) S – Speed.

11. Types of Radio Telephony communication.

(a) RT conversation.
(b) Unregistered (UR) Message.
(c) Formal Message.

12. Types of Calls.

(a) Single Call.
(b) Multiple Call.
(c) Net Call.
(d) Net Call with Exceptions.

13. Troposcatter is a system in which micro waves are transmitted in the UHF and SHF band to achieve
radio communication over the horizon covering a range between 70 Km to 1000 Km.

14. Modem (modulator-demodulator) is a network hardware device that modulates one or more carrier
wave signals to encode digital information for transmission and demodulates signals to decode the transmitted
information.

15. A satellite is an artificial object which has been intentionally placed into orbit. Such object is sometimes
called artificial satellite to distinguish them from natural satellites such as Earth’s Moon.

16. Satellites are used for a large number of purposes. Common types include military and civilian earth
observation satellites, communications satellites, navigation satellites, weather satellites, and research
satellites.

17. Multimedia is content that uses a combination of different content forms such as text, audio, images,
animation, video and interactive content. Multimedia contrasts with media that use only rudimentary computer
displays such as text-only or traditional forms of printed or hand-produced material.